MAJOR HS KALSI’S BAALNOI ACADEMY

Delhi/Jaipur
Latest Group Discussion and Lecturette Topics for SSB
1. 5G Technology In India
2. Aadhaar Card
3. Aditya-L1 Mission
4. Chandrayaan-3
5. Child Labour In India
6. Corruption in India
7. Democratic System In India
8. Dowry System In India
9. Electric Vehicles (EVs) In India
10. Foreign Direct Investment (FDI)
11. Goods and Services Tax (GST)
12. I2U2 Initiative
13. India and BRICS
14. India and the Indian Ocean Region
15. India-Middle East-Europe Corridor (IMEC)
16. India’s Act East Policy
17. India’s Coastal Security
18. India’s Necklace of Diamond Strategy
19. India Neighbourhood First Policy
20. India's Taliban Challenge
21. India-UAE Relations
22. Indo-Pacific Region
23. International North–South Transport Corridor (INSTC)
24. Inter-State River Disputes in India
25. Left Wing And Right Wing Politics
26. MGNREGA
27. Narco-Terrorism in India
28. North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO)
29. Online Education In India
30. Smart Work vs Hard Work
31. Special Economic Zones
32. Terrorism and Role of External State and Non-State Actors In Creating Challenges
to Internal Security
33. Tourism Sector In India
34. Trial By Media
35. Unemployment In India
 5G Technology In India
 About 5G Technology
 5G is the 5th generation mobile network. It is a new global wireless standard after 1G, 2G, 3G,
and 4G networks.
 It enables a new kind of network that is designed to connect virtually everyone and everything
together including machines, objects and devices.
 Internet speeds in the high-band spectrum of 5G has been tested to be as high as 20 Gbps
(gigabits per second), while, in most cases, the maximum internet data speed in 4G has been
recorded at 1 Gbps.
 5G operates on 3 different spectrum bands:
 Low-band spectrum: It offers great coverage area and wall penetration. Lower speed
compared to other spectrum bands is its disadvantage.
 Mid-band spectrum: The advantage it provides over the low-band spectrum is it
provides faster speed and lower latency. However, building penetration is lower than low-
band spectrum.
 High-band spectrum: It offers the highest speed, but the coverage area and building
penetration are greatly compromised compared to other spectrums.

 Evolution from First Generation to Fifth Generation

 1G was launched in the 1980s and worked on analog radio signals and supported only voice
calls.
 2G was launched in the 1990s which uses digital radio signals and supports both voice and data
transmission with a bandwidth of 64 Kbps.
 3G was launched in the 2000s with a speed of 1 Mbps to 2 Mbps and it has the ability to
transmit telephone signals including digitised voice, video calls and conferencing.
 4G was launched in 2009 with a peak speed of 100 Mbps to 1 Gbps and it also enables 3D
virtual reality.

 Application of 5G Technology
 Autonomous vehicles.
 Smart cities and infrastructure.
 Remote surgery and telemedicine.
 Virtual and augmented reality applications.
 Industrial automation and robotics.

 Advantages of 5G Technology
 Faster internet speeds. With greater speed comes digital growth that will result in GDP rise and
employment generation in the country.
 It will facilitate the ecosystem for the Internet of Things (IoT) by enabling smart devices to
exchange data seamlessly.
 It enables high-speed data services that have industrial applications.
 It supports critical applications like financial transactions and healthcare.
 It will help incorporate Artificial Intelligence (AI) in our daily lives.
 Improved energy efficiency and better support for advanced applications.
 Seamless connectivity.
 5G mobile technology can usher in new immersive experiences such as Virtual reality (VR) and
Augmented Reality (AR) with faster, more uniform data rates, lower latency, and lower cost-per-
bit.
 Disadvantages of 5G Technology
 High infrastructure costs.
 Limited coverage in the early stages.
 Potential health concerns.
 Increased energy consumption due to higher data rates.
 Cybersecurity challenges.
 Security and privacy issues are yet to be resolved.
 Technology is still in progress and research on its viability is going on.
 Many of the old devices would not support 5G. Therefore all of them need to be replaced with
new ones.

 India and 5G Technology

 India is actively working towards embracing 5G technology and becoming a global leader in its
deployment.
 The Indian government has taken several initiatives, such as forming a high-level forum to
develop a roadmap for 5G implementation and allocating funds for research and development in
the field.
 Moreover, India aims to collaborate with international partners to build a robust ecosystem for 5G
wireless technology and its applications, which can contribute significantly to the country's socio-
economic growth.

 Advantages of 5G for India

 The new generation mobile network has the transformative potential to provide a wide range of
benefits to the Indian economy, which when combined with artificial intelligence provides a new
face to a connected and autonomous system.
 5G networks could improve the accessibility of services such as mobile banking and healthcare,
and enable exponential growth in opportunities for unemployed or underemployed people to
engage in fulfilling and productive work.
 The Indian policy-makers can educate and empower citizens and businesses and transform
existing cities into smart and innovative cities.

 Government Initiatives towards 5G Technology

 Spectrum allocation and auctions for 5G services.
 Encouragement of research and development.
 Investment in 5G infrastructure.
 Partnerships with global players for technology transfer.
 Promotion of domestic manufacturing of 5G equipment.

 Challenges towards Rollout of 5G in India

 High cost of infrastructure development.
 Spectrum availability and pricing.
 Ensuring security and privacy.
 Skilled workforce requirements.
 Coordination among stakeholders.
 Fiber Connectivity
 Make in India challenge
 Replace older devices.
 Way Forward
 Boosting Domestic 5G Production
 The country needs to encourage and boost its local 5G hardware manufacturing at an
unprecedented rate if it needs to realise the 5G India dream.
 Pricing Rationalisation
 Rationalisation of this spectrum pricing is needed so that the government generates
adequate revenue from the auction without hampering implementation plans for 5G in
India.
 Bridging the Rural-Urban Gap
 5G can be deployed at different band spectrums and at the low band spectrum; the range
is much longer which is helpful for the rural areas.
 Existing Infrastructure and Capacity Building
 The deployment of 5G in India needs to be carefully planned after a cost-benefit analysis
by independent experts.
 This will create a level-playing field through market mechanisms such as facilitating,
simulating, auctioning, ensuring competition, functioning markets, etc.
 Taxation
 The deployment of 5G technology will also need the right of access to government
infrastructure such as traffic lights, lamp posts, etc. where wireless operators can deploy
electronic small cell apparatus.
 Reasonable fees may be charged by State and local governments to operators for affordable
deployment of 5G equipment.
 Further, removing the tax burden for deploying fibre networks reduces associated costs and
will promote investments, which will help in the smooth deployment of fibre in India.
 Government’s Assistance
 One of the key inputs of 5G is the band spectrum which the government has complete control
over. By managing the design of the spectrums, the government can control the price to be
paid by the people.
 The government can also support the telecom companies to roll out networks that are
sustainable and affordable for the public.
 Manufacturing Sector in India
 As 5G starts taking shape in India, it is important to strengthen its domestic
telecommunication manufacturing market so that the manufacturers and providers of these
technologies will be able to make a mark in the global arena.

 Conclusion
 The deployment of 5G technology in India presents significant opportunities and challenges for
the telecom industry and policymakers. A collaborative approach is needed to ensure that the
benefits of 5G technology are realized and that the deployment is sustainable and responsible.
 Industry and policymakers must work together to ensure that 5G technology is deployed in a
manner that benefits all individuals and communities, and that the opportunities presented by 5G
technology are maximized.
 The Indian government, the telecom industry, and society as a whole must work together to
ensure the successful deployment of 5G technology in India.
 The deployment of 5G technology in India presents significant opportunities for economic
growth, job creation and improvement in the quality of life for individuals and communities.

5G will act as the catalyst for Digital India.

 Aadhaar Card
 What is Aadhaar?
 Aadhaar is a 12-digit unique identification number issued by the Unique Identification Authority
of India (UIDAI) to every individual resident of India.
 It serves as proof of identity, which is linked to the individual's biometric and demographic
information.
 The Aadhaar programme was launched in 2009 by the UIDAI with the goal of providing a unique
and verifiable identity for every resident of India.
 It is now mandatory for a number of government services and is also being used by private
companies for identification purposes.
 The Aadhaar number is a unique identification number allotted to citizens that is verifiable
online.
 Any individual, irrespective of age and gender, who is a resident of India, may voluntarily enrol
to obtain an Aadhaar number.
 More than 133 Crore Aadhaars have been issued.
 99.9% of adults in India have an Aadhaar card.
 Since its inception Aadhaar Card has helped bridge the digital divide and helped in the smooth
roll-out of various government direct benefit transfer (DBT) schemes.

 Why Aadhaar Card?

 To provide for good governance, efficient, transparent and targeted delivery of subsidies, benefits
and services, the expenditure for which is incurred from the Consolidated Fund of India to
residents of India through assigning of unique identity numbers.
 The universality of Aadhaar card ensures acceptance and recognition across the country and all
service providers.
 This number can be consequently used for forming the basic, universal identity infrastructure
over which registrars and agencies across the country can build their identity based applications.
 It also has the potential to ensure trust between the public and government by eliminating the
repeated KYC (Know Your Customer) checks by various government agencies for providing
services.
 It also eases the trouble faced by citizens in availing various services by providing documents at
different agencies every time they need them.
 The centralised technology infrastructure of the UIDAI can enable 'anytime, anywhere, anyhow'
authentication. Aadhaar card could thus give migrants mobility of identity.
 It can help the poor and underprivileged people in accessing various government and private
services by providing a clear proof of identity.
 It also helps those who lack identity documents as it acts as the first form of identification they
can have access to.

 Difference from other Government Issued Identity Documents

 Aadhaar allows its bearer to have essentially a paperless online unique anytime-anywhere identity
to cover his/her entire lifetime.
 To prevent duplicate entries, residents are enrolled into the database with proper verification of
their demographic and biometric information. This ensures that the data collected is clean from
the beginning of the program.
 It has the potential to eliminate duplicates and fake identities and may be used as a basis/primary
identifier to roll out and avail several Government welfare schemes and programmes.
 Significance of Aadhaar Card
 Facilitating the Delivery of Government Services And Benefits
 Aadhaar can be used as a proof of identity and address for accessing government services
such as LPG subsidy, MGNREGA wages, and pension.
 Reducing Fraud and Leakage in Government Welfare Program
 Aadhaar helps eliminate fake and duplicate identities, thereby reducing fraud and leakage in
government welfare programs.
 Facilitating Financial Inclusion
 Aadhaar can be used as proof of identity for opening bank accounts and getting a SIM card,
which can help to increase financial inclusion in India.
 Making it Easier to Verify the Identity of an Individual
 Aadhaar can be used as a unique identification number for various purposes, such as
verification of PAN, voter ID, and passport.
 KYC Verification
 Aadhaar is also a good idea for KYC (Know Your Customer) for financial institutions; it will
make the process more efficient and cost-effective and eliminates the need for multiple
documents for the same purpose.

 Various Applications of Aadhaar

 Public Distribution System (PDS)
 Aadhaar is used to authenticate beneficiaries and ensure that they receive their ration
entitlements.
 Aadhaar-Enabled Payment System (AEPS)
 Aadhaar-based biometric authentication is used to enable transactions such as cash
withdrawal, balance inquiry, and remittances.
 Direct Benefit Transfer (DBT)
 Government benefits such as LPG subsidies, pensions, and scholarships are transferred
directly to the bank accounts linked to Aadhaar.
 Jan Dhan Yojana
 Aadhaar is used to authenticate beneficiaries and open bank accounts under this financial
inclusion scheme.
 Pension
 Aadhaar is used to authenticate pensioners and ensure they receive their pension entitlements.

 Key Features and Benefits

 One Aadhaar for One Person
 Since it is linked to an individual's biometrics, it is safe from duplicates and fakes and thus
ensures one Aadhaar number only for one person.
 Portability
 As it is a universal number, it is easy for any agency or service provider across the country to
authenticate a beneficiary's identity by availing of authentication services from the central
Unique Identification database.
 Inclusion of those who Lack Existing Identity Documents
 Those people who lack existing identity documents are most often unable to avail various
benefits which they might have been able to. Since the introduction of the Aadhaar number,
many citizens are now able to avail various benetits.
 Authenticated and Confirmed Entitlement to Beneficiaries
 This service enables confirmation of the entitlement reaching the intended beneficiary.
  Secure Direct Benefit Transfers
 The UID-enabled-Bank-Account network offers a secure and low cost platform to directly
remit benefits to residents without the heavy costs associated today with benefit distribution
and thus avoids leakages.

 Aadhaar Card and Privacy Issues

 Identity Theft
 Aadhaar may be prone to practices like illegal harvesting of biometrics and identity fraud.
 This acts as a risk to the privacy of individuals concerned.
 Identification Without Consent
 There are concerns regarding the unauthorized use of biometrics to
identify people illegally.
 Elements with evil motives may identify people by inappropriate matching of fingerprint or
iris scans, or facial photographs stored in the Aadhaar database or using the demographic
data.
 Illegal Tracking and Surveillance
 Parties that are in power or private agencies and service providers may use the Aadhaar data
by using the authentication and identification records and trails in the Aadhaar database for
illegal and unauthorized surveillance to fulfil their vested interests.
 Correlation of Identities Across Different Domains
 It may become possible to track an individual's activities across multiple domains of service
using their Aadhaar IDs, which are valid across these domains.
 This would lead to identification without consent.
 Lack Of Clear Data Usage Policy
 The lack of a clear data usage policy and regulatory framework adds to the problem.
 The Aadhaar users are not informed about the purpose and limitations of their data usage by
third party agencies.
 Other Issues
 These include:
 Lack of protection against insider threats.
 Lack of virtual identities.
 Inadequate privacy safeguards which may hamper the civil liberties of citizens.

 How Does UIDAI Ensure the Safety and Security of the Aadhaar?
 Virtual Aadhaar(Virtual ID)
 Virtual ID(VID) is a temporary, revocable 16-digit random number mapped with the Aadhaar
number. VID can be used in lieu of an Aadhaar number whenever authentication or e-KYC
services are performed.
 Authentication may be performed using VID in a manner similar to using Aadhaar number. It
is not possible to derive Aadhaar number from VID.
 Masked Aadhaar
 Mask Aadhaar option allows you to mask your Aadhaar number in your downloaded e-
Aadhaar.
 Masked Aadhaar number implies replacing of first 8 digits of the Aadhaar number with
some characters like “xxxx-xxxx” while only the last 4 digits of the Aadhaar Number are
visible.
 OTP-based Authentication
 OTP (One Time Password) based authentication is an alternative method for verifying an
individual's identity using Aadhaar.
  Instead of using the individual's biometric data or a physical Aadhaar card, OTP-based
authentication uses a one-time password that is sent to the individual's registered mobile
number.
 Tokenization of Aadhaar
 UIDAI has introduced tokenization within the Aadhaar authentication system. UID Token is
returned as part of every authentication, which is the unique token for that Aadhaar number
holder within that agency.
 This Token will be unique for each Aadhaar number for a particular entity.

 Way Forward
 Data Security and Privacy
 Strengthen data security measures to protect Aadhaar information.
 Ensure strict enforcement of data protection regulations and privacy standards.
 Authentication Reliability
 Improve the reliability of biometric authentication, especially in areas with limited
connectivity.
 Develop backup authentication methods.
 Process Streamlining
 Simplify the process of linking Aadhaar with bank accounts and other services to reduce
errors and misdirected payments.
 Provide clear information to individuals about the status and usage of their Aadhaar linked
accounts.
 Addressing Corruption
 Monitor and evaluate the impact of Aadhaar on reducing corruption in welfare programs.
 Implement additional measures to tackle specific forms of corruption, such as quantity fraud.
 Independent Research and Evaluation
 Support independent research to assess Aadhaar's effectiveness and impact in various government
programs.
 Use evidence-based findings to make informed policy decisions and improvements.
 Accountability for Misuse
 Establish mechanisms for holding individuals or organizations accountable for any misuse of
Aadhaar data or fraudulent activities.

 Coclusion
 The purpose of the Aadhaar program has been to provide universal identity to every Indian
resident. The card alone will suffice to serve as proof of identity, proof of address and proof of
date of birth.
 Aadhaar has now evolved as one of the primary identity documents and a vital instrument for the
targeted delivery of various government scheme benefits. It is expected to help reduce corruption
since every individual will have only one unique number.
 Yet, privacy issues remain a concern. These issues can be addressed only if a robust consent and
purpose limitation framework with regulatory access control architecture is introduced.

Aadhaar Card may be given more prominence in the years to

come as more and more government schemes are being
launched that require it as a mandatory document.
 Aditya-L1 Mission

 About
 Aditya-L1 is the first space based observatory class Indian solar mission to study the Sun from
a substantial distance of 1.5 million kilometers. It will take approximately 125 days to reach
the L1 point.
 Aditya-L1 is also ISRO’s second astronomy observatory-class mission after AstroSat
(2015).
 The mission's journey is notably shorter than India's previous Mars orbiter mission,
Mangalyaan.
 The spacecraft is planned to be placed in a halo orbit around the Lagrangian point 1 (L1) of
the Sun-Earth system.
 Indian Space Research Organisation (ISRO) successfully launched Aditya-L1, India's first
solar mission, from Satish Dhawan Space Centre in Andhra Pradesh's Sriharikota on
September 2, 2023.
 Aditya-L1 shall be the first space-based Indian observatory to study the Sun.
 The spacecraft shall be placed in a halo orbit around the Lagrange point 1 (L1) of the Sun-
Earth system, which is about 1.5 million km from the Earth.
 The successful launch of India's first solar mission came a week after the historic landing of
Chandrayaan-3 on the south pole of the lunar surface.
 The Aditya-L1 mission carries a suite of seven scientific payloads to carry out systematic study of
the photosphere, chromosphere and the outermost layers of the Sun (the corona) using
electromagnetic and particle and magnetic field detectors:
 Visible Emission Line Coronagraph (VELC): shall study the solar corona and dynamics of
Coronal Mass Ejections.
 Solar Ultraviolet Imaging Telescope (SUIT): payload shall image the Solar Photosphere
and Chromosphere in near Ultraviolet (UV) and also measure the solar irradiance variations
in near UV.
 Aditya Solar wind Particle EXperiment (ASPEX) and Plasma Analyser Package for
Aditya (PAPA): payloads shall study the solar wind and energetic ions, as well as their
energy distribution.
 The Solar Low Energy X-ray Spectrometer (SoLEXS) and The High Energy L1
Orbiting X-ray Spectrometer (HEL1OS): shall study the X-ray flares from the Sun over a
wide X-ray energy range.
 Magnetometer payload: is capable of measuring interplanetary magnetic fields at the L1
point.
 Using the special vantage point L1, four payloads shall directly view the Sun and the
remaining three payloads shall carry out in-situ studies of particles and fields at the L1, thus
providing important scientific studies of the propagatory effect of solar dynamics in the
interplanetary medium.

 Objective
 The mission aims to provide valuable insights into the solar corona, photosphere, chromosphere,
and solar wind.
 The primary objective of Aditya-L1 is to gain a deeper understanding of the Sun's behavior,
including its radiation, heat, particle flow, and magnetic fields, and how they impact Earth.
 Why study the Sun?
 The Sun is the nearest star and therefore can be studied in much more detail as compared to other
stars. By studying the Sun, the Indian space agency envisages to learn much more about stars in
our Milky Way as well as about stars in various other galaxies.
 The Sun is a very dynamic star that shows several eruptive phenomena and releases immense
amounts of energy in the solar system. ISRO states that if such explosive solar phenomenon is
directed towards the earth, it could cause various types of disturbances in the near earth space
environment.
 Various spacecraft and communication systems are prone to such disturbances and therefore an
early warning of such events is important for taking corrective measures beforehand. In addition
to these, if an astronaut is directly exposed to such explosive phenomena, he/she would be in
danger. The various thermal and magnetic phenomena on the Sun are of extreme nature. Thus, the
Sun also provides a good natural laboratory to understand those phenomena which cannot be
directly studied in the lab.

 What is the Significance of Exploring the Sun?

 Understanding Our Solar System
 The Sun is the center of our solar system, and its characteristics greatly influence the
behavior of all other celestial bodies.
 Studying the Sun enhances our understanding of the dynamics of our solar neighborhood.
 Space Weather Prediction
 Solar activities, such as solar flares and coronal mass ejections, can impact Earth's space
environment.
 Understanding these phenomena is crucial for predicting and mitigating potential
disruptions to communication systems, navigation, and power grids.
 Advancing Solar Physics
 Exploring the Sun's complex behavior, including its magnetic fields, heating mechanisms
and plasma dynamics, contributes to advances in fundamental physics and astrophysics.
 Enhancing Energy Research
 The Sun is a natural fusion reactor. Insights gained from studying its core and nuclear
reactions can inform our pursuit of clean and sustainable fusion energy on Earth.
 Improving Satellite Operations
 Solar radiation and solar wind affect the functioning of satellites and spacecraft.
 Understanding these solar interactions allows for better spacecraft design and operation.

 What are Lagrange Points?

 Lagrange points are special positions in space where the gravitational forces of two large
orbiting bodies, such as the Sun and the Earth, balance each other out.
 This means that a small object, such as a spacecraft, can stay at these points without using much
fuel to maintain its orbit.
 There are five Lagrange Points, each with distinct characteristics. These points enable a small
mass to orbit in a stable pattern amid two larger masses.
 Lagrange Points in the Sun-Earth System:
 L1: is considered the most significant of the Lagrange points for solar observations. A
satellite placed in the halo orbit around the L1 has the major advantage of continuously
viewing the Sun without any occultation/ eclipses. It is currently home to the Solar and
Heliospheric Observatory Satellite (SOHO).
  L2: Positioned directly 'behind' Earth as viewed from the Sun, L2 is excellent for observing
the larger Universe without Earth's shadow interference. The James Webb Space
Telescope orbits the Sun near L2.
 L3: Positioned behind the Sun, opposite Earth, and just beyond Earth's orbit, it
offers potential observations of the far side of the Sun.
 L4 and L5: Objects at L4 and L5 maintain stable positions, forming an equilateral
triangle with the two larger bodies. They are often used for space observatories, such as
those studying asteroids.

 Other Solar Missions by Different Countries

 USA
 Parker Solar Probe (August 2018): Touched the Sun’s upper atmosphere, sampled particles
and magnetic fields in December 2021.
 Solar Orbiter (February 2020): Explores the Sun’s changing space environment.
 Japan
 Hinotori (ASTRO-A, 1981): Studied solar flares using hard X-rays
 Yohkoh (SOLAR-A, 1991): Studied solar activity
 Hinode (SOLAR-B, 2006): Studied the Sun’s impact on Earth.
 Europe
 Ulysses (October 1990): Studied space environment above and below the Sun’s poles
 Proba-2 (October 2001): Part of solar exploratory missions.
 Upcoming: Proba-3 (2024), Smile (2025)
 China
 Advanced Space-based Solar Observatory (ASO-S, October 2022): Launched to observe the
Sun.

 Conclusion
 The Aditya-L1 mission by ISRO holds significant importance for India due to its focus on
studying the Sun and the solar corona. This mission aims to achieve the following:
 Scientific Understanding: The mission’s primary objective is to deepen our
understanding of the Sun, its radiation, magnetic fields, and the flow of particles.
 Space Weather Forecasting: By studying the Sun’s behaviour, the mission can
contribute to predicting space weather events, such as solar flares, that can disrupt
satellite communications and other technologies on Earth.
 Technological Advancement: Developing a space-based observatory to study the
Sun demonstrates India’s technological prowess in space exploration and adds to its
reputation in the global space community.
 International Collaboration: Participating in solar research aligns with international
efforts to understand the Sun and its effects.
 Education and Inspiration: The mission inspires future scientists, engineers, and
researchers by showcasing India’s achievements in space science and encouraging the
pursuit of space-related careers.
 Data for Innovation: The collected data can lead to innovations in technology,
materials science, and various other fields that can benefit India’s technological
landscape.

The Aditya L1 Mission is an ambitious project by the ISRO. Its success is much
awaited as it will add another feather to India's cap and its great contributions to
space technology.
 Chandrayaan-3 Mission
 About Chandrayaan-3 Mission
 Chandrayaan-3 is India's third lunar mission and second attempt at achieving a soft landing on
the moon's surface by ISRO (Indian Space Research Organisation).
 The mission took off from the Satish Dhawan Space Center (SDSC) in Sriharikota on July 14,
2023.
 The mission had a budget of ₹ 615 crore.
 It consists of an indigenous Lander module (LM), Propulsion module (PM) and a Rover
(Pragyan) with an objective of developing and demonstrating new technologies required for
Inter planetary missions.
 The Lander Module of Chandrayaan-3 carrying the Lander, Vikram and Rover,
Pragyan, made the historic soft landing on the surface of the Lunar South Pole on August 23,
2023.
 Chandrayaan-3 landing area will be known as Shiv Shakti Point, while the location where
Chandrayaan-2 encountered issues in 2019 will be called Tiranga Point.
 Thus, India became the first nation to soft-land on the surface of the Lunar south pole and
overall the fourth nation after USA, Soviet Union and China to do a soft landing anywhere on
the Earth’s natural satellite.
 With the objective to demonstrate the ability to soft landing and roving as well as to carry out
experiments on the lunar surface, the Chandrayaan 3 Mission aims to strengthen India's
prowess in space discovery and innovation. Continuing the success of its predecessors
(Chandrayaan-1 and Chandrayaan-2), the Mission has brought India into the exclusive elite
space club.
 It is expected to be supportive to ISRO’s future interplanetary missions.

 Mission Objectives of Chandrayaan-3

 To demonstrate Safe and Soft Landing on Lunar Surface
 To demonstrate Rover roving on the moon.
 To conduct in-situ scientific experiments.

 Features
 The lander (Vikram) and rover payloads (Pragyan) of Chandrayaan-3 remain the same as
the Chandrayaan-2 mission.
 The scientific payloads on the lander aim to study various aspects of the lunar environment.
These payloads include studying lunar quakes, thermal properties of the lunar surface,
changes in plasma near the surface, and accurately measuring the distance between Earth and
the moon.
 The propulsion module of Chandrayaan-3 features a new experiment called Spectro-
polarimetry of Habitable Planet Earth (SHAPE).
 SHAPE aims to search for smaller planets with potential habitability by analyzing reflected
light.

 Changes and Improvements in Chandrayaan-3

 The landing area has been expanded, providing flexibility to land safely within a larger
designated area.
  The lander has been equipped with more fuel to enable longer-distance travel to the landing
site or alternate locations.
 The Chandrayaan-3 Lander has solar panels on four sides, instead of only two in
Chandrayaan-2.
 High-resolution images from the Chandrayaan-2 orbiter are used to determine the landing
location, and physical modifications have been made to enhance stability and sturdiness.
 Additional navigational and guidance instruments are on board Chandrayaan-3 to
continuously monitor the Lander’s speed and make the necessary corrections.
 This includes an instrument called Laser Doppler Velocimeter, which will fire laser beams
to the lunar surface to calculate the Lander’s speed.
 The lander and the rover will have a mission life of one lunar day (about 14 Earth days) as
they work on solar energy.
 The landing site for Chandrayaan-3 is near the lunar South Pole.

 What is the Importance of Landing near the Lunar South Pole?

 Historically, spacecraft missions to the Moon have primarily targeted the equatorial region
due to its favorable terrain and operating conditions.
 However, the lunar South Pole presents a vastly different and more challenging terrain
compared to the equatorial region.
 Sunlight is scarce in certain polar regions, resulting in perpetually dark areas where
temperatures can reach to -230 degrees Celsius.
 This lack of sunlight and extreme cold pose difficulties for instrument operation and
sustainability.
 The lunar South Pole offers extreme and contrasting conditions that pose challenges for
humans but it make them potential repositories of valuable information about the early Solar
System.
 It is crucial to explore this region which could impact future deep space exploration.

 Challenges of landing on the South Pole

 Previous spacecraft have mostly landed near the equatorial region of the Moon, a few
degrees latitude north or south of the lunar equator. Landing near the equator is easier and
safer due to the hospitable terrain, smooth surface, absence of steep slopes, and ample
sunlight for solar-powered instruments.
 The lunar South Pole, on the other hand, presents a challenging terrain with extreme
temperatures and areas that are in permanent shadow, receiving no sunlight.

 India’s other Chandrayaan Missions

 Chandrayaan-1
 India's lunar exploration missions began with Chandrayaan-1 in 2008, which aimed to
create a three-dimensional atlas of the moon and conduct mineralogical mapping.
 Launch Vehicle: PSLV – C11.
 Chandrayaan-1 made significant discoveries, including the detection of water and
hydroxyl on the lunar surface.
 Chandrayaan-2
 Chandrayaan-2 consisted of an Orbiter, Lander, and Rover, with the goal of exploring the
lunar South Pole.
 Launch Vehicle: GSLV MkIII-M1
 Although the lander and rover crashed on the moon's surface, the Orbiter successfully
collected data and found signatures of water at all latitudes.
 Types of Moon Missions
 Flybys
 These missions involve spacecraft passing near the moon without entering its orbit,
allowing for observations from a distance.
 Examples include Pioneer 3 and 4 by the United States and Luna 3 by the USSR.
 Orbiters
 These spacecraft enter lunar orbit to conduct prolonged studies of the moon's surface and
atmosphere.
 Chandrayaan-1 and 46 other missions have utilized orbiters.
 Impact Missions
 Extensions of orbiter missions, impact missions involve instruments making an
uncontrolled landing on the lunar surface, providing valuable data before being destroyed.
 Chandrayaan-1's Moon Impact Probe (MIP) followed this approach.
 Landers
 These missions aim for a soft landing on the moon's surface, allowing for close-quarter
observations.
 Luna 9 by the USSR was the first successful landing on the moon in 1966.
 Rovers
 Rovers are specialized payloads that detach from landers and move independently on the
lunar surface.
 They gather valuable data and overcome the limitations of stationary landers. Chandrayaan-
2's rover was called Pragyan (the same name is retained for Chandrayaan-3 as well).
 Human Missions
 These missions involve the landing of astronauts on the moon's surface.
 Only NASA has achieved this feat, with six successful landings between 1969 and 1972.
 NASA's Artemis III, planned for 2025, will mark humanity's return to the moon.

 How is Chandrayaan-3 different from other moon missions?

 Chandrayaan-3 is different from other moon mission as it will be the world’s first mission to soft-
land near the lunar South Pole.
 All the previous spacecraft have landed a few degrees latitude north or south in the lunar
equatorial region as it is easier and safer to land near the equator.
 The surface near the lunar equator is even and smooth, with lesser hills or craters. Also, abundant
sunlight offers regular supply of energy to solar-powered instruments.
 The polar regions of the moon have numerous craters and many regions near lunar poles are
characterized by lack of sunlight and extremely low temperatures, reaching below minus 230
degrees Celsius. The absence of sunlight and extremely low temperatures pose obstacles for
instrument operation.

 Why ISRO wants to explore the Moon’s South Pole?

 Unexplored region
 The challenging conditions of the polar regions on the moon have discouraged exploration,
but evidence from various Orbiter missions suggests these areas hold significant potential for
exploration.
 For example, the 2008 Chandrayaan-1 mission indicated the presence of substantial amounts
of ice molecules in the deep craters of this region.
  Insights into early history of Solar System
 Also, the extreme cold temperatures in the polar regions of the moon preserves objects as
they remain frozen and undergo minimal change over time.
 As a result, the rocks and soil found in the Moon’s north and south poles have the potential to
offer valuable insights into the early stages of the Solar System.
 Presence of water
 The Moon’s minimal axial tilt of 1.5 degrees results in certain craters near the lunar north and
south poles never receiving direct sunlight.
 The South Pole region is believed to have water molecules in substantial amounts,
possibly trapped as ice in the permanently shadowed craters.
 Exploring and confirming the presence of water is essential for future human missions
and the potential utilization of lunar resources.
 Scientific Discoveries
 The extreme environment and the presence of permanently shadowed regions provide
a preserved record of the Moon’s history and the early Solar System.
 Clues to Earth’s History
 The Moon is thought to have formed from debris generated by a giant impact between a
Mars-sized object and the early Earth.
 By studying the lunar South Pole, scientists can gain insights into the materials and
conditions that existed during the formation of the Earth-Moon system.
 Global Collaborations
 ISRO-NASA successfully confirmed the presence of water from the data taken by
Chandrayaan-1.
 Indo-Japan collaboration, LUPEX aims to send a lander and rover to the Moon’s South
Pole around 2024.
 Technological Advancements
 By undertaking missions to this region, ISRO can develop and demonstrate innovative
technologies for soft landing, navigation, resource utilization, and long-duration
operations that can be applied in future space missions.

 What is the significance of the mission?

 Gaganyaan
 With a human-rated (thorough process to safely design, build and launch a crewed spacecraft)
Launch Vehicle Mark (LVM) to be used for the upcoming
 Gaganyaan mission, the LVM-3’s successful launch of the Chandrayaan-3 has gained
significance, as it has further enhanced the reliability of the launch vehicle.
 Shift In India’s Space Programme
 The Chandrayaan and Mangalyaan signal a shift in strategy.
 Earlier, ISRO seemed focussed on utilitarian objectives like enabling telecommunications,
telemedicine and tele-education, broadcasting, or setting up remote sensing satellites.
 But space and planetary exploration is becoming a priority now.
 Future Space Exploration
 The ability to make a soft landing on a planetary body is a crucial technology which can
impact IRSO’s ability to carry out, or participate in, other scientific missions to the moon.
 In the future, there is a likelihood of discontinuing the International Space Station, leading
several nations, including the US, to explore the construction of more permanent structures
on the lunar surface. India aspires to become a significant partner in these endeavors.
  Boost To The Indian Space-Tech Ecosystem
 The successful launch of Chandrayaan-3 could bolster investor confidence and attract more
private investment in space technology.
 This development will promote cost-efficient and highly reliable space-grade hardware
provided by the Indian space industry for this mission.
 Moreover, it validates India’s industry as a potential supplier for lunar programs undertaken
by other countries.
 Boosting Private Investment
 India's field-tech sector is on investors' radars with historic growth of private rocket launches
and satellite deployments.
 The accomplishment of the Chandrayaan trio should drive investor confidence higher and
attract more private investment in aerospace technology projects.
 Job creation
 India’s booming aerospace technology sector has already created hundreds of jobs.
 Successful lunar missions and subsequent programs are poised to create additional high-tech
business opportunities, both directly and indirectly.
 Nurturing Startups
 The success of Chandrayaan-3 could be a technology showcase, boosting India’s goodwill in
the global space community.
 This could attract joint ventures and business opportunities for Indian companies and startups
to develop and develop space systems for the global market.
 Strategic Positioning and Strengthening International Reputation
 The success of Chandrayaan-3 has positioned India as an important player in the international
space race, potentially matching China’s influence. With Russia facing economic sanctions, it
is an opportunity for India to strengthen its position.
 It has earnt India global recognition and lead to the cost-effective adoption of spacecraft
manufactured by Indian companies and proof of its reliability. This achievement has led to
useful international cooperation.

 Conclusion
 This success offers tangible power advantages, which is evident by the fact that major global
powers are also leading space-faring nations. Hence, ISRO should swiftly progress in this new
phase.
 Moreover, the future of space exploration will heavily rely on collaboration, as the envisioned
missions and infrastructure necessitate capabilities beyond the reach of any single country. But
collaborations will only be established with partners who can add value to the partnership.
 India has the potential to exert a significant influence on global space policy and should actively
pursue the establishment of a regional space alliance, such as an Asian Space Agency, to enhance
collective bargaining power and become a formidable force in the field.
 While prioritizing the peaceful use of outer space, India must also remain cautious of the potential
militarization of space.
 However, becoming a space power is a crucial initial step, and Chandrayaan-3 can propel India
closer to achieving this goal.

Chandrayaan 3, driven by a passionate mission, serves as an

inspiration for generations to aspire toward the stars.
 Child Labour In India
 Child Labour
 The Child and Adolescent Labor (Prohibition and Regulation) Act 1986 defines a “child” as
someone who has not reached the age of 14.
 As per the definition by the Internation Labour Organisation, Child Labour can be defined as the
work that takes away childhood from children and their potential and dignity, which is harmful to
both their mental and physical development.
 In most extreme forms, the International Labour Organization explains Child Labour as children
being separated from their families and exposed to hazards and illness at a very early age.
However, those children who involve in work without harming their health and affecting their
education are not Child Labour.

 Child Labour in India

 There are 10.1 million child labourers recorded in India between 5-17 years of age.
 Child labour has increased rapidly in urban areas and declined in rural
areas.
 62.8% of India’s child labour aged between 14-17 are engaged in hazardous work and most of
them are engaged in agricultural activities.
 India's biggest child labour employers are - Uttar Pradesh, Bihar, Rajasthan, Madhya Pradesh,
and Maharashtra.

 Types of Child Labour in India

 Bonded Child Labour: it means the employment of a child against the debt, loan, or social
obligation by the family of the child.
 Migrant Children: those who are migrated from other locations with family are usually forced to
drop out of schools and get involved in Child Labour.
 Street Children: the children living on the streets, such as ragpickers, beggars, shoeshines
children, etc.
 Working Children: those who are working as a part of family labour.
 Children for Sexual Exploitation: many young girls and boys are forced to get involved in
sexual activities.
 Gender-Specific: here, child labour is gender-specific. For example, girls are being engaged in
domestic and home-based work, and on the other hand, boys are working as wage laborers.

 Causes of Child Labour in India

 Population: the population of India has increased rapidly. The job opportunities available
compared to the population of the country are fewer. It is one of the factors behind Child Labour.
 Poverty: is one of the main causes of Child Labour in India. Here the income from a child’s work
is required for his or her own survival and also for the household.
 Orphans: orphans get involved in working to meet their daily needs. New provisions in Indian
Constitution should be made that would focus on educating the orphans so they can avoid
working at a young age.
 Debt Trap: financial backlog and debt are the reasons that lead to Child Labour.
 Demand for Child Labour: the rising demand for Child Labour in big cities is also responsible
for increasing Child Labour.
  Adult unemployment and underemployment: Because of the high prevalence of adult
unemployment and underemployment, children are frequently forced to labor in order to support
their families.
 Illiteracy and ignorance of the child’s parents: The problem is made worse by the child’s
parents’ illiteracy. Because of their illiteracy and lack of awareness of the adverse repercussions
of child labour, they break the law and expose their children to inhumane exploitation.
 Cultural Factors: The assumption that children contribute to the family’s and community’s
financial survival, as well as the presence of large families, contribute to the prevalence of child
labour. From an early age, children frequently take up their families’ traditional work. For
example, a goldsmith’s son or a carpenter’s child may start learning carpentry at a young age.
 Social Factors: India’s varied social structure and child labour have a strong relationship. In
India, the majority of child labourers are from the so-called lower castes (SCs), as well as the
tribal and Muslim religious minorities.
 Lack of fundamental and significant quality education and skills training: The current
educational infrastructure is unsuitable for children from low-income families. Increasing dropout
rates and forced child labour have resulted from the poor quality of schooling.

 Impacts of Child Labour

 Child labour has significant and far-reaching impacts on the lives of children, families,
communities, and societies as a whole. Here are some of the key impacts of child labour:
 Physical Risk: the children are exposed to many physical risks in various work sectors. As
they work for long hours without having a proper diet can lead to a lack of physical and
mental development.
 Affect Childhood: Child Labour takes away childhood from the children. It doesn’t allow
the child to get her/his right to education and leisure.
 Impact on Adult life: Child Labour doesn’t allow the child to develop skills that are
important to have good opportunities for decent work when they grow up.
 Affect Country: the increment of Child Labourers has a bad impact on the overall economy
of the country, and it is a senior obstacle to the socio-economic welfare of the country.

 Acts Related to Child Labour in India

 Child Labour has become a big matter of concern for both Union and state governments. A
number of legislative initiatives have been taken at both levels.
 Below are major national legislative developments that aim for Children’s Welfare in India:
 Factories Act, 1948
 Mines Act, 1952
 National Child Labour Programme, 1988
 Article 24 of the Indian Constitution
 Juvenile Justice (Care and Protection) of Children Act, 2000
 Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act, 1986
 Right to Education Act, 2009

 Government Initiatives on Child Labour

 Constitutional and Legal Provisions
 The Constitution (Eighty-sixth Amendment) Act of 2002 added Article 21-A to the Indian
Constitution, establishing it as a Fundamental Right to provide all children between the ages
of six and fourteen with free and compulsory education in accordance with any legal
requirements imposed by the State.
 Article 23 prohibits forced work and human trafficking.
  Article 24 states that no kid under the age of fourteen may be employed in a factory, mine, or
in any other dangerous occupation.
 Article 39 states that “the health and strength of workers, men and women, and the tender
age of children are not abused”.
 In the same manner, Child Labour Act (Prohibition and Regulation) 1986 prohibits children
under the age of 14 years to be working in hazardous industries and processes.
 Policy interventions such as MGNREGA 2005, the Right to Education Act 2009 and the
Mid Day Meal Scheme have paved the way for children to be in schools along with
guaranteed wage employment (unskilled) for rural families.
 Government Schemes on Child Labour
 The Ministry of Labour and Employment created the PENCIL Portal as an electronic tool to
effectively implement the No Child Labour Policy.
 Programme for the National Child Labour Project (NCLP) enrolls kids in school and prevents
them from working in order to empower and motivate them.
 The Gurupadswamy Committee was established in 1979 to investigate the subject of child
employment and made several policy recommendations to address the issues posed by
children who work.
 Act of 2016 amending the Child Labour (Prohibition and Regulation) Act: The Amendment
Act outright forbids hiring anyone under the age of 14.
 Amendment to the Juvenile Justice (Care and Protection of Children) Act of 2000 made in
2006. Regardless of their age, working children fall within the category of children in need of
care and protection.
 A 2009 law called the Right to Free and Compulsory Education Act was established.
According to the law, every kid between the ages of six and fourteen must be enrolled in
schools and get free education.
 In 2002, the World Day against Child Labour was established by the International Labour
Organisation. It is honoured on June 12th of each year all across the world.

 Associated Issues With the Child Labour

 Cause & Effect Relationship: Child labour and exploitation are the result of many factors,
including poverty, social norms condoning them, lack of decent work opportunities for adults and
adolescents, migration and emergencies. These factors are not only the cause but also a
consequence of social inequities reinforced by discrimination.
 Threat to National Economy: The continuing persistence of child labour and exploitation poses a
threat to national economies and has severe negative short and long-term consequences for children
such as denial of education and undermining physical and mental health.
 Child Labour in Informal Sector: Though child labour is banned by law, across India child
labourers can be found in a variety of informal industries like in brick kilns, carpet weaving,
garment making, agriculture, fisheries, etc.
 Disguised Child Labour: Despite rates of child labour declining over the last few years, children
are still being used in disguised form of child labour like domestic help.
Work performed may not appear to be immediately dangerous, but it may produce long-term and
devastating consequences for their education, their skills acquisition .Hence, their future
possibilities to overcome the vicious circle of poverty, incomplete education and poor quality jobs.
 Linkage With Child Trafficking: Child trafficking is also linked to child labour and it always
results in child abuse. Trafficked children are subjected to prostitution, forced into marriage or
illegally adopted; they provide cheap or unpaid labour and are forced to work as house servants or
beggars and may be recruited into armed groups.
 Way Forward
 Role of Panchayat
 As nearly 80% of child labour in India emanates from rural areas, the Panchayat can play a
dominant role in mitigating child labour. In this context, panchayat should:
 Generate awareness about the ill-effects of child labour,
 Encourage parents to send their children to school.
 Create an environment where children stop working and get enrolled in schools instead.
 Ensure that children have sufficient facilities available in schools.
 Inform industry owners about the laws prohibiting child labour and the penalties for violating
these laws.
 Motivate Village Education Committees (VECs) to improve the conditions of schools.
 Integrated Approach
 Child labour and other forms of exploitation are preventable through integrated approaches that
strengthen child protection systems as well as simultaneously addressing poverty and inequity,
improve access to and quality of education and mobilize public support for respecting children’s
rights.
 Treating Children as Active Stakeholders
 Children have the power to play a significant role in preventing and responding to child labour.
 They are key actors in child protection and can give valuable insights into how they perceive their
involvement and what they expect from the government and other stakeholders.
 Education
 Spreading literacy and education is a potent weapon against the practice of child labour, because
illiterate persons do not understand the implications of child labour.
 The single most effective way to stem the flow of school-aged children into child labour is to
improve access to and quality of schooling.
 Eradicate Unemployment
 Another way to stop child labour is to eliminate or rein in unemployment. Because of inadequate
employment, many families cannot afford to meet all their expenses.
 If employment opportunities are increased, they will be able to let their children read and write
and become worthy citizens.
 Attitude change
 It is important that the attitudes and mindsets of people are changed to instead employ adults and
allow all children to go to school and have the chance to learn, play and socialize as they should.
A sector-wide culture of child labour-free businesses has to be nurtured.
 Coordinated policy efforts should be taken to provide employment and income support to all
informal sector workers to stimulate the economy and labour demand.
 States should prioritise efforts to continue education for all children, using all available
technology.
 Financial support or relaxation of school fees and other related school expenses should be given
to those children who wouldn’t be able to return to school otherwise.
 School authorities need to ensure that every student gets free lunches at home until schools open.

Children belong in schools not workplaces. Elimination of child labour

demands commitment from the society e.g. family, state, civil society and
those who employ children in any enterprise. Strengthening policy and
legislative enforcement, and building the capacities of government,
workers and employers organisations as well as other partners at national,
state and community levels should be prioritized.
 Corruption In India
 Corruption
 Corruption refers to misusing public power for personal gain. It can be done by an elected
politician, civil servant, journalist, administrator of a school, or anyone in authority.
 Apart from public corruption, there is also private corruption between individuals and
businesses.
 Corruption is dishonest behavior by those in positions of power. It starts with the tendency of
using public office for some personal benefit. Moreover, it is unfortunate that corruption has, for
many, become a matter of habit. It is so deeply entrenched that corruption is now considered a
social norm. Hence, corruption implies the failure of ethics.
 Transparency International (TI) defines corruption as “The abuse of entrusted power for private
gain. It can be classified as grand, petty and political, depending on the amounts of money lost
and the sector where it occurs”.
 Thus, the corruption definition applies to different forms.

 Causes of corruption
 Legacy Issues
 Rampant poverty and empty coffers of the government at the dawn of independence leading
to chronic low salaries of the government officials.
 Pre liberalization license permit raj catered by Monopolies and restrictive trade practices
facilitated the corruption.
 The lack of economic freedom led to abuse of the system.
 Necessities of development overshadowed vigilance procedures.
 Political System
 Use of black money in elections to win at any cost creates the need for the recovery of that
cost through malpractices.
 Election funding is not transparent making it prone to the usage of black money and funding
based on quid pro quo.
 It leads to crony capitalism, an unholy nexus between politicians and corporates.
 Criminalization of politics- when the rule-breakers become rule makers, the casualty is the
rule of law.
 Economic Structure
 Low levels of formalization (merely 10%) of the economy breed black money.
 Stringent compliance rules for entry and exit for businesses result in bribery.
 Unequal distribution of wealth – Transparency International data suggests that corruption is
directly proportionate to the economic gap in a nation.
 Legal Lacunae
 Archaic laws like IPC 1860 don’t capture the complexities of administration and lead to the
escape of wrongdoers.
 Lacunae in the Lokpal act and delays in the appointments both at the state and central levels
 Dilution of the RTI act and political misuse of CBI and other agencies.
 Administrative Lacunae
 Loopholes give discretionary powers to the officials making working prone to corruption.
 Lack of resources, funding, infrastructure and manpower in the vigilance institutions.
 Lack of incorporation of standard practices by organizations like banks, sports organizations
which results in multi-billion-rupee scams. ex. Punjab National Bank scam, commonwealth
games scam.
  Judicial Delays
 Lack of protection to good Samaritans.
 Targeting of upright and non-corrupt officials and rewards to corrupt officials.
 Near non-existent whistleblowers protection.
 Social Problems
 The mindset of the citizenry that doesn’t look at the problems seriously and even accepts it as
a necessary part of the system.
 Increasing consumerism in the new middle class that is ready to bribe to get things done.
 Failure of social morality, education system to inculcate the values.

 Impacts of Corruption
 Hindrances To Developmental Process
 Loss of wealth due to corruption and siphoning away of taxpayers money leave little to spend
in the social sector.
 Corruption in the social sectors like PDS, health and education schemes lead to demographic
disadvantage.
 Economic Loss
 Undermines ease of doing business.
 Corruption in the public services sector carries high risks for conducting good businesses.
 Companies are likely to unwanted red tapes, petty corruption, bribes for finalizing any
procedures or deals.
 Wrong allocation policies result in undervaluation of resources like Coal blocks,
Hydrocarbon projects, Spectrum allocation. Eg. 2G scam, Coalgate.
 This mismanagement of resources leads to environmental degradation and exploitation.
 Corruption of financial sector officials like banks, the stock market erodes the strength of the
economy. E.g. PNB scam, PMC scam, Harshad Mehta scandal
 Social Sector Losses
 Corruption in government projects targeting poor and vulnerable section of the society
increases the economic gap between the rich and the poor.
 The corrupt system denies the poor a chance to improve their status rendering them eternally
poor.

 Legal Framework for Fighting Corruption

 Indian government has constituted a Special Investigation Team (SIT) on black money.
 It has enacted a comprehensive and more stringent new law – the Black Money (Undisclosed
Foreign Income and Assets) and Imposition of Tax Act, 2015.
 There is also a Benami Transactions (Prohibition) Amendment Act, 2016, which empowers the
authorities to attach and confiscate benami properties.
 Law enforcement agencies such as CBI have done a great deal to reduce corruption.
 Prevention of Corruption Act, 1988
 It provides for penalties in relation to corruption by public servants and also for those who are
involved in the abetment of an act of corruption.
 Amendment of 2018 criminalised both bribe-taking by public servants as well as bribe giving
by any person.
 The Prevention of Money Laundering Act, 2002
 It aims to prevent instances of money laundering and prohibits use of the ‘proceeds of crime’
in India.
  The Companies Act 2013
 It provides for corporate governance and prevention of corruption and fraud in the corporate
sector.
 The term ‘fraud’ has been given a broad definition and is a criminal offence under the
Companies Act.
 The Indian Penal Code, 1860
 It sets out provisions which can be interpreted to cover bribery and fraud matters, including
offences relating to criminal breach of trust and cheating.
 The Foreign Contribution (Regulation) Act, 2010
 It regulates the acceptance and use of foreign contributions and hospitality by individuals and
corporations.
 Right To Information Act, 2005
 The intent behind the enactment of the Act is to promote transparency and accountability in
the working of Public Authorities.
 Whistle Blowers Protection Act, 2014
 The Act seeks to protect whistleblowers, i.e. persons making a public interest disclosure
related to an act of corruption, misuse of power, or criminal offense by a public servant.
 It is provided by the Right to Information Act, 2005.
 The RTI Act, 2005 is also called as a 'twin sister' of whistleblowing.
 The Lokpal and Lokayukta Act, 2013
 The Lokpal and Lokayukta Act, 2013 provided for the establishment of Lokpal for the Union
and Lokayukta for States.
 The Lokayukta is an anti-corruption authority constituted at the state level.
 It investigates allegations of corruption and mal-administration against public servants and is
tasked with speedy redressal of public grievances.
 The Lokpal and Lokayuktas (Amendment) Bill, 2016
 The Bill amends the Lokpal and Lokayuktas Act, 2013 in relation to the declaration of assets
and liabilities by public servants.
 It requires a public servant to declare his assets and liabilities, and that of his spouse and
dependent children.

 Way forward
 There is a need for windfall reforms in each and every section of the system to fight the
menace. Every aspect of governance must be improved for efficiency, economy, and
effectiveness.
 Electoral Reforms
 Imposing limits on the overall expenditure of the political parties.
 Making state funding of elections a reality.
 Empowering ECI by giving legal force to MCC and making paid news a criminal offence.
 Strengthening of autonomous institutions
 Protecting the autonomy of CIC-giving him/her a constitutional status
 Eliminate overlapping of jurisdiction- eg. Lokpal and CBI
 Administrative Reforms
 Establishing the Civil Service Board to curb the excessive political control over the
administration.
 Conducting periodic sensitivity training for the civil servants.
 Simplifying the disciplinary proceedings and strengthening preventive vigilance within the
departments to ensure corrupt civil servant do not occupy the sensitive position.
 Police and judicial reforms– implementation of Prakash Singh recommendations.
  Governance Reforms
 E-governance apart from advancing the good governance objectives of accountability and
transparency also seeks to reduce the manual interface between state and citizen thus
preventing the incidences of bribery.
 Drives like Digital India projects like Government e-Marketplace must be implemented.
 Economic Reforms
 Negating legal lacunae in banking, stock market legislations.
 Improving corporate governance by implementing corporate governance committee reports.
 Formalization of the economy.
 Social Sector Improvements
 Awareness of citizenry by training them in RTI act, Citizens charter, social audits.
 Increasing democratization of the masses.
 Curriculum reforms to inculcate values even in higher education by which youngsters acquire
high standards of ethical mindset.
 Education
 Education is one of the most critical steps. It can help in reinforcing the correct business
practices.
 Mandatory education courses like anti-money laundering must be introduced.
 Accountability
 Accountability mechanisms can also help in curbing corruption.
 Efficient Reporting
 Furthermore, it can be easier to reduce corruption if reporting it becomes simple.
 Leading by the Best Practices
 The senior employees in the management department must lead by example and cultivate an
open and transparent culture.
 Encouraging Ethical Culture
 Similarly, rewards and incentives must be granted to encourage people to cultivate an ethical
culture.
 Need For Innovative Anti-Corruption Solutions
 There is a need for real-time information sharing between law enforcement agencies.

 Conclusion
 The impact of corruption is especially heavy on common citizens, and even more on poorer and
vulnerable persons in communities as it increases costs and reduces access to services, including
health, education and justice.
 Corruption encourages dysfunctionality in government, perpetrates economic inefficiency and
can be a serious threat to national security.
 Every aspect of governance must be improved for efficiency, economy, and effectiveness.
 Integrity, transparency, and fight against corruption have to be part of the culture. They must be
thought of as fundamental values of the society we live in.
 In India, some recent anti-corruption initiatives have been taken. For example, various Supreme
Court’s ruling in pursuit of curbing criminalization of politics, many e-governance initiatives will
improve transparency and accountability. These measures are indeed steps in the right direction,
but bringing behavioural change in society will act as the most potent weapon against corruption.

Corruption is the enemy of progress and development.

Corruption is a threat to national security and must be tackled with the
utmost seriousness.
 Democratic System In India
 About
 The term 'democracy' originates from the Greek words 'demos' (people) and 'kratos' (rule),
essentially meaning 'rule of the people.' It is a system of government where citizens exercise
power directly or elect representatives to form a governing body. Democracy stands out as a
system where the government is accountable to the citizens, and not the other way around.
 Democracy is defined as a form of government in which the citizens of that country have direct
power to participate in the election and elect the representatives for forming a government body
called a parliament.
 A democratic form of government is based on the majority’s rule i.e. a government can be formed
by a party when they have the majority number of votes with them and the process is similar in
the case of choosing representatives. The power of a democratic form of government cannot be
inherited.
 There are two types of democracies in the world:
 Direct democracy: Direct democracy is the one in which the eligible citizens directly and
actively participate in the political decision-making.
 Indirect democracy: Indirect democracy is the one in which the sovereign power remains
with the eligible citizens and the elected representatives exercise the political power; this type
of democracy is also known as democratic republic or the representative democracy

 Principles of Democracy
 Democracy is underpinned by a set of fundamental principles that determine its authenticity and
effectiveness. These principles of democracy include:
 Participation: Every citizen, regardless of gender, race, or social status, has a right to
participate in the democratic process, primarily through voting.
 Equality: All citizens are equal before the law and are entitled to equal protection and benefit
of the law.
 Transparency: The processes, decisions, and actions of a democratic government must be
transparent, ensuring accountability.
 Accountability: Elected representatives are accountable to the people who elected them.
 Control over the agenda: Citizens have the collective right to decide on the political,
economic, and social agendas of their societies.

 Types of Democracy
 Democracy is not a one-size-fits-all system. It takes on different forms and structures, adapting to
the cultural, historical, and socio-economic contexts of a nation.
 Representative Democracy
 In a representative democracy, citizens elect representatives to make laws and policies on
their behalf.
 This form of democracy is prevalent in large and populous countries where direct
participation of all citizens is logistically challenging.
 The representatives, usually elected for a specific term, are expected to represent the interests
and aspirations of their constituents while making decisions.
 Constitutional Democracy
 A constitutional democracy is a democratic government regulated by a constitution. This
constitution establishes the fundamental political principles, and often guarantees basic rights
to its citizens.
  In a constitutional democracy, the power of the government and its officials is limited by law,
and they are held accountable to these laws.
 The core idea is to prevent the abuse of power and protect citizens' rights, thereby ensuring
the principles of democracy are upheld.
 Monitory Democracy
 Monitory democracy is a modern form of democracy where various kinds of watchdog bodies
and agencies monitor and influence the exercise of power.
 These monitors can be non-governmental organizations, independent media, public integrity
commissions, and various other bodies that keep an eye on the actions of elected
representatives.
 They provide an additional layer of accountability, transparency, and control over the misuse
of public power.

 Elements of Democracy
 Free and Fair Elections
 A key element of democracy is the conduct of regular, free, and fair elections. These
elections allow citizens to elect their representatives and government leaders.
 Free means that all eligible citizens have the right to vote, without coercion or manipulation.
 Fair signifies that the elections are competitive, impartial, and transparent, ensuring that the
results accurately reflect the voters' will.
 Rule of Law
 Democracy is underpinned by the rule of law. This principle means that every individual,
including government officials, is subject to the law and equal in the eyes of the law.
 It ensures that laws are publicly known, universally applicable, and enforced fairly, thus
safeguarding citizens' rights and freedoms.
 Protection of Basic Human Rights
 Democracy is also characterized by the protection of fundamental human rights. These rights,
often enshrined in a nation's constitution, may include freedom of speech and expression,
right to life and personal liberty, right to equality, and freedom of religion.
 A democratic society respects and protects these rights, promoting human dignity and social
justice.
 Active Citizen Participation
 Active citizen participation is another vital element of democracy. Besides voting, citizens
participate in democratic processes by expressing their views, demanding accountability from
public officials, and engaging in community and civic activities.
 This participation fosters a vibrant and responsive democratic society.
 Democratic Institutions
 Democratic institutions form the backbone of a democratic society. These institutions, which
include the judiciary, parliament or congress, and executive bodies, operate within the
framework of constitutional laws and principles.
 They balance power, ensure accountability, and facilitate democratic governance.

 Negative Points of Democracy

 Leaders keep changing in a democracy, this leads to instability.
 Democracy is all about political competition and power play. There is no scope for morality.
 So many people have to be consulted in democracy.. This leads to delay in decision making
 Elected leaders do not know the best interests of the people. It leads to bad decisions.
 Democracy leads to corruption for it is based on electoral competition.
 Ordinary people don't know what is good for them; they should not decide anything
 Positive Points of Democracy
 Democracy is better than any other form of government in responding to the needs of the people.
 It is more accountable form of government.
 It enables peaceful transfer of power through free and fair elections.
 Discussion and consultation improves the quality of decision making.
 Democracy provides a method to deal with differences and conflicts.
 Democracy is the best form of governance because it enhances the dignity of citizens.
 Democracy allows us to correct its own mistakes.
 It promotes equality among citizens.

 Democracy in India
 The democratic government in India is the largest one. The beginning of the democratic system in
India was when the Constitution of India came into effect on 26th January 1950.
 Democratic India reveals that for choosing representatives through the election, every citizen of
India has the right to vote without any discrimination irrespective of any creed, caste, religion,
region, and sex.
 The principles on which the democratic government of India is based are liberty, equality,
fraternity, and justice. In India, there is a state government and a central government which means
it is a federal form of government.
 The government i.e. at the center and the state follows the democratically elected government
respectively and the parliament’s two houses – Rajya Sabha and Lok Sabha.
 The country’s president (the official head) is chosen by the two governments i.e., the central and
the state. The beginning of the democratic system was put a way forward when the election was
held for the first time, the first government was created by the people’s vote.
 The election in India for the first time was noticed to be one of the biggest experiments in the
world’s democracy.
 Based on the universal adult franchise the elections were conducted, according to the universal
adult franchise, the citizens of India who are 18 years or above 18 years have the right to vote and
form government irrespective of their religion, culture, creed, sex, region, and caste. As this was
the beginning of the democratic system in India, the procedure of the election was new to the
citizens as well as those who are conducting it.
 The election procedure occurred for about four months which was from October 25, 1951, to
February 21, 1952. The election was contested by 14 national parties along with regional parties
(63) and several candidates were independent. By getting the majority of votes and majority of
the seats, the National Congress party won the election for the first time in India.

 Features of Democratic Government In India

 Parliamentary Form of Government
 India has a parliamentary form of government based on a universal adult franchise.
 The executive authority is responsible to the elected representatives of the people. Parliament
for all its decisions and actions. Sovereignty rests ultimately with the people.
 Written Constitution
 In contrast to many other nations, India has a written constitution which clearly defines the
roles, powers, and obligations of the several departments of government and sets down the
limitations within which they must operate.
 Supremacy of the Constitution
 In India, neither the parliament nor the judiciary have any precedence over the Constitution.
  Independent Judiciary
 The Independent judiciary is another feature of democratic government.
 Independent judiciary means that in a democratic form of government the judiciary need not
depend on the legislature or executive.
 The Fundamental Rights
 The Fundamental Rights of every Indian citizen include the freedom of speech, expression,
belief, assembly and association, migration, and choice of occupation or trade.
 These rights also protect every Indian from discrimination on grounds of race, religion, creed
or sex, and are enforceable in courts of law.
 Collective Responsibility
 In the democratic government in India, both the center and state, the Council of Ministers to
their respective legislatures are collectively responsible.
 For any act by the government, the entire ministers of the council are responsible and not a
single minister alone.
 Majority Rules
 The majority rule is one of the main features of Indian democracy.
 The party which forms the government needs to get the majority number of votes in the
election.
 This is the majority rule and every citizen of the country must support and accept the
government that got the majority number of votes from the citizens.
 Opinions of the Minority are Respected
 Though Indian democracy has the feature of majority rules opinions of minorities are also
considered. Minorities are also asked to give their opinions on any field.
 As India is a democratic form of government so both positive and negative criticisms are
taken into consideration and minorities’ opinions must be tolerated by majorities.
 Provisions for Rights
 Indian democratic government provides several rights to the individual.
 These rights include the Right to Education, Freedom of speech and expression, the Right to
form a union or association, etc.
 Government that Compromise
 Indian democracy is a form of government that considers the opinion of the ruling party as
well as the other parties. It is a type of government that compromise and adjusts.
 Political Equality
 Indian democracy is based on political equality, which means every citizen of India is equal
before the law and has the right for voting irrespective of class, creed, caste, race, sex, and
religion.

 Outcomes of Democracy
 It produces government that is accountable to the citizens, and responsive to the needs and
expectations of the citizens.
 Democratic decisions are both more acceptable to the people and more effective.
 Transparent and legitimate government.
 Political equality.
 Democracy accommodates social diversity.
 Democracy in India has strengthened the claims of the disadvantaged and discriminated castes for
equal status and equal opportunity.
 A public expression of dissatisfaction with democracy shows the success of democratic project.
 Challenges Faced by Indian Democracy
 Heterogeneous Society
 The major challenge faced by democracy is the heterogeneous composition of the country as
Indian society is divided on the basis of caste, religion, etc.
 People in India still vote in favour of caste, community or religion.
 Criminalisation of Politics
 Criminalisation of politics and political violence also create hindrance in the smooth
functioning of democracy.
 Manipulation of people’s verdicts by the political parties is still practised.
 Other factors
 Factors such as corruption, women’s issues, caste issues, political strategies etc. affect
politics at the national and the state level in the country.
 Illiteracy is a major factor which can affect the smooth functioning of democracy in the
country.
 Poverty too affects the successful running of democracy.
 Political and communal violence has gained serious proportions in the country.

 Way ahead
 The role of the citizens of India is most important for its democracy.
 For a successful working of democracy, it is the right as well as the duty of every Indian to
choose and elect the appropriate representative for the country.
 Civil society has to go beyond the nation-state to renew the idea of the Earth as an imagination.
 India needs a new rethink around peace. It has to go beyond the official text of security and
borders.
 Universal literacy i.e. education for all, poverty alleviation, elimination of gender discrimination,
removal of regional imbalances, administrative and judicial reforms and sustained economic,
social and environmental development.
 A defecting MLA must be disqualified from contesting or becoming a minister for at least six
years.
 Stricter data protection laws are required to ensure that political parties do not indulge in practices
that involve undue influencing of voting behaviour.
 Voter education, electoral reforms and periodical highlighting of the performance (or
nonperformance) of elected representatives should be high priority.
 People must exercise their right to vote, participate in democracy and contribute towards the
development of the country.
 The youth must be aware of the problems that the country is facing and choose the candidate who
is most likely to bring about a change.
 Democracy cannot survive without both citizens’ participation and politicians’ accountability.

A functioning, robust democracy requires a healthy, educated, participatory

followership and an educated, morally grounded leadership. Democracy is the
government of the people, by the people, for the people.
 Dowry System In India
 Dowry - Meaning
 Dowry is a social evil in society that has caused unimaginable tortures and crimes towards
women and polluted the Indian marital system.
 Dowry is payment made in cash or kind to a bride’s in-laws at the time of her marriage.
 The dowry system in India refers to the bride's family giving to the bridegroom, his parents, or his
relatives as a condition of the marriage.
 Dowry is essentially in the nature of payment in cash or some kind of gifts given to the
bridegroom's family along with the pride and includes cash and other household items.
 As per the Dowry Prohibition Act, 1961, dowry has been defined as “any property or valuable
security given or agreed to be given either directly or indirectly, by one party to a marriage to
the other party to the marriage, or by the parent of either party to a marriage or by any other
person, to either party to the marriage or to any other person, at or before or any time after the
marriage”.
 Today the government has come up with many laws (The Dowry Prohibition Act 1961) and
reforms, not only to eradicate the dowry system, but also to uplift the status of the girl child by
bringing in many schemes.
 However, owing to the social nature of this problem, the legislation has failed to produce the
desired results in our society.
 In order to get rid of this problem, appealing to the social and moral consciousness of the people,
providing education and economic independence for women, and effective enforcement of
legislation against the dowry system, can help.
 The dowry system is thought to put a great financial burden on the bride's family.
 In some cases, the dowry system leads to crime against women, ranging from emotional abuse
and injury to even deaths.

 History of Dowry in India

 The traces of the dowry system in India can be found in the Vedic Ages.
 The Code of Manu sanctioned dowry and bride wealth in ancient India, but dowry was the more
prestigious form and associated with the Brahmanic (priestly) caste.
 Dowries originally started as "love gifts" for the marriages of upper caste individuals, but during
the medieval period, the demands for dowries became a precursor for marriage.
 The demand for dowries spread to the lower caste, and became a prestige issue, with the system
becoming rigid and expensive.
 It is believed that in medieval times, it was a gift in cash or kind given to a bride by her family to
maintain her independence after marriage.
 During the colonial period, it became the only legal way to get married, with the British making
the practice of dowry mandatory.
 Dowry got more pronounced after the country achieved Independence in 1947.
 Although seeking a dowry has been outlawed in India since 1961, the ban has been a challenge to
enforce.
 In recent decades, dowry has become an essential part of marriage especially in some parts of
northern India. This exploitative system has turned the custom of giving gifts and well wishes
into a compulsory demand for money, respect and subjugation hindering the growth of Indian
society where women are being viewed as a burden on the family.
 Reasons for Dowry
 Economic Causes
 These include inheritance systems and the bride's economic status. Dowry gives, at least in
theory, women economic and financial security in their marriage.
 Social Factors
 The system encourages dowry perhaps due to the exclusion of the bride's family after
marriage as a form of pre mortem inheritance for the bride.
 Customs And Traditions
 A majority of dowry-related cases in India take place to adhere to the customs and traditions
of the Indian society. People tend to follow what has been followed through the years and
stick to such customs even if it causes discomfort to them.
 Social Structure
 The Indian society is mainly patriarchal and the dowry system is largely the manifestation of
the patriarchal nature of the Indian society where women are being considered as a burden on
the family and giving dowry is one kind of compensation for transferring its burden whereas
male offsprings are considered to be superior and breadwinners thus making families demand
dowry for them.
 Fear of Ill-treatment
 Many families in India give dowry to get rid of their insecurity of ill-treatment of their
daughters by their in-laws. There is a perception that giving dowry will ensure their
daughter's security after marriage and non-discrimination.
 Societal Pressure
 Many a time, it becomes a matter of status to give dowry.
 In Indian society, it has become a common phenomenon to measure one's status by the
amount of money one spends on their daughter's marriage.
 Similarly, the more educated and well-to-do family, the groom belongs to, the amount of
dowry is that high. The pressure thus increases on both fronts, on the bride's side to pay more,
on the groom's side to demand more.
 Social Constraints
 Compulsion to marry within one's caste or clan further intensifies the problem.
These limitations deplete the pool of desirable grooms leading to a lack of desirable options
thus helping the desirable side to demand more.
 Illiteracy
 Lack of education and awareness among people persuades them to give and demand dowry.
If families were aware that women have equal status as men and they are not to be treated as
a burden, then this system might have not perpetuated.

 Impact of Dowry System

 Gender Discrimination
 Due to the dowry system, many a times it has been seen that women are seen as a liability
and are often subjected to subjugation and are given second hand treatment may it be in
education or other amenities.
 Objectification of Women
 Contemporary dowry is more like an investment by the bride's family for plugging into
powerful connections and money making opportunities.
 This renders women as merely articles of commerce.

 Affecting Career of Women

  The larger context for the practice of dowry is the poor presence of women in the
workforce, and their consequent lack of financial independence.
 The Poorer sections of society who send their daughters out to work and earn some money,
to help them save up for her dowry.
 The regular middle and upper class backgrounds do send their daughters to school, but don't
emphasize career options.
 Gender Imbalance
 As the cases of violence against women and dowry-related deaths increase, the malice of
sex selection before birth and female foeticide and infanticide rise leading to the fall in the
sex ratio leading to gender imbalance which has grim consequences for the future.
 India's sex ratio at birth and its child sex ratio has languished at much lower than ideal levels,
in large part due to a preference for male children in many parts of the country.
 Declined Social Status and Self-Esteem of Women
 Since women face such discrimination from early childhood, they have low self-esteem
compared to men of their age. They are made to believe that they are a burden on their
families and thus undesirable. Their status is often being considered inferior.
 Many Women End Up Being Unmarried
 An uncountable number of girls in the country, despite being educated and professionally
competent, remain endlessly unmarried because their parents cannot fulfill the demand for
pre-marriage dowry.
 Crime Against Women
 In some cases, the dowry system leads to crime against women, ranging from emotional
abuse and injury to even deaths.

 Legal Status in India

 The payment of dowry has long been prohibited under specific Indian laws including the Dowry
Prohibited under specific Indian law including:
 Dowry Prohibition Act, 1961
 To prohibit giving or taking of dowry.
 Anyone who violates this law is punishable with imprisonment for a term not less than
five years, and fine of not less than ₹ 15,000, or an amount of the value of such dowry,
whichever is more.
 Section 304-B of the IPC
 It is about the Dowry death of a woman subjected to cruelty or harassment by her
husband or any relative of her husband.
 Section 498-A of the IPC (offence of cruelty)
 Against the husband or his relative if the wife commits suicide within a period of seven
years from the date of her marriage.
 Section 174 of CrPC
 It wss amended to secure Post Mortem in case of suicide or death of a woman within
seven years of her marriage.
 Section 113A
 It has been introduced in the Evidence Act, 1872 raising a presumption of cruelty as
defined under Section.

 Way Forward
 Recognizing Limitations of Political Solution to Social Problem
 No law can be enforced without the wholehearted cooperation of the people.
  Enacting a law no doubt sets a pattern of behaviour, activates social conscience and renders
some assistance towards the efforts of social reformers in getting it abolished.
 However, social evil like dowry cannot eradicate itself unless the people carry the
philosophy behind the law much further.
 Educating Girls
 Education and independence is one powerful and valuable gift that parents can give to their
daughter. This will in turn help her to be financially sound and be a contributing member of
the family, giving her respect and right status in the family.
 So providing the daughters with a solid education, and encouraging her to pursue a career of
her choice is the best dowry any parent can ever give their daughter.
 Creating Social Stigma around Dowry
 Accepting dowry should be made a social stigma, and all generations should be addressed.
For this, social consciousness about the ill effects of the dowry system needs to be aroused.
In this context the Union and State governments must take effective steps for stepping up
‘anti-dowry literacy’ among people through Lok Adalats, radio broadcasts, television and
newspapers on a ‘continuing’ basis.
 Youths are the only ray of hope to effectively combat the menace of the dowry system.
They must be given moral value based education to broaden their minds and widen their
outlook.
 Multi Stakeholder Approach
 Dowry is not a standalone problem, thus society should take every step to bring gender
parity.
 In this context, states should look at gender-disaggregated data across the life cycle – birth,
early childhood, education, nutrition, livelihood, access to healthcare, etc – to address
gender inequality. At home, men should share domestic work and care responsibilities.

 Conclusion
 The practice of dowry is not only illegal but also unethical. Therefore, the conscience of society
needs to be fully awakened to the evils of the dowry system so that the demand for dowry itself
should lead to ‘loss of face’ in society for those who demand it.
 Proper implementation of anti-dowry laws may help. In addition, misuse of such laws must be
checked.
 Women should be encouraged to become self-dependent and efforts should be made to make
education accessible to every girl child.
 Efforts to spread awareness should be made against dowry and dowry-related violence and
women should be made aware of their rights.
 Awareness campaigns should be organised at school and local levels.
 People should be encouraged not to practice such traditions which harm women rather treat
women at par with their male counterparts and help them live a dignified life.
 Social practices like marriage within one’s caste or clan should be abolished so that there is the
availability of a wide range of choices and women are not forced to enter into marriage with a
person with dowry demands.

The causes of dowry and its effects have grim implications for society. With
women playing a major role in society, the onus lies with them as well to fight
this social evil and help other women stand against it. Women education and
their empowerment with change in the social mindset is the way forward.
 Electric Vehicles (EVs) In India
 Electric Vehicle (EV)
 An electric vehicle (EV) is one that operates on an electric motor, instead of an internal-
combustion engine that generates power by burning a mix of fuel and gases.
 An electric vehicle, uses one or more electric motors or traction motors for propulsion.
 An electric vehicle may be powered through self-contained battery, solar panels or an electric
generator to convert fuel to electricity.
 Electric Vehicles (EV’s) include road and rail vehicles, surface and underwater vessels, electric
aircraft and electric spacecraft.
 Though the concept of electric vehicles has been around for a long time, it has drawn a
considerable amount of interest in the past decade amid a rising carbon footprint and other
environmental impacts of fuel-based vehicles.
 An electric vehicle may be powered through a collector system by electricity from off-vehicle
sources, or may be self-contained with a battery, solar panels, fuel cells or an electric generator to
convert fuel to electricity.
 Electric Vehicles can play a vital role in combating climate change across the globe by helping to
cut down the emissions and reducing dependence on fossil fuels.
 There can be no denying that the era of electric vehicles (EVs) is well and truly upon us. With
zero tailpipe emissions, EVs are a direct cure for air pollution.

 Electric Vehicles – 8 Different Types

 Plug-in Electric Vehicle  Airborne Electric Vehicles
 On- and Off-road Electric Vehicles  Electrically Powered Spacecraft
 Space Rover Vehicles  Range-extended electric vehicle
 Seaborne Electric Vehicles  Railborne Electric Vehicles

 Plug-in Electric Vehicle (PEV)

 A plug-in electric vehicle (PEV) is any motor vehicle that can be recharged from any external
source of electricity, such as wall sockets, and the electricity stored in the Rechargeable battery
packs drive.
 Plug-in Electric Vehicles can be further categorized into
o Plug-in Hybrid Electric vehicles, (PHEVs)
o Battery electric vehicles (BEVs)
 Plug-in Hybrid Electric Vehicles (PHEV)
o A plug-in hybrid electric vehicle (PHEV) is a hybrid electric vehicle whose battery can
be recharged by plugging it into an external source of electric power, as well as by its on-
board engine and generator.
o Most PHEVs are passenger cars, but there are also PHEV versions of commercial
vehicles and vans, military vehicles, utility trucks, trains, motorcycles, buses and mopeds.

 Battery Electric Vehicles

 A battery electric vehicle (BEV), pure electric vehicle, only-electric vehicle or all-electric vehicle
is a type of electric vehicle (EV) that exclusively uses chemical energy stored in rechargeable
battery packs, with no secondary source of propulsion.
 Battery Electric Vehicles (BEV) thus have no internal combustion engine, fuel cell, or fuel tank.
 Some of the broad categories of vehicles that come under this category are trucks, cars,buses,
motorcycles, bicycles, forklift etc.
 Origin and Increasing Scope in India
 The push for EVs is driven by the global climate agenda established under the Paris Agreement
to reduce carbon emissions in order to limit global warming.
 The global electric mobility revolution is today defined by the rapid growth in EV uptake.
 About two in every hundred cars sold today are powered by electricity with EV sales.
 The global EV fleet totals for 1% of the global vehicle stock and 2.6% of global car sales.
 Falling battery costs and rising performance efficiencies are also fueling the demand for EVs
globally.

 Need for EVs in India

 Climate Change
 The Problem of rapid global temperature increase has created the need for a reduction in the
use of fossil fuels and the associated emissions.
 India has committed to cutting its GHG emissions intensity by 33% to 35% below 2005
levels by 2030.
 Rapid Urbanization
 Economic development leads to rapid urbanization in emerging nations as rural populations
move non-agricultural sectors in cities creating environmental problems.
 According to a recent study by World Health Organisation (WHO), India is home to 14 out of
20 most polluted cities in the world. EVs will help in tackling this problem by reducing local
concentrations of pollutants in cities.
 Energy Security
 India imports oil to cover over 80% of its transport fuel.
 EVs can reduce dependence on imported crude oil promoting India’s energy security.
 Innovation
 It will encourage cutting edge technology in India through adoption, adaptation, and research
and development.
 EVs manufacturing capacity will promote global scale and competitiveness.
 Employment
 Promotion of EVs will facilitate employment growth in a sunrise sector.
 Clean and Low Carbon Energy
 The shift towards renewable energy sources has led to cost reduction from better electricity
generating technologies. This has introduced the possibility of clean, low-carbon and
inexpensive grids.
 Cutting Edge Battery Technology
 Advances in battery technology have led to higher energy densities, faster charging and
reduced battery degradation from charging. Combined with the development of motors with
higher ratings and reliability, these improvements in battery chemistry have reduced costs and
improved the performance and efficiency of electric vehicles.

 Why Are EVs Crucial?

 Better Energy Efficiency
 Internal Combustion engines will consume fuel even when the vehicle is stationary,
whereas in electrical vehicles, the energy is not consumed when it is stationary.
 Electrical Vehicles ‘tank-to-wheels’ efficiency is about a factor of 3 higher than internal
combustion engine vehicles
 Environmental Benefits
 EVs have the potential to significantly reduce greenhouse gas emissions and combat climate
change.
 Unlike fossil fuel engine vehicles, EVs produce zero tailpipe emissions.
 EVs help reduce carbon dioxide (CO2) and other pollutants that contribute to air pollution,
smog, and global warming.
 EVs reduce health effects from air pollution as they help reduce harmful pollutants such
as nitrogen oxides (NOx), particulate matter (PM) and volatile organic compounds (VOCs).
 This has a direct positive impact on public health, as cleaner air reduces the risk of
respiratory and cardiovascular diseases.
 EVs have the potential to reduce greenhouse gas emissions and reduce dependence on
petroleum.

 Mechanical Advantages
 They can be finely controlled and provide high torque from rest, unlike internal combustion
engines, and do not need multiple gears to match power curves. Hence it removes the
requirement for gearboxes and torque converters.
 EVs produce lesser vibration and lesser noise.
 Electric motors are mechanically very simple and often achieve 90% energy conversion
efficiency over the full range of speeds and power output and can be precisely controlled.

 Energy Diversity and Security

 EVs contribute to energy diversity by reducing dependence on oil imports.
 As the electricity grid can be powered by a mix of energy sources, including renewables
like solar and wind, EVs offer the opportunity to shift transportation towards cleaner and
more sustainable energy options.
 This reduces vulnerability to fluctuations in oil prices and enhances energy security by
reducing reliance on fossil fuel imports.

 Technological Advancements and Job Creation

 The development and adoption of EVs have spurred technological advancements in battery
technology, electric drivetrains, and charging infrastructure.
 These advancements not only benefit the automotive sector but also have broader
applications, such as energy storage for renewable energy sources and grid stability.
 Electric mobility creates jobs and innovation in battery manufacturing, renewable energy,
and charging infrastructure.

 Long-Term Cost Savings

 Electric vehicles have lower operating costs, as electricity is generally cheaper than
gasoline or diesel.
 Moreover, EVs have fewer moving parts and require less maintenance, resulting in
reduced servicing and repair expenses over time.

 Decongesting Cities
 Electric vehicles can help decongesting cities by promoting shared mobility and compact
design.
 Shared mobility refers to the use of vehicles as a service rather than as a personal asset.
This can reduce the number of vehicles on the road and the need for parking space.
 Compact design refers to the use of smaller and lighter vehicles that can fit more easily in
urban spaces. This can also reduce congestion and emissions.
  Innovative and futuristic smart EVs for shorter intra-city distances, day- trips, and the like
would not need a bigger battery. That means less time to recharge and lower cost.

 What are the challenges for EVs?

 High Initial Cost
 The upfront cost of purchasing an electric vehicle is relatively higher compared to
conventional vehicles. The high initial cost makes it less affordable for many potential
buyers, limiting the demand for EVs.
 In India, the average price of an electric vehicle is roughly INR 13 lakh, which is
significantly more expensive than the INR 5 lakh average for fuel-efficient vehicles.
 This cost difference is primarily due to the expensive battery technology used in EVs.

 Limited Charging Infrastructure

 In India, the charging infrastructure is still in the early stages of development and is
concentrated in major cities.
 The lack of a robust and widespread charging network makes it inconvenient for EV
owners, especially for those living in apartments or without dedicated parking spaces.
 It is quite expensive to set up the infrastructure for charging these vehicles, buy the land for
charging stations, and buy the components.

 Range Anxiety
 Range anxiety refers to the fear or concern of running out of battery charge while driving.
Limited driving range is a significant challenge for EV adoption.
 Although EV ranges have been improving, there is still a perception that EVs may not
offer sufficient range for long-distance travel, particularly in a country with vast distances
like India.
 The batteries in EVs degrade over time, which can lead to a decrease in range.

 Battery Technology and Supply Chain

 The production of lithium-ion batteries, which are a key component of EVs, requires
specific minerals and rare earth elements.
 India currently relies heavily on imports for battery manufacturing, leading to supply chain
challenges.
 The charging time of EVs is longer than the refuelling time of conventional vehicles, which
affects their convenience and usability.
 India depends on China for its electric vehicle parts because China is currently the world’s
largest exporter of those parts.
 The manufacturing of such vehicles requires highly technical abilities, which are now in
short supply in India. These abilities must be developed on a vast scale.
 The installation of charging infrastructure is challenging in several areas of India due to the
inadequate electrical supply.

 Unavailability of Materials for Domestic Production

 Battery is the single most important component of EVs.
 India does not have any known reserves of lithium and cobalt which are required for battery
production.
 Dependence on other countries for the import of lithium-ion batteries is an obstacle in
becoming completely self-reliant in the battery manufacturing sector.
  Limited Model Options
 Currently, the availability of electric vehicle models in India is relatively limited compared
to conventional vehicles.
 The market needs more options in various segments, including affordable EVs, to cater to
diverse consumer preferences and requirements.

 Policy Challenges
 EV production is a capital intensive sector requiring long term planning to break even and
profit realization, uncertainty in government policies related to EV production discourages
investment in the industry.

 Lack of Technology and Skilled Labour

 India is technologically deficient in the production of electronics that form the backbone of
the EV industry, such as batteries, semiconductors, controllers, etc.
 EVs have higher servicing costs which require higher levels of skills. India lacks dedicated
training courses for such skill development.

 Way Forward
 Electric Vehicle as Way Forward
 EVs will contribute to improving the overall energy security situation as the country
imports over 80% of its overall crude oil requirements, amounting to approximately $100
billion.
 The push for EVs is also expected to play an important role in the local EV manufacturing
industry for job creation.

 Opportunities for Battery Manufacturing and Storage

 With recent technology disruptions, battery storage has great opportunity in promoting
sustainable development in the country, considering government initiatives to promote e-
mobility and renewable power (450 GW energy capacity target by 2030).
 With rising levels of per capita income, there has been a tremendous demand for consumer
electronics in the areas of mobile phones, UPS, laptops, power banks etc. that require
advanced chemistry batteries.
 This makes manufacturing of advanced batteries one of the largest economic
opportunities of the 21st century.

 EV Charging Infrastructure
 An EV charging infrastructure that draws power from local electricity supply can be set up
at private residences, public utilities such as petrol and CNG pumps, and in the parking
facilities of commercial establishments like malls, railway stations, and bus depots.
 The Ministry of Power has prescribed at least one charging station to be present in a grid of
3 km and at every 25 kms on both sides of the highways.

 Increasing R&D in EVs

 The Indian market needs encouragement for indigenous technologies that are suited for
India from both strategic and economic standpoint.
 Since investment in local research and development is necessary to bring prices down, it
makes sense to leverage local universities and existing industrial hubs.
 India should work with countries like the UK and synergise EV development.
 Government Initiatives to Promote EVs in India
 The government has set a target for electric vehicles making up 30 % of new sales of cars and
two-wheelers by 2030 from less than 1% today
 FAME India
 As part of the program, 11 cities are receiving subsidies to introduce electric buses, taxis, and
three-wheelers.
 FAME II
 Phase II of FAME seeks to give a push to EVs in public transport and seeks to encourage
adoption of EVs by way of market creation and demand aggregation.
 Establishment of Charging stations are also proposed on major highways connecting major
city clusters on both sides of the road at an interval of about 25 km each.
 FAME 2 will offer incentives to manufacturers who invest in developing electric vehicles and
their components, including lithium-ion batteries and electric motors.
 Bureau of Indian Standards (BIS)
 Department of Heavy Industry, Automotive Research Association of India are devising
design and manufacturing standards of EVs, Electric Vehicle Supply Equipment (EVSEs) &
charging infrastructure to smoothen the advent of in-house production of EVs.
 National Mission on Transformative Mobility and Battery Storage
 To promote clean, connected, shared, sustainable and holistic mobility initiatives.The
Mission will drive mobility solutions that will bring in significant benefits to the industry,
economy and country.
 Phased Manufacturing Programme
 To support the setting up of a few large-scale, export-competitive integrated batteries and
cell-manufacturing Giga plants in India.
 National Electric Mobility Mission Plan 2020
 It aims to deploy 5 to 7 million electric vehicles nationwide, indicating the importance of
government incentives and collaboration between businesses and academia.
 Concessions on the GST
 The government levies a 5% GST on electric vehicles. On the other hand, it charges a GST of
28% on internal combustion automobiles.
 Go Electric Campaign
 The government launched the Go Electric campaign to promote the use of electric vehicles
and kitchen appliances and to ensure the nation’s energy security.

 Conclusion
 India has set a very ambitious target to achieve net zero by 2070 at UNFCC COP26.
 To achieve this goal, EVs have a crucial role to play.
 While EVs themselves produce zero tailpipe emissions, the overall environmental impact of
electric vehicles depends on the source of the electricity used to charge them.
 If the electricity is generated from renewable sources like solar or wind, the environmental
benefits are maximized.

Electric vehicles can significantly contribute to the global effort to

prevent climate change by contributing to the reduction of emissions
and reliance on fossil fuels. India has evolved into a global leader on the
issue of climate change. Since transportation accounts for 80% of
emissions, a gradual transition to electric vehicles is essential for a
sustainable environment.
 Foreign Direct Investment (FDI)
 Foreign Direct Investment (FDI)
 A Foreign Direct Investment (FDI) is an investment made by a firm or individual in one
country into business interests located in another country.
 FDI lets an investor purchase a direct business interest in a foreign country.
 FDI can take the form of obtaining a long-term interest or expanding one's business into a
foreign country.
 FDI is common in open economies with a skilled workforce and good growth prospects.
 FDI brings more than simply money; it also brings skills, technology, and knowledge.
 Investors can make FDI in a number of ways. Some common ones include establishing
a subsidiary in another country, acquiring or merging with an existing foreign company,
or starting a joint venture partnership with a foreign company.
 Apart from being a critical driver of economic growth, FDI has been a major non-debt
financial resource for the economic development of India.
 Foreign companies invest in India to benefit from reduced salaries and other unique
investment benefits such as tax breaks.
 Foreign enterprises participating in FDI are closely involved in the other country's day-to-day
operations.

 Components Of FDI
 Equity Capital
 It is the foreign direct investor’s purchase of shares of an enterprise in a country other
than its own.
 Reinvested Earnings
 It comprises the direct investors’ share of earnings not distributed as dividends by
affiliates, or earnings not remitted to the direct investor.
 Such retained profits by affiliates are reinvested.
 Intra-company Loans
 These refer to short- or long-term borrowing and lending of funds between direct
investors (or enterprises) and affiliate enterprises.

 Routes of FDI
 Automatic Route
 In this, the foreign entity does not require the prior approval of the government or the
RBI (Reserve Bank of India).
 In India FDI up to 100% is allowed in non-critical sectors through the automatic
route, not requiring security clearance from the Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA).
 Prior government approval or security clearance from MHA is required for investments
in sensitive sectors such as defence, media, telecommunication, satellites, private
security agencies, civil aviation and mining, besides any investment from Pakistan and
Bangladesh.
 Examples:
 Medical devices: upto 100%
 Thermal power: upto 100%
 Infrastructure company in the securities market: upto 49%
 Services under Civil Aviation Services such as Maintenance: upto 49%
 Insurance: upto 49%
  Government Route
 In this, the foreign entity has to take the approval of the government.
 The Foreign Investment Facilitation Portal (FIFP) facilitates the single window
clearance of applications which are through approval route.
 It is administered by the Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade
(DPIIT), Ministry of Commerce and Industry.
 Examples:
 Broadcasting Content Services: 49%
 Banking & Public sector: 20%
 Food Products Retail Trading: 100%
 Print Media: 100%
 Multi-Brand Retail Trading: 51%

 Sectors where FDI is Prohibited

 Agricultural or Plantation Activities (although there are many exceptions like horticulture,
fisheries, tea plantations, Pisciculture, animal husbandry, etc.)
 Atomic Energy Generation
 Nidhi Corporation
 Lotteries (online, private, government, etc.)
 Investment in Chit Funds
 Trading in Transferable Development Rights (TDR’s)
 Any Gambling or Betting businesses
 Cigars, Cigarettes, or any related tobacco industry
 Housing and Real Estate (except townships, commercial projects, etc.)

 Impact of FDI on the Economy

 FDI brings in financial resources for economic development.
 FDI brings in new technologies, skills, knowledge, etc.
 FDI generates more employment opportunities for the people.\
 FDI brings in a more competitive business environment in the country.
 FDI improves the quality of products and services in sectors.
 FDI helps the economy expand in the long run. MNCs transmit technology to domestic firms,
resulting in the organic growth or expansion of businesses and the creation of jobs.
 By boosting a company's assets, FDI improves its financial statement. Profits increase for
businesses, and worker productivity increases as well.
 Consumption rises in tandem with per capita income. As tax revenues rise, so does government
spending.
 The rupee strengthens versus the dollar as exports increase and the balance of payments displays
a surplus.
 As a result of FDI, technology transfer, or the migration of technical know-how, takes place,
resulting in skill development, which, when combined with increased capital, boosts productivity
and profitability.
 Furthermore, investments have a gestation period, and returns increase after a few years.
 FDI also acts as a major supplement to India's domestic investment stock.

 Disadvantages of FDI
 It can affect domestic investment and domestic companies adversely.
 Small companies in a country may not be able to withstand the onslaught of MNCs in their sector.
There is the risk of many domestic firms shutting shop as a result of increased FDI.
 FDI may also adversely affect the exchange rates of a country.
 Regulatory Framework for FDI in India
 Companies Act
 Securities and Exchange Board of India Act, 1992 and SEBI Regulations
 Foreign Exchange Management Act (FEMA)
 Foreign Trade (Development and Regulation) Act, 1992
 Civil Procedure Code, 1908
 Indian Contract Act, 1872
 Arbitration and Conciliation Act, 1996
 Competition Act, 2002
 Income Tax Act, 1961
 Foreign Direct Investment Policy (FDI Policy)

 Important Government Authorities in India concerning FDI

 Foreign Investment Promotion Board (FIPB)
 Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade (DPIIT)
 Reserve Bank of India (RBI)
 Directorate General of Foreign Trade (DGFT)
 Ministry of Corporate Affairs, Government of India
 Securities and Exchange Board of India (SEBI)
 Income Tax Department
 Several Ministries of the GOI such as Power, Information & Communication, Energy, etc.

 Government Measures to Promote/Boost FDI

 The Government of India has taken many initiatives in recent years such as relaxing FDI
norms across sectors such as defence, PSU oil refineries, telecom, power exchanges, and stock
exchanges, among others.
 ‘Make in India’ and ‘Atmanirbhar Bharat’ campaigns coupled with strengthening of India’s
footing in global supply chains have given momentum to FDI inflows over the past few years.
 Launch of Schemes attracting investments, such as, National technical Textile Mission,
Production Linked Incentive Scheme, Pradhan Mantri Kisan SAMPADA Yojana, etc.
 The first wave of the Covid-19 pandemic prompted around 1,000 companies to shift their base
out of China, with nearly 300 of them being in the areas of medical and electronic devices,
mobiles and textiles. For India, companies like Lava International with over 600 employees
clarified its intention to shift its base to India from China.
 Higher FDI inflows have been possible due to the liberal and attractive policy regime for the
investors, a good business climate and reduced regulatory framework.
 Government schemes like production-linked incentive (PLI) scheme in 2020 for electronics
manufacturing, have been notified to attract foreign investments.
 In 2019, the amendment of FDI Policy 2017 by the government, to permit 100% FDI under
automatic route in coal mining activities enhanced FDI inflow.
 FDI in manufacturing was already under the 100% automatic route, however, in 2019, the
government clarified that investments in Indian entities engaged in contract manufacturing is
also permitted under the 100% automatic route provided it is undertaken through a legitimate
contract.
 Further, the government permitted 26% FDI in digital sectors. The sector has particularly high
return capabilities in India as favourable demographics, substantial mobile and internet
penetration, massive consumption along technology uptake provides great market opportunity
for a foreign investor.
  The Foreign Investment Facilitation Portal (FIFP) is the government of India's online single point
of contact with investors to facilitate FDI. It is managed by the Ministry of Commerce and
Industry's Department for Promotion of Industry and Internal Trade.
 Foreign investors have expressed interest in the government's plans to allow private train
operations and auction off airports, which is expected to boost FDI inflow.
 In addition, valuable sectors such as defence manufacturing, which the government increased
the automatic route FDI ceiling from 49% to 74% in May 2020, are projected to draw big
investments in the future.

 New FDI Policy

 According to the new FDI policy, an entity from a nation that shares a land border with India, or
if the beneficial owner of investment in India is based in or a citizen of such a country, can only
invest through the government route.
 Government permission is also required for a transfer of ownership in an FDI agreement that
benefits any country that shares a border with India.
 Rather than requesting prior authorization from the relevant government department, investors
from countries not covered by the new policy must simply notify the RBI after a transaction.
 In all industries, the previous FDI policy only allowed Bangladesh and Pakistan to invest through
the government method. Companies from China are now subject to the government's route filter
as a result of the amended rule.

 Way Forward
 Government policies/decisions are of crucial importance in creating a conducive environment
for global investors. The disruptions induced by the pandemic have given opportunities for
India to expand its global footprints.
 The government is striving to strengthen the FDI environment through an array of
policy initiatives and reforms at all levels.
 This also has to be complemented by a sound trade policy to boost exports further,
encourage inclusive development, and incentivise R&D (research & development) to make
our industry globally competitive.
 FDIs have more potential to facilitate the growth of the Indian economy than Foreign Portfolio
Investment (FPI).
 It should be ensured that India remains an attractive, safe, predictable destination for serious,
long term investors.
 A level playing field is necessary if we want continued foreign investments. Sneaking loyalty
towards local players should be avoided.

 Conclusion
 FDI is a major driver of economic growth and an important source of non-debt finance for the
economic development of India. A robust and easily accessible FDI regime, thus, should be
ensured.
 Economic growth in the post-pandemic period and India’s large market shall continue to attract
market-seeking investments to the country.

India's recent economic reforms are steps in the right direction. There is no
doubt that future reforms will strengthen trade and investment ties as well
as benefit India's domestic industry. FDI has the potential to be a valuable
investment plan for India’s economic development.
 Goods and Services Tax (GST)
 Introduction
 The Goods and Services Tax (GST) is a value-added tax levied on most goods and services sold
for domestic consumption.
 The GST is paid by consumers, but it is remitted to the government by the businesses selling the
goods and services.
 It is a destination-based taxation system.
It has been established by the 101st Constitutional Amendment Act.
 It is an indirect tax for the whole country on the lines of “One Nation One Tax” to make India a
unified market.
 It is a single tax on the supply of Goods and Services in its entire product cycle or life cycle i.e.
from manufacturer to the consumer.
 It is calculated only in the “Value addition” at any stage of goods or services.
 The final consumer will pay only his part of the tax and not the entire supply chain which was the
case earlier.
 There is a provision of the GST Council to decide upon any matter related to GST whose
chairman is the Finance Minister of India.

 Main Features of GST

 Applicable On supply side
 GST is applicable on ‘supply’ of goods or services as against the old concept on the
manufacture of goods or on sale of goods or on provision of services.
 Destination based Taxation
 GST is based on the principle of destination-based consumption taxation as against the
present principle of origin-based taxation.
 Dual GST
 It is a dual GST with the Centre and the States simultaneously levying tax on a common
base.
 GST to be levied by the Centre is called Central GST (CGST) and that to be levied by the
States is called State GST (SGST).
 Import of goods or services would be treated as inter-state supplies and would be subject to
Integrated Goods & Services Tax (IGST) in addition to the applicable customs duties.
 GST rates to be mutually decided
 CGST, SGST & IGST are levied at rates to be mutually agreed upon by the Centre and the
States. The rates are notified on the recommendation of the GST Council.
 Multiple Rates
 Initially GST was levied at four rates viz. 5%, 12%, 16% and 28%. The schedule or list of
items that would fall under these multiple slabs are worked out by the GST council.

 Types of GST
 CGST: Central Goods and Services Tax (CGST) extends to the whole of India and shall be
charged on all the intra-State supplies of goods or services or both.
 SGST: States Goods and Services Tax (SGST) extends to the whole of the respective state
or union territory and shall be charged on all intra-state supplies of goods or services or both.
 IGST: Integrated Goods and Services Tax (IGST) extends to the whole of India and shall be
charged on all the inter-state supplies of goods or services or both.
 Principle of GST
 The Centre will levy and collect the Central GST.
 States will levy and collect the State GST on the supply of goods and services within a state.
 The Centre will levy the Integrated GST (IGST) on the interstate supply of goods and services,
and apportion the state’s share of tax to the state where the good or service is consumed.
 The 2016 Act requires Parliament to compensate states for any revenue loss owing to the
implementation of GST.

 Legislative Basis Of GST

 In India, GST Bill was first introduced in 2014 as The Constitution (122nd Amendment) Bill.
 This got an approval in 2016 and was renumbered in the statute by Rajya Sabha as The
Constitution (101st Amendment) Act, 2016. Its provisions:
 Central GST to cover Excise duty, Service tax etc, State GST to cover VAT, luxury tax etc.
 Integrated GST to cover inter-state trade. IGST per se is not a tax but a system to coordinate
state and union taxes.
 Articles 246A – States have power to tax goods and services.

 GST Council
 Article 279A - GST Council to be formed by the President to administer & govern GST.
 Its Chairman is THE Union Finance Minister of India with ministers nominated by the state
governments as its members.
 The council is devised in such a way that the centre will have 1/3 rd voting power and the states
have 2/3rd. The decisions are taken by 3/4th majority.

 Taxes at the Centre and State level that are incorporated into the GST
 At the State Level
 State Value Added Tax/Sales Tax
 Entertainment Tax (Other than the tax levied by the local bodies)
 Octroi and Entry Tax
 Purchase Tax
 Luxury Tax
 Taxes on lottery, betting, and gambling
 At the Central level
 Central Excise Duty
 Additional Excise Duty
 Service Tax
 Additional Customs Duty (Countervailing Duty)
 Special Additional Duty of Customs

 Reforms Brought About by GST

 Creation of Common National Market
 By amalgamating a large number of Central and State taxes into a single tax.
 Mitigation of Cascading Effect
 GST mitigated ill effects of cascading or double taxation in a major way and paved the
way for a common national market.
 Reduction in Tax burden
 From the consumers’ point of view, the biggest advantage would be in terms of reduction
in the overall tax burden on goods.
  Making Indian Products More Competitive
 Introduction of GST is making Indian products more competitive in the domestic and
international markets owing to the full neutralization of input taxes across the value chain
of production.
 Easier to Administer
 Because of the transparent and self-policing character of GST, it would be easier to
administer.

 Advantages of GST
 For the Government
 Create a unified common market: Will help to create a unified common national market
for India. It will also give a boost to foreign investment and “Make in India” campaign.
 Streamline Taxation: Through harmonization of laws, procedures and rates of tax between
Centre and States and across States.
 Increase tax Compliance: Improved environment for compliance as all returns are to be
filed online, input credits to be verified online, encouraging more paper trail of transactions
at each level of supply chain;
 Discourage Tax evasion: Uniform SGST and IGST rates will reduce the incentive for
evasion by eliminating rate arbitrage between neighbouring States and that between intra
and inter-state sales.
 For Overall Economy
 Bring about certainty: Common procedures for registration of taxpayers, refund of taxes,
uniform formats of tax return, common tax base, common system of classification of goods
and services will lend greater certainty to taxation system;
 Reduce corruption: Greater use of IT will reduce human interface between the taxpayer
and the tax administration, which will go a long way in reducing corruption;
 Boost secondary sector: It will boost export and manufacturing activity, generate more
employment and thus increase GDP with gainful employment leading to substantive
economic growth; Ultimately it will help in poverty eradication by generating more
employment and more financial resources.
 For the Trade and Industry
 Simpler tax regime with fewer exemptions.
 Increased ease of doing business.
 Reduction in multiplicity of taxes.
 Elimination of double taxation on certain sectors.
 More efficient neutralization of taxes especially for exports
 Making our products more competitive in the international market.
 Simplified and automated procedures for registration, returns, refunds and tax payments.
 Decrease in average tax burden on supply of goods or services.
 For Consumers
 Transparent prices: Final price of goods is expected to be transparent due to seamless
flow of input tax credit between the manufacturer, retailer and service supplier.
 Price reduction: Reduction in prices of commodities and goods in long run due to
reduction in cascading impact of taxation;
 Poverty eradication: By generating more employment and more financial resources.
 For the States
 Expansion of the tax base: As states will be able to tax the entire supply chain from
manufacturing to retail.
  More economical empowerment: Power to tax services, which was hitherto with the
Central Government only, will boost revenue and give States access to the fastest growing
sector of the economy.
 Enhancing Investments: GST being destination based consumption tax will favour
consuming States. Improve the overall investment climate in the country which will
naturally benefit the development in the States.
 Increase Compliance: Largely uniform SGST and IGST rates will reduce the incentive for
evasion by eliminating rate arbitrage between neighbouring States and that between intra
and inter-state sales

 Disadvantages of GST
 GST will increase the cost of operation and will increase tax liability on businesses. GST is not
applicable to petroleum products. Also, there are penalties for non-compliance.
 The GST regime is entirely online, from registration to filing returns. The GST regime is an
entirely online tax system. While larger businesses were able to swiftly adapt to the new system,
smaller enterprises were less familiar with modern solutions.
 The real estate market has seen an 8% increase in prices since the adoption of GST, resulting in a
12% drop in demand. The telecom industry has been hit. To comply with GST requirements,
telecom companies had to completely restructure their IT infrastructure and payment systems,
which resulted in a significant increase in expenses.
 When GST was implemented in India, the telecom industry encountered numerous hurdles.
Because of a lack of clarity on key topics, the implementation proved problematic.

 Exemptions Under GST

 Custom duty will be still collected along with the levy of IGST on imported goods.
 Petroleum and tobacco products are currently exempted.
 Excise duty on liquor, stamp duty and electricity taxes are also exempted.

 Challenges of GST
 SCGT and CGST input credit cannot be cross utilized.
 Manufacturing states lose revenue on a bigger scale.
 High rate to tax to compensate the revenue collected now from multiple taxes i.e High Revenue
Neutral Rate.
 The reduction in the fiscal autonomy of the States.
 Concerns raised by banks and insurance companies over the need for multiple registrations
under GST.
 The levy of additional cess.
 The capacity of State tax authorities, so far used to taxing goods and not services, to deal with
the latter is an unknown quantity.
 The success of GST depends on political consensus, technology and the capacity of tax officials
to adapt to the new requirements.

 Conclusion
 GST is a positive step towards shifting Indian economy from the informal to formal economy.
 It is important to utilise experiences from global economies that have implemented GST before
us,to overcome the impending challenges.

GST is transparent and fair system that prevents black money and
corruption and promotes new governance culture.
 I2U2 Initiative
 Background
 I2U2 was initially formed in October, 2021 following the Abraham Accords between Israel
and the UAE, to deal with issues concerning maritime security, infrastructure and transport in
the region.
 The aim was to harness the unique array of capabilities, knowledge and experience of all four
nations which ultimately led to the formation of I2U2.
 At that time, it was called the ‘International Forum for Economic Cooperation’.
 That was referred as the ‘West Asian Quad’.

 Factors leading to the formation of I2U2

 Abraham Accords
 In 2020, the UAE, Bahrain, Sudan, and Morocco established formal ties with Israel under the
Abraham Accords, which were promoted by the Trump Administration.
 The restoration of regular diplomatic relations between Israel and the UAE made this novel
alliance possible.
 Countering Turkey’s Assertiveness in the Region
 The emergence of the new Quad can be attributed to the aligned interests of India, the UAE,
and Israel, which were spurred by Turkey's assertive claims to leadership in the Islamic
world.
 Countering China
 The initiative has been launched to counter China's influence and projects such as BRI in the
region.
 More focused on Economic Cooperation
 While the Indo-Pacific Quad was primarily focused on defence and security, the West Asia
Quad seems to focus more on economic cooperation and not security cooperation.
 About
 I2U2 initiative is a new grouping of India, Israel, USA and UAE.
 In the grouping’s name, ‘I2’ stands for India and Israel, whereas ‘U2’ stands for USA and the
UAE.
 This is a great achievement which tells the geopolitical changes that happen in the region.
 This will not only revitalize and re-energize the system of alliances and partnerships around
the world, but also stitch together partnerships that did not exist previously or were not
utilized to their full extent.

 Aim/Areas of Cooperation of I2U2

 Economic Cooperation
 A new ‘Quad’ aims to deepen economic cooperation among Israel, India, UAE, and United
States.
 Clean Energy
 It intends to mobilize private sector capital and expertise to help modernize the infrastructure
and low-carbon development pathways for our industries, improve public health and promote
the development of critical emerging and green technologies.
 Six Identified Focused Areas
 I2U2 is aimed to encourage joint investments in six mutually identified areas such as:
 Water  Space
 Energy  Health
 Transportation  Food security
 Connectivity
 It aims to advance physical connectivity between countries in the Middle East region.
 Finding Solutions for Waste Management
 It strives to jointly create new solutions for waste treatment and explore joint financing
opportunities.
 Strengthening Startup Ecosystem
 The four countries will try to connect the startups to I2U2 investments.
 Security and Defence Cooperation
 India and the US are already members of the QUAD, and India has individual bilateral
defence cooperation with each of the countries.
 Climate Diplomacy
 All the members are part of the Agriculture Innovation Mission for Climate initiative (AIM
for Climate).

 Significance of I2U2
 Security Cooperation
 This will help the countries in exploring security cooperation among the four nations
within the framework of these new groupings.
 India already has robust bilateral security cooperation with Israel, the US and the UAE.
 Technological Hubs
 Each of these countries is a technological hub.
 Biotechnology, of course, is prominent in each of these countries as well.
 Israel is called a Startup Nation already. India has been also developing a widening startup
ecosystem of its own.
 UAE also recognises that the future of the world economy is not going to be built around
just hydrocarbons, oil and gas. It needs to work in the technology sector too.
  Food Security
 This initiative offers an opportunity to discuss food security.
 Joint efforts by these four countries become crucial to tackle and reduce the consequences
of food security and safety.
 Work Together in Different Fields
 These countries could cooperate on a number of levels, whether it's technologies, trade,
climate, fighting against Covid-19, or even security.
 Trade
 I2U2 can revitalise and re-energise the system of trade and commerce among the four
countries
 After the US, UAE is the second-largest export destination of India.
 Connectivity
 I2U2 will boost India’s project along with UAE and Saudi Arabia to build a connectivity
corridor that runs from India to the Arabian Gulf across the Arabian Peninsula to Israel,
Jordan and from there to the European Union.
 If this corridor is completed then India will be able to cut the cost of moving a
container significantly (for instance from Mumbai to Greece by over 40%).

 Significance of I2U2 for India

 Advantage from Abraham Accords
 India will get advantage of the Abraham Accords to deepen engagement with Israel
without risking its ties with the UAE and the other Arab states.
 Benefit Market
 India is a massive consumer market.
 It’s a frontline producer of high-tech and highly sought-after goods as well that will attract
investors from West Asia and India will benefit from this grouping.
 India is a massive producer of goods such as automotive, etc. This will benefit capturing
the market opportunities in the other three countries and get FDI to India
 Alliances
 It will help India in building alliances:
 Political alliances
 Social alliances
 India’s West-Asian Policies
 Until now, India’s West Asian policies have largely insisted on keeping its bilateral
relationships separate from each other.
 This is the first step to bring those relationships with UAE and Israel together and merge
them.
 Thrust to Geopolitical Presence
 I2U2 will boost India's geopolitical presence especially in West Asia and India will
strategically and economically establish itself as a World player.
 Indian Diaspora and Remittances
 There are around 8 to 9 million Indians in West Asia, 2.5 million in the United Arab
Emirates alone. They are India’s goodwill ambassadors.
 Indian communities in West Asia have a significant impact upon the Indian economy,
through inward remittances. Further cooperation with West Asian countries through
I2U2 will enhance inward remittance.
 Inward remittances from the Gulf into India are around 40 billion US dollars.
  Leveraging The Relations For Economic Cooperation
 India can leverage its good relations with Israel, the Gulf, and the US alike to build economic
exchanges that are mutually beneficial.
 Maintaining Strategic Relations With The Region
 Utilizing India’s diaspora presence and its “Look West” policy of intensifying already
flourishing relations with major powers in the Middle East, New Delhi should hold a deep
strategic relationship with the region.
 Utilizing The Platform For Energy Cooperation And Trade
 The I2U2 is a good opportunity to enhance cooperation in energy, security, food security,
trade and commerce, maritime security, etc.
 Mutual Benefit From Each Country’s Expertise
 Cooperation between the four countries is crucial. The US is an export hub, while UAE is
growing in the energy sector. Israel is way ahead in terms of defense research and
technology, and India is one of the fastest-growing economies in the world.
 Pursuing The Goal Of Clean Energy
 India can benefit from the I2U2 Group which will advance a hybrid renewable energy project
in India’s Gujarat State. The project consists of 300 MW of wind and solar capacity
complemented by a battery energy storage system.
 India’s Position in Global Politics
 I2U2 grouping will help emerge India as a global leader in various issues such as climate
cooperation, clean energy, waste management, etc.
 Strategic Autonomy
 India is part of SCO, Quad, and I2U2 at the same time. Hence, it will help India to maintain
strategic autonomy.
 More Flexibility to India in the Region
 The new “Quad" will give India the flexibility to engage more freely with Israel and India’s
partners in the Gulf region.

 Challenges Associated with I2U2

 For India
 Departure from India’s Non-Aligned Stance
 Being a member of I2U2, it is difficult for India to maintain a balance with other
organizations such as Shanghai Cooperation Organization (SCO).
 Regional credibility
 India in I2U2 might create a dent in India’s credibility as a non-partisan state in trying to
resolve the Israel-Palestine conflict. .
 Relations with China and Russia
 Groupings such as I2U2 can lead to degrading India's relations with Russia and China.
 Acknowledgement of USA hegemony
 Through the inclusion of the USA, India recognizes the active role of the USA in the
matters of the West Asian region.
 China's Expanding Role in the Middle East
 India must also look at the presence of China which has been expanding its footprint in
the region. Israel’s Haifa port has been expanded by China; more than one and a half
billion-dollar investment in Haifa has been made by China.
 China is also building the Ashdod port which is the only port Israel has in the
Mediterranean.
 UAE was one of the first countries that got Huawei’s (Chinese MNC) assistance for
its 5G project.
  For I2U2
 Impact on Geopolitics
 Initiatives such as the Abraham accord are the major breakthrough.
 However, the other states in the region are still reluctant to maintain friendly bilateral
relations with Israel.
 Formation of New Axes
 It may lead to new regional polarization, where China, Pakistan, Russia, Iran, and Turkey
could be on one side while India, Israel, USA, and UAE on the other side.
 Overlooking the Regional Issues
 I2U2, focussed on individual national interests, may not be able to resolve the existing
regional issues.
 Also, at the grassroot level, the Israel-Palestine conflict is still a major area of concern.
 Internal Conflicts of the Arab World
 The Shia-Sunni conflict between Iran and Saudi Arabia is also going on which is also
running through Iraq, Syria, Lebanon and Yemen.
 The internal conflicts in the Arab world will possibly lead to the significant partners of
India like Iran split from the former into another group.
 The developing situation might lead to the creation of two groups one with China,
Pakistan, Russia, Iran and Turkey while India, Israel, USA and UAE are likely to be on
the other side.

 Way Forward
 Seizing the Opportunity
 The I2U2 is a win-win proposition for all the countries concerned. India needs to play a
more active role as far as cooperation with West Asia is concerned.
 India must navigate this area which is full of landmines, very cautiously because the
fundamental interests of India: energy security, food security, workers, trade, investment
and maritime security lie in this region.
 Reassuring Other Partners in West Asia
 Two countries, specifically, need to be reassured that this new arrangement is not aimed at
them: Iran and Egypt.
 For India, Iran is important in relation to the present context of Afghanistan. India must
deal with the challenges both diplomatically and strategically in this region.
 Egypt has friendly relations with all the four countries in this alliance but it must be
reassured that it will not be impacted economically or politically.
 Mutual Cooperation among the Four Countries
 There are challenges in dealing with the complications of the West Asian region.
 Balancing the rival countries diplomatically and strategically in order to maintain
friendly relations with each other can be done through mutual cooperation among the
four countries.

The I2U2 is a good opportunity to enhance cooperation in energy,

security, food security, trade and commerce, maritime security, etc.
Cooperation between the four countries is crucial. The US is an export
hub while UAE is growing in the energy sector. Israel is way ahead in
terms of defence research and technology, and India is one the fastest
growing economies in the world.
 India and BRICS
 BRICS
 BRICS is the group composed of the five major emerging countries – Brazil, Russia, India, China
and South Africa.
 It together represents about 42% of the population, 23% of GDP, 30% of the territory and
18% of the global trade.
 The acronym BRIC was coined by economist ‘Jim O’Neill’ of Goldman Sachs in 2001 to
indicate the emerging powers that would be, alongside the United States, the five largest
economies of the world in the 21st century.
 In 2006, BRIC countries started their dialogue, which since 2009 takes place at annual
meetings of heads of state and government.
 In 2011, with South Africa joining the group, the BRICS reached its final composition,
incorporating a country from the African continent.

 Objectives of BRICS
 One of the major objectives of the grouping is broadening, deepening, and intensifying
cooperation among the member countries for mutually beneficial, sustainable and equitable
development.
 BRICS takes into consideration each member’s growth, development and poverty objectives to
ensure relations are built on the respective country’s economic strengths and to avoid competition
where possible.
 BRICS is emerging as a new and promising political-diplomatic entity with diverse objectives, far
beyond the original objective of reforming global financial institutions.
 It’s an emerging investment market and global power bloc.

 Main Areas of Cooperation within BRICS

 Economic Cooperation
 There are rapidly growing trade and investment flows between BRICS countries as well as
economic cooperation activities across a range of sectors.
 Agreements have been concluded in the areas of Economic and Trade Cooperation;
Innovation Cooperation, Customs Cooperation; strategic cooperation between the BRICS
Business Council , Contingent Reserve Agreement and the New Development Bank.
 These agreements contribute to realisation of the shared objectives of deepening economic
cooperation and fostering integrated trade and investment markets.
 People-to-People Exchange
 BRICS members have recognised the need for strengthening People-to-People exchanges
and to foster closer cooperation in the areas of culture, sport, education, film and youth.
 People-to-People exchanges seek to forge new friendships; deepen relations and mutual
understanding between BRICS peoples in the spirit of openness, inclusiveness, diversity
and mutual learning.
 Such People to people exchanges include the Young Diplomats Forum, Parliamentarian
Forum, Trade Union Forum, Civil BRICS as well as the Media Forum.
 Political and Security Cooperation
 BRICS member political and security cooperation is aimed at achieving peace, security,
development and cooperation for a more equitable and fair world.
 BRICS provides opportunities for sharing policy advice and exchanges of best practices in
terms of domestic and regional challenges as well as advancing the restructuring of the
 global political architecture so that it is more balanced, resting on the pillar of
multilateralism.
 BRICS is utilised as a driver for South Africa’s foreign policy priorities including the
pursuit of the African Agenda and South-South Cooperation.
 Cooperation Mechanism
 Cooperation among members is achieved through:
 Track I: Formal diplomatic engagement between the national governments.
 Track II: Engagement through government-affiliated institutions, e.g. state-owned
enterprises and business councils.
 Track III: Civil society and People-to-People engagement.

 Institutions of BRICS
 New Development Bank
 During the sixth BRICS Summit in Fortaleza, Brazil (2014), the leaders signed the
Agreement for establishing the New Development Bank (NDB).
 Fortaleza Declaration stressed that the NDB will strengthen cooperation among BRICS and
will supplement the efforts of multilateral and regional financial institutions for global
development thus contributing to sustainable and balanced growth.
 NDB has successfully worked as one of the most promising multilateral development
institutions. Since its inception in 2015, it has approved 42 investment projects worth over
$15 billion.
 Contingency Reserve Arrangement
 BRICS nations signed BRICS Contingent Reserve Arrangement (CRA) in 2014 as part of
Fortaleza Declaration at Sixth BRICS summit.
 Contingency Reserve Arrangement, aimed at ensuring liquidity for member-states when
they are confronted by short term balance of payment crises.
 The capital of $100 billion committed under CRA, can act as the guarantor of BRICS
financial stability in case of crisis.

 Relevance of BRICS in Global Order

 BRICS countries together accounts for 42% of the world’s population, a third of the global
GDP and around 17% share of world trade.
 BRICS countries sizable contribution to global growth, trade and investment makes it an
important pillar of global order.
 Financial
 Structural imbalances caused by the global financial crisis of 2008 and new threats to the
global economy posed by trade war and unilateral economic sanctions are yet to be
resolved.
 The growing contribution of the BRICS to the world economy and the rising importance of
the economic relations between the BRICS and other Emerging Market and Developing
Countries (EMDCs) create an opportunity for new initiatives that would better help to
support sustainable and inclusive growth and development.
 Security
 The US unilateral withdrawal from Intermediate-Range Nuclear Forces (INF)
Treaty and Iran deal has posed a great security threat to global peace.
 BRICS, being a pillar of fairer polycentric world order, can play a significant role in
assuring world peace by playing an active role in dispute resolution based on principle of
fairness.
  Poverty Reduction
 The BRICS contribution to world poverty reduction has been sizeable. Continued BRICS
growth remains important for poverty reduction as well as for reducing international
inequalities.

 Importance of BRICS for India

 Geo-Politics
 Global geopolitics today represents the case of a tug of war and India finds itself in the middle
of it. This has made difficult for India to carve a middle path for balancing its strategic interests
between the U.S and the Russia-China axis.
 Therefore, BRICS platform provides an opportunity for India to balance Russia-China axis.
 Global Economic Order
 BRICS countries shared a common objective of reforming the international financial and
monetary system, with a strong desire to build a more just, and balanced international order.
 To this end, BRICS community plays an important role in the G20, in shaping global economic
policies and promoting financial stability.
 Voice of Developing Nations
 As the western countries are raising challenges on issues ranging from World Trade
Organisation to climate change, the developing countries are crippling under the onslaught of
these policies.
 In recent period, BRICS has emerged as the voice of developing countries, or the global south
and playing a significant role in protecting the rights of developing countries.
 Terrorism
 BRICS also provides a platform for India to galvanize its efforts against terrorism and has
worked within the grouping to take a strong stand against terrorism and bring about focused
consultations on specific aspects relating to terrorism.
 Global Grouping
 India is actively pursuing its membership for United Nation Security Council (UNSC) and
Nuclear Supplier Group (NSG).
 China forms the major roadblock in pursuing such goals. Therefore, BRICS provides an
opportunity to actively engage with China and resolve the mutual disputes. It also helps in
garnering support of other partner countries.

 Challenges Associated to BRICS

 Marred by Various Issues
 Group has seen conflicts such as China's aggression in eastern Ladakh which brought India-
China relations to their lowest point in several decades.
 There is also the reality of the strained relations of China and Russia with the West, and
of serious internal challenges preoccupying both Brazil and South Africa.
 On the other hand, China’s image at global level has also been tarnished due to the Covid-19.
 Heterogeneity
 It is claimed by critics that heterogeneity (variable/diverse nature of countries) of the BRICS
nations with its diverse interests possess a threat to the viability of the grouping.
 China Centric
 All the countries in the BRICS group trade with China more than each other; therefore it is
blamed as a platform to promote China’s interest.
 Balancing trade deficit with China is a huge challenge for other partner nations.
 Not Been Effective
  The five-power combine has succeeded, albeit up to a point. However, China’s economic rise
has created a serious imbalance within BRICS.
 Also the group has not done enough to assist the Global South to win their optimal support for
their agenda.
 Economic Divergence
 Brazil and Russia have been experiencing economic recessions in recent years, while China
and India have sustained high growth rates.
 South Africa’s economy has been performing poorly, with high levels of unemployment
and inequality.
 Political Differences
 Russia’s annexation of Crimea and involvement in conflicts in Ukraine and Syria have
strained its relations with other BRICS members.
 China’s territorial claims in the South China Sea have been a source of tension with other
BRICS countries that have competing claims in the region.
 Institutional Constraints
 The New Development Bank (NDB), established by BRICS in 2014 to provide
development financing, has faced challenges in disbursing loans and identifying viable
projects.
 The Contingent Reserve Arrangement (CRA), a pool of foreign exchange reserves, has not
been tested yet.
 Coordination Difficulties
 Disagreements over the governance structure of the NDB and the CRA, as well as differing
priorities in areas such as trade, investment, and climate change, have made it difficult for
BRICS to present a unified front on many issues.
 External Pressures
 The rise of protectionism, nationalism, and populism in some advanced economies has
posed challenges for BRICS in terms of trade, investment, and access to capital.

 Way Forward for BRICS

 Cooperation Within the Group
 BRICS need to shed the centrality from China and create a better internal balance, reinforced
by the urgent need for diversification.
 For BRICS to remain relevant over the next decades, each of its members must make
a realistic assessment of the opportunities and inherent limitations.
 Upholding Universal Security
 BRICS countries should be builders of universal security. Seeking one’s own security at the
expense of others will only create new tensions and risks.
 It is important to respect and guarantee the security of every country, replace confrontation
with dialogue and partnership, and promote the building of balanced, effective and
sustainable regional security architecture..
 Securing Economic Interests
 BRICS countries should be contributors of common development.
 Facing the rising tide of de-globalisation and the increase of unilateral sanctions, BRICS
countries should enhance mutually-beneficial cooperation in supply chains, energy, food and
financial resilience
 Also, it will be useful for BRICS to develop an institutional research wing, along the lines of
the OECD, offering solutions which are better suited to the developing world.
  Public Health Governance
 BRICS countries should fully leverage their respective strengths, and jointly promote the
development of global health governance in a direction in favour of developing countries.
 India’s vision of ‘One Earth, One Health’ contributes to multilateral cooperation on public
health.
 The countries should make good use of the BRICS Vaccine Research and Development
Centre, establish a BRICS early warning mechanism for preventing large-scale infectious
diseases, and provide high-quality public goods for global health governance cooperation.
 A Global Governance Philosophy
 Global challenges are emerging one after another. Coping with these challenges
requires coordination among global actions.
 Safeguarding the international system is essential while ensuring that international affairs
have participation by all, international rules are formulated by all, and development outcomes
are shared by all.
 BRICS should embrace a global governance philosophy that emphasises extensive
consultation, joint contribution and shared benefits, enhance unity and cooperation with
emerging markets and developing countries, and increase the voice in global governance.

 New Members of BRICS

 BRICS announces new members as:
 Argentina  Ethiopia  Saudi Arabia
 Egypt  Tran  UAE
 The new membership of these countries in BRICS will become effective from January 1, 2024.
 The alliance, focused on advancing the Global South's development, saw interest from nearly 40
countries. The expansion, decided through consensus, follows agreed guiding principles.
 BRICS has embarked on a new chapter in its effort to build a world that is fair, a world that is
just, a world that is also inclusive and prosperous.
 They represent a disparate pool of potential candidates motivated largely by a desire to level a
global playing field many consider rigged against them.
 They are attracted by BRICS' promise to rebalance world bodies such as the G7, IMF, and World
Bank dominated by the United States and other wealthy Western states.
 The countries have a range of reasons for applying, from interest in specific economic initiatives
such as transitioning to local currencies to challenging the US. Then there are those who want
easier access to China or other BRICS or more control during major power tensions and
uncertainty.

 Conclusion
 BRICS faces several challenges such as internal differences, global economic slowdown, and
geopolitical tensions. However, the group can remain relevant by expanding its agenda to
promote comprehensive development and enhanced cooperation among all states.
 BRICS should also focus on the democratization of international issues, respect for cultural
diversity, and peaceful resolution of conflicts.
 India has always supported the expansion of BRICS. India has always believed that adding new
members will strengthen BRICS as an organization.

In the storming ocean of world politics, BRICS can contribute

significantly in maintaining international stability and ensuring global
economic growth and becoming a united centre of the multipolar world.
India and The Indian Ocean Region
 Indian Ocean is the third largest water body in the world.
 Sometimes, the Indian Ocean is also known as ‘sea of stability’.
 Indian Ocean is a lifeline to the international trade and transport as it carries one third of the world’s
bulk cargo traffic and two thirds of the world’s oil shipments.
 The Indian Ocean matters today, more than ever. The Indian Ocean basin is of particular importance
for India, India is geographically located at the Ocean’s centre, and has over 7,500 kilometers of
coastline and it is the region’s most populous country and geopolitical keystone.
 Indian Ocean contains a great degree of wealth in the form of abundance of oil, natural gas,
minerals. The region constitutes the lifeline to drive the economic vibrancy in Asia and Europe.
 The strategic and economic pivots are shifting to make the Indo-Pacific generally, and the Indian
Ocean Region (IOR) more specifically the centre stage of virtually every major power.
 However, while the attention of other countries on IOR is fairly recent, India has maintained trade
and civilizational links with other countries in the region since the time immemorial. These links were
developed without recourse to military conquest, instead by people-to people engagements.

 Significance of Indian Ocean

 The Indian Ocean basin is of particular importance for India as the region’s most populous
country and geopolitical keystone. India’s 90% of trade by volume and almost all oil imports
come via sea route which underscores the significance the region.
 International Trade
 It enjoys a privileged location at the crossroads of global trade, connecting the major engines
of the international economy in the Northern Atlantic and Asia-Pacific.
 This represents an almost four-fold increase in the volume of commercial shipping since
1970.
 Today, 95 % of India’s trade by volume and 68 % of trade by value come via the Indian
Ocean.
 Nearly 80 % of India’s crude oil requirement—is imported by sea via the Indian Ocean.
 Cultural
 The Ocean has long been a key determining factor of India’s cultural footprint, with people,
religion, goods, and customs spreading from India to Africa, the Middle East, and Southeast
Asia and vice-versa.
 Project Mausam is a cultural and economic project by the Indian Ministry of Culture and
Archaeological Survey of India with the Indira Gandhi National Centre for the Arts which
aims to connect countries on the Indian Ocean.
 Densely Populated
 The Ocean’s vast drainage basin is home to two billion people. This creates opportunities,
especially given the high rates of economic growth around the Indian Ocean rim.
 Source Of Fishing And Mineral Resources
 Fishing in the Indian Ocean now accounts for almost 15 % of the world’s total and has
increased some 13-fold between 1950 and 2010 to 11.5 million tonnes.
 Fisheries and aquaculture industries are also a major source of exports.
 Economic
 The Ocean is rich and a valuable source of mineral and oil resources. 40 % of the world’s
offshore oil production takes place in the Indian Ocean basin. India is also the fourth-largest
importer of liquefied natural gas (LNG), with about 45 % coming by sea.
 The sea lanes in the Indian Ocean are considered among the most strategically important in
the world which sustains Asia’s largest economies including India.
 In the Indian Ocean, three major Sea Lanes Of Communication (SLOCS) play a crucial role
in the energy security and economic prosperity:
 SLOC connecting the Red Sea to the Indian Ocean through the Bab al-Mandab (that
transports the bulk of Asia’s international trade with its major trading partners in Europe
and America),
 SLOC connecting the Persian Gulf to the Indian Ocean through the Strait of
Hormuz (transporting the bulk of energy exports to major import destinations like
India, ASEAN, and East Asia),
 SLOC connecting the Indian and Pacific Oceans through the Straits of Malacca (integral
to the smooth flow of trade with ASEAN, East Asia, Russia’s Far East and the US).
 The Indian Ocean region transports 75% of the world’s maritime trade and 50% of daily
global oil consumption.
 Deep Sea Exploration
 In 2002, International Seabed Authority under UNCLOS granted permission to India
to explore ocean regions and prospect for precious metals.
 Deep seabed polymetallic sulphides (PMS) contain iron, copper, zinc, silver, gold and
platinum in variable constitutions.
 Strategic and Security
 India has a coastline of about 7500 km, and a large population is dependent on the fishing
sector. Therefore, the security in the region is vital for coastal security as well as economic
development.
 Terror attack in Mumbai stresses the need to ensure the security of the region.
 The region is a witness to continually evolving strategic developments including the
competing rises of China and India, the US interventions in Iraq and Afghanistan, potential
nuclear confrontation between India and Pakistan, terrorism, piracy in and around the Horn of
Africa.
 The Straits of Hormuz, Malacca, and the Bab el Mandeb are some of the choke points. These
choke points are strategically important for global trade and energy. Countries like USA,
France and others maintain a naval presence in the Indian Ocean.
  China’s special emphasis towards Indian Ocean (through its Silk Road project and growing
cooperation with the littoral nations) as well as its formation of the blue water navy increases
the importance of the region.
 ‘Pivot to Asia’ policy of USA and ‘OBOR & String of Pearls of China’ has increased the
strategic significance of the region.
 The docking of Chinese warships and submarine in Hambantota sent a disquieting signal for
India.

 Resources In The Region

 Mineral Resources
 Nodules containing nickel, cobalt, and iron, and massive sulphide deposits of manganese,
copper, iron, zinc, silver, and gold present in sizeable quantities on the sea bed.
 Indian Ocean coastal sediments is important sources of titanium, zirconium, tin, zinc, and
copper.
 Rare earth elements are present, even if their extraction is not always commercially feasible.
 Indian Ocean economies account for 35.5% of global iron production and 18 % of world gold
production.
 Energy Resources
 The main energy resources present in Indian Ocean are petroleum and gas hydrates.
Petroleum products mainly include the oil produced from offshore regions. Gas hydrates are
unusually compact chemical structures made of water and natural gas.
 The Indian Ocean holds 17% of the world’s proven oil reserves and 28% of proven natural
gas reserves.
 Fishery Resource
 The region is a responsible for 28% of global fish capture and there has been a continuous
increase in fish capture in the region since the 1950s.
 This has created a successful basis for export industries in a number of countries. For
example, Indonesia and India account for around 4.5% of global frozen fish exports.

 Role of India in the Indian Ocean

 Indian Ocean serves as a strategic bridge with the nations in India’s immediate and extended
maritime neighbourhood. The national and economic interests of India are inseparably linked up
with the Indian Ocean.
 The role of India in the region is evident in its vision of ‘SAGAR ’, which means ocean and
stands for “Security and Growth for all in the region” where the goal, is to seek a climate of
trust and transparency; respect for international maritime rules and norms by all
countries; sensitivity to each other`s interests; peaceful resolution of maritime issues; and
increase in maritime cooperation.
 Net Security Provider
 The Indian Ocean has always enjoyed a place of prominence in global strategy. Many nations
have established a presence in the region to ensure their strategic interests. However, India
has always been a keen supporter to the cause of keeping the Indian Ocean a Zone of Peace.
 India’s new vision for maritime security is comprehensively articulated in “Ensuring Secure
Seas: Indian Maritime Security Strategy”, a document by the Indian Navy which clarifies that
the Indian Navy’s interest areas cover the Red Sea, Gulf of Oman , Gulf of Aden, IOR Island
nations, Southwest Indian Ocean and East Coast of Africa littoral countries among many
other nations and areas.
 The emergence of piracy and maritime terrorism has become one of the major threats to the
stability in the region. Beginning in 2005, pirates operating mostly from Somalia began
 to hijack commercial ships with alarming regularity, with such incidents peaking in
2010. Piracy has declined noticeably in the Indian Ocean since 2013, due in part to
the efforts of countries like India, it could once again prove a threat to India n
commerce.
 Malabar Exercise and other bilateral exercises with countries like Indonesia and re-engaging
with the Indian Ocean Region (IOR) and South Pacific, island nations signal India’s
preparedness for a critical role in the region.
 India’s security efforts in the Indian Ocean have already begun to take concrete shape with
the transfer of the Indian-made patrol vessel Barracuda to Mauritius, the deployment of P-8I
aircraft to Seychelles for surveillance of its exclusive economic zone, the agreements to
develop connectivity infrastructure in Agalega in Mauritius.
 India’s only ‘Tri-Service Command’ at Andaman and Nicobar Islands is working on
expanding the military effectiveness of its outpost at the juncture of Bay of Bengal and
Andaman Sea.
 Humanitarian and Disaster Relief Operations
 India has been playing an active role in humanitarian and disaster relief operations. It not
only rescued citizens of India, but also provided assistance to other countries.
 These have often focused on rescuing citizens of India from conflict zones, although
India has helped citizens of many other countries in the process. A recent example in
the Indian Ocean region is Operation Raahat in Yemen.
 For example, Indian efforts have been extended to disaster relief in other countries,
like assistance to Indonesia and Sri Lanka following the 2004 tsunami, to Myanmar after
Cyclone Nargis, to Bangladesh after Cyclone Sidr, and to Sri Lanka after Cyclone Roanu.
 In 2014, under ‘Operation Neer’ India dispatched ‘water aid’ to the Maldivian capital of
Male, after a fire destroyed the generator of its biggest water treatment plant.
 Blue Economy
 To realise the blue economy potential, the Ministry of Shipping has launched the ‘Sagarmala
Project‘, a strategic initiative for port-led development through the extensive use of IT
enabled services for modernisation of ports.
 ‘Blue Economy’ is based on using locally available resources and employ renewable inputs
that addresses the problems of resource scarcity and enables sustainable development.
 According to Niti Aayog, the development of Blue Economy can serve as a growth catalyst in
realizing the vision to become a $10 trillion economy by 2032.
 Diaspora and Cultural Exchanges
 Merchants and artisans who settled in these regions over millennia brought with them their
cultural ethos and traditions.
 The region accepted these visitors as their own and in turn, the fusion that arose saw the
creation of amazing shared cultures, not bound by political boundaries or the monopoly of
any single nation.
 The engagement of Indian Diaspora in the region through Pravasi Bharatiya Diwas is
increasing their role in India’s growth story.
 Space Technology
 NavIC (Navigation with Indian Constellation): is India’s indigenous global navigation
satellite system. The Indian Regional Navigation Satellite System (IRNSS) would be useful
in land, sea and air navigation. The operationalization of NavIC will have significant
implications for the whole of south Asian region. This will be especially handy during the
natural and manmade disasters.
 South Asia Satellite or GSAT-9: The launch of the satellite will help to achieve effective
communication; better governance, better banking and better education in remote areas; more
predictable weather forecasting, land monitoring and efficient resource mapping; linking
 people with top end medical services through telemedicine; and a quick response to natural
disasters in the region.
 Indian Ocean Policy
 The India Maritime Security Strategy published by the Indian Navy articulates country’s
policy in the IOR. It states that in the Indian Ocean region, India is committed to:
 Ensuring a safe, secure and stable Indian Ocean Region.
 Deepening security cooperation, through increased surveillance and monitoring with
regional partners.
 Forging a multilateral cooperative maritime security initiative in the Indian Ocean to
combat terrorism and piracy.
 Deepening cultural linkages with the people in region.
 Building Indian Ocean Region as a frontier of sustainable economic development.
 India’s preparedness for its critical role in the region is seen in the Joint Strategic Vision with
the US, Japan’s inclusion into the Malabar Exercise, bilateral exercises with countries like
Japan, Australia and Indonesia, and signing of Mutual Logistics Support Agreements with
US, France and Singapore.
 India’s Indian Ocean policy is centered on providing security and political stability to its
“maritime neighbourhood”, which includes the Maldives, Mauritius, Seychelles and Sri
Lanka, in the face of China’s expanding naval and strategic activities in the Indian Ocean.
 Project Mausam would allow India to re-establish its ties with its ancient trade partners and
re-establish an “Indian Ocean world” along the littoral of the Indian Ocean.

 Regional Groupings in Indian Ocean

 The region boasts of established regional organizations like SAARC, BIMSTEC, ASEAN, GCC
in the Gulf, IORA, etc. Indian Ocean Rim Association for Regional cooperation, also known as
Indian Ocean Rim Association (IORA) is specifically dedicated to the Indian Ocean.
 Indian Ocean Rim Association
 It is an inter-governmental organisation aimed at strengthening regional cooperation,
sustainable development and to ensure the safety and security of vital trade routes,
particularly the choke points within the IOR through its 23 Member States bordering the
Indian Ocean and 10 Dialogue Partners.
 It was formed in 1997 and its secretariat is in Mauritius.
 The IORA is a regional forum, tripartite in nature, bringing together representatives of
Government, Business and Academia, for promoting co-operation and closer interaction
among them.
 It is based on the principles of Open Regionalism for strengthening Economic
Cooperation particularly on Trade Facilitation and Investment, Promotion as well as
Social Development of the region.

 Challenges for India

 Strategic
 China’s regressive behavior in the critical sea lanes in the South China Sea and there inroad
to Indian Ocean are the centre of the entire maritime security challenge. Thus there is
Concerns over maritime security and of rule-based order in Indo-Pacific.
 China is increasing its influence not just with military force but through the belt and road
initiative too.
 The sea lanes of communication are critical for peace, stability, prosperity and development
of the Indo-Pacific region.
 Maritime Security (Terrorism, Piracy, Human and Drug Trafficking)
 India will have to contend with non-state actors such as those who carried out the 2008
Mumbai attacks; and an arc of instability on the IOR periphery, which is the locus of
problems such as Somali piracy, Makran coast drug trafficking and the ongoing conflict in
Yemen, where India conducted a well-executed non-combatant evacuation operation (NEO),
Operation Rahat, in April 2015.
 Migration and human trafficking in South and Southeast Asia too has registered a surge in
numbers.
 For example, rise in refugee movement from Bangladesh and Myanmar (Rohingya Crisis) has
resulted in a humanitarian crisis of unprecedented proportions.
 Environmental Security and Climate Change in the IOR
 The degradation of the environment, climate change and the overexploitation of ocean
resources are threatening the interests and futures of all the region’s countries and peoples.
 This will increase the likelihood of flooding, resulting in loss of life and damage to property,
as illustrated by recent tsunamis and cyclones.
 Climate change may render the Indian Ocean nations vulnerable to stronger and more
frequent and higher storm surges. Most people in IOR live in big coastal cities with large
supporting infrastructure such as port facilities and oil refineries.
 In the event of a severe climate crisis, the risk of damage to coastal infrastructure – including
naval docking and shore facilities – is very high.
 Submergence will cause loss of livelihood, migration, conflicts which will create crisis.
 China’s Presence in Indian Ocean
 China’s aggressive soft power diplomacy has been the most important element in shaping the
Indian Ocean strategic environment, transforming the entire region’s dynamics. By providing
large loans on generous repayment terms, investments, offering military assistance and
political support, China has secured considerable goodwill and influence among countries in
the Indian Ocean region.
 China has become the largest lender of Sri Lanka replacing Japan. Kenya offers another
example of how China has been bolstering its influence in the Indian Ocean.
 China’s submarine and surface forces are growing both qualitatively and quantitatively, and
these forces are expanding operations beyond their traditional areas. Example: Docking of
Chinese submarine at Hambantota Port, Sri Lanka.
 China through its presence of maritime Silk Road and developing of a Blue Water Navy with
its aggressive policy of expansion will pose a security threat to Indian Ocean as it has done in
other Seas like South and East China sea.
 Challenge Posed by Pakistan
 With regards to Pakistan, the establishment of a Naval Strategic Force Command in 2012
could portend a future in which Pakistan employs nuclear weapons at sea.
 State sponsored terrorist activities as well as other terrorist organisations based in Pakistan
use Indian Ocean, as in Mumbai terror attack in 2008, to spread its terrorist activities.
 Pakistan’s move to acquire at least eight diesel submarines fitted with air-independent
propulsion systems from China in the 2023-2028 time frame adds more uncertainty to this
subsurface mix. Operational control over Pakistan’s Gwadar port will help China to
encounter the Indian Navy directly
 Ensuring The Sustainable Exploitation Of Fishing And Mineral Resources
 The IORCs are faced with the common pressing challenges of increasing urbanisation,
industrialization and migration, resulting in over-exploitation of natural marine resources.
 Multi-dimensional challenges from climate change impacts such as sea-level rise, ocean
acidification, and extreme weather events.
  Climate change impact like erosion and inundation could cause loss of coastal habitats such
as mangroves, thereby affecting the reproduction of species.
 Acidification and rise in sea temperature destroys the coral reefs that are critical to various
sea species.
 Managing Humanitarian Assistance and Disaster Relief (HADR) Operations
 As the population of the region is projected to increase significantly in the coming decades,
its impact on food security and economy from marine resources would become more
substantial.
 The densely populated littoral is also vulnerable to natural or environmental disasters. ex., the
2004 tsunami that killed 228,000 people.
 Securing the Free Passage of Trade and Energy
 There is a strong security dimension to India’s engagement with the Indian Ocean, beyond
traditional naval considerations. ex., One of the worst terrorist attacks – the 2008 assault on
Mumbai in which 164 people were killed—was perpetrated by terrorists arriving by sea.
 Smuggling, illegal fishing, and human trafficking are all also major concerns.
 The lack of regional maritime security architecture has prompted major powers to compete
for control over these resources and sea-lanes.
 The further escalation of such geopolitical tensions, as seen in the South China Sea, would
threaten the openness of the region’s sea routes, which in turn may disrupt trade and
adversely affect energy dependent nations like Sri Lanka.
 Adequacy of Institutions for Addressing the Region’s Many Challenges
 Lack of governance mechanism, poor data and resources suggests that there are very few
institutions, finance and technical resources available to deal with the challenges. There is no
single overarching organisation that covers all IORC in its membership.
 Most of the Indian Ocean countries have formulated their own fisheries regulations; they lack
proper standards, guidelines, coherent regional arrangement and enforcement mechanisms in
the Indian Ocean owing to limited data and capacity constraints.

 India’s Response to Overcome Challenges

 Strengthening Security Institutions
 Multilayered Surveillance System: A multilayered system of surveillance of the country’s
maritime domain involving the Indian Navy, Coast Guard, Marine Police, Customs, and the
Fishermen.
 Indian Navy continuously carries out patrols, goodwill visits and joint training to display a
show of force.
 Government of India created 2 specialised forces:
 Customs Marine Organisation: to curb smuggling through the sea.
 Indian Coast Guard for:
o Patrolling the territorial and contiguous waters.
o Enforcing criminal laws in these waters.
o Ensuring compliance of laws relating to shipping, fishing and pollution.
o Assisting the Customs Department in anti-smuggling operations.
o Conducting search and rescue and other specified duties.
 Marine Police Force: for patrolling and the surveillance of the coastal areas, particularly the
shallow areas close to the coast.
 Electronic Surveillance: Government of India has launched the coastal surveillance network
project. The network comprises the coastal radar chain, the Automatic Identification System
(AIS).
  Monitoring, Control and Surveillance of Fishermen: All big fishing trawlers (20 meters
and above) are being installed with transponders. for small fishing vessels to fit them with the
Radio Frequency Identification Device (RFID).
 Cooperating With Regional Countries
 Indian Ocean Naval Symposium (IONS): The IONS is a voluntary initiative that seeks to
increase maritime cooperation among navies of the littoral states of the Indian Ocean region.
It has 23 countries as members including India.
 Indian Ocean Rim Association: serves as the ‘first line of defence’ to build upon existing
national, regional and international measures, thereby enhancing coordination.
 Checking aggressive China
 India has called for a free, open and inclusive order in the Indo-Pacific, based upon respect
for sovereignty and territorial integrity of nations, peaceful resolution of disputes through
dialogue and adherence to international rules and laws.
 India supports freedom of navigation, over flight, and unimpeded commerce in the
international waterways.
 India also supports utilization of ASEAN-led mechanisms as important platforms for
implementation of our shared vision for the Indo-Pacific.
 India is coordinating with the other powers such as the QUAD nations to contain china in the
Indo Pacific region.
 Exercises like MALABAR with USA, Japan and recent participant Australia is significant in
this regard.

 Way Forward
 The Indian Ocean Region needs a sustainable and inclusive framework for international
partnerships. India needs to further elevate, strengthen and deepen its security cooperation with
regional partners such as Sri Lanka, the Maldives, Seychelles and Mauritius, as well as the United
States, Japan and Australia to protect its core security interests in the Indian Ocean.
 Notwithstanding recent maritime outreach to smaller island states, there still remains a space
where the Indian navy’s aspiration of playing the net-security provider is yet to fully fructify.
 A strong impetus on R&D and Innovation in the areas of Ocean Energy, Marine Biology and
Biotechnology must be provided to achieve significant market shares in these sectors.
 Keeping in mind the Act East Policy, and envisaging the future scenario in the Indian Ocean
region and South-East Asia, the focus should be on developing the strategically located islands in
Andaman and Nicobar.
 Achieving these objectives will require further investments in capacity, greater transparency and
confidence-building measures and enhanced institutional cooperation.

 Conclusion
 The Indian Ocean is about people, culture and commerce. Appreciating its complex texture and
intricate nuances is essential to nurture its growth and resurgence. It must be treated as a partner,
not as an arena.
 Therefore, mutual trust and cooperation among the littoral countries will shape the stability and
growth of the region.

The Indian Ocean will remain one of the world’s most strategic locations, with
more than 75 % of the world’s maritime trade and 50% of daily global oil
transfers passing through the region. As a result, India’s primary aim will be
to maintain a stable and peaceful India Ocean, with a focus toward economic
and military alterations obviating the menacing Chinese threat.
 India-Middle East-Europe Corridor (IMEC)
 Central Idea
 The ancient Red Sea route, dating back to the Common Era, once connected distant civilizations,
facilitating the exchange of goods and ideas.
 IMEC is poised to reshape global trade dynamics. It envisions reliable and cost-effective transport
connectivity to accelerate the development and integration of Asia, the Arabian Gulf, and Europe.

 About
 The India-Middle East-Europen Economic Corridor is an economic initiative aimed at creating a
strategic trade and transportation corridor that connects India with the Middle East and Europe.
 It was established through a memorandum of understanding (MOU) signed by the leaders of
India, the United States, Germany, Saudi Arabia, the UAE, Italy, and the EU in September 2023
in New Delhi during the G20 meet.
 IMEC envisions the development of a reliable and cost-effective transport network, including
railways and ship-to-rail transit, to facilitate the movement of goods and services between India,
the United Arab Emirates (UAE), Saudi Arabia, Israel, and the European Union (EU).
 It seeks to offer an alternative route for trade between Asia and Europe, reducing transit time and
logistics costs compared to existing maritime routes like the Suez Canal.
 The proposed IMEC will consist of Railroad, Ship-to-Rail networks and Road transport routes
extending across two corridors, that is:
 The East Corridor – connecting India to the Arabian Gulf
 The Northern Corridor – connecting the Gulf to Europe
 The IMEC corridor will also include an electricity cable, a hydrogen pipeline and a high-
speed data cable.
 The project is a component of the Partnership for Global Infrastructure and Investment (PGII).
 PGII is a values-driven, high-impact, and transparent infrastructure partnership to meet the enormous
infrastructure needs of low and middle-income countries.
 Signatories
 India  European Union
 US  Italy
 Saudi Arabia  France
 UAE  Germay

 Objective
 It aims to create a comprehensive transportation network, comprising rail, road, and sea routes,
connecting India, the Middle East, and Europe.
 It aims to enhance transportation efficiency, reduce costs, increase economic unity, generate
employment, and lower Greenhouse Gas (GHG) emissions.
 It is expected to transform the integration of Asia, Europe, and the Middle East by facilitating
trade and connectivity.

 Significance
 Upon completion, it would provide a “reliable and cost-effective cross-border ship-to-rail
transit network to supplement existing maritime and road transports”.
 Historical Revival
 IMEC revives ancient trade routes, particularly the Red Sea route, dating back to the
Common Era. It reconnects regions and rekindles the spirit of historical trade.
 Geopolitical Clout
 IMEC's establishment gathered leaders from India, the United States, Germany, Saudi
Arabia, the UAE, Italy, and the EU. This underscores its geopolitical significance, positioning
these regions as pivotal players in global trade.
 Economic Growth
 IMEC is expected to boost economic cooperation and trade among its participating nations,
leading to economic growth and development.
 Connectivity and Integration
 The corridor aims to restore and enhance connectivity between regions with historical ties,
creating a cohesive economic and trade network spanning Asia, the Arabian Gulf and Europe.

 Potential of IMEC to Reshape Global Trade

 Shorter Routes
 IMEC offers shorter and more cost-effective trade routes compared to the congested Suez
Canal and Mediterranean routes.
 This can significantly reduce transit time and logistics costs for global trade.
 Multimodal Connectivity
 IMEC envisions a reliable railway and ship-to-rail transit network, complementing existing
maritime and road routes.
 This multimodal connectivity enhances trade efficiency and reliability.
 Regional Trade Boost
 IMEC enhances regional trade by connecting major ports and facilitating the movement of
goods between India, the UAE, Saudi Arabia, Jordan, Israel, and the EU.
 This fosters regional economic integration.
 Standard Gauge Infrastructure
 IMEC's adoption of a standard gauge throughout the corridor eliminates the need for gauge
changes, ensuring smoother and more efficient transportation of goods.
 Ports to be Connected
 India
 Mundra (Gujarat), Kandla (Gujarat), and Jawaharlal Nehru Port Trust (Navi Mumbai).
 Middle East
 Fujairah, Jebel Ali, and Abu Dhabi in the UAE as well as Dammam and Ras Al Khair
ports in Saudi Arabia.
 Railway line will connect
 Fujairah port (UAE) to Haifa port (Israel) via: Saudi Arabia (Ghuwaifat and Haradh) and
Jordan.
 Israel
 Haifa port.
 Europe
 Piraeus port in Greece, Messina in South Italy, and Marseille in France.

 Historic Significance
 Ancient Trade Routes
 IMEC harkens back to the historic trade routes of the ancient world, particularly the Red Sea
route that dates back to the beginning of the Common Era.
 This route facilitated the exchange of goods, culture, and ideas between distant civilizations.
IMEC, in its modern form, symbolizes a contemporary effort to reestablish a similar corridor.
 India's Historic Role
 The corridor's historical significance for India is notable.
 In ancient times, India was at the heart of important trade routes, connecting it to regions as
far away as Rome.
 IMEC reaffirms India's role as a pivotal player in regional and global trade, reminiscent of its
historical significance in trade networks.
 Geopolitical Importance
 Throughout history, regions at the crossroads of trade routes have held significant
geopolitical clout.
 IMEC's establishment underscores the contemporary geopolitical importance of the regions it
connects, particularly India, the Middle East, and Europe.

 Geopolitical Implications of IMEC

 Thwart to China’s BRI
 IMEC is seen as a potential counter to China's Belt and Road Initiative (BRI) in
the Eurasian region.
 It can serve to counterbalance China's growing economic and political influence.
 Integration Across Civilizations
 The project can strengthen ties and integration across continents and civilizations.
 It offers a strategic opportunity for India to maintain influence and reassure traditional
partners amidst China's growing influence in the region.
 Breaking Pakistan's Overland Connectivity Veto
 IMEC bypasses Pakistan, breaking its veto over India's overland connectivity to the
West, a hurdle persistently faced in the past.
 Strategic Engagement with Arabian Peninsula
 The corridor deepens India's strategic engagement with the Arabian Peninsula by
establishing enduring connectivity and elevating political and strategic links with
nations in the region.
  Promoting Intra-Regional Connectivity and Peace
 IMEC has the potential to promote intra-regional connectivity and could help
reduce political tensions in the Arabian Peninsula.
 It holds the prospect of becoming an "infrastructure for peace" in the region.
 India's Strategic Role in Africa
 The corridor's model could be extended to Africa, aligning with the US and EU's plan to
develop a Trans-African corridor.
 This signifies India's intent to strengthen its engagement with Africa and contribute to its
infrastructure development.
 Expansion of G20 role from purely economic grouping to geo-political grouping
 This project is also an attempt to further strengthen the G20 group by expanding the role
of G-20 to geo-political domain to counter the dominance of China and Russia.
 Normalisation of Diplomatic Relations
 It would help normalise diplomatic relations in the Middle East with possibility of
establishment of diplomatic relations between Israel and Saudi Arabia both of which are
part of the project.
 Counter to China’s Growing Geopolitical Influence in Middle East
 China’s geopolitical influence has been growing in the Middle East region.
 China has helped to broker a deal between Saudi Arabia and Iran.
 Saudi Arabia and the UAE-both old allies of US-have been strengthening their ties with
China.
 It also provides an opportunity to counter the growing Chinese geopolitical influence.

 Economic Implications of IMEC

 Enhanced Trade Opportunities
 IMEC presents a transformative opportunity for India to boost economic growth by
enhancing its trade connectivity with key regions.
 The route could significantly reduce transit times, making trade with Europe 40% faster
compared to the Suez Canal maritime route.
 Stimulated Industrial Growth
 The corridor will create an efficient transport network for the seamless movement of
goods.
 This will encourage industrial growth, particularly in regions connected to the corridor,
as companies will find it easier to transport raw materials and finished products.
 Job Creation
 As economic activities expand due to improved connectivity, there will be a surge in job
opportunities across sectors.
 The growth in trade, infrastructure, and allied industries will necessitate skilled and
unskilled labor, promoting employment.
 Energy Security and Resource Access
 The corridor can facilitate secure energy and resource supplies, especially from the
Middle East.
 Reliable access to these resources will stabilize India's energy sector and support its
growing economy.
 Facilitating Special Economic Zones (SEZs)
 The corridor can be strategically leveraged to develop SEZs (Special Economic Zones)
along its route. SEZs can attract foreign investment, promote manufacturing, and drive
economic growth in these designated zones.
 Significance of IMEC for India
 Indo-US Convergence In Middle East
 India and US have converged their interests in Middle East after Indo Pacific.
 This economic and connectivity project is the second mega convergence between India and
the United States in Middle East after the I2U2 forum. It can turn out to be far more
significant for Indo-US relationship.
 Strategic Engagement With The Arabian Peninsula
 Through this connectivity project the India now has an opportunity to build enduring
connectivity between India and Arabia.
 The current project will strengthen India’s role as a driver in shaping regional connectivity.
 Breaking Pakistan’s Dominance
 It breaks Pakistan’s monopoly over India’s overland connectivity to the West.
 Since the 1990s India has sought various trans-regional connectivity projects with Pakistan.
 But Pakistan was adamant in its refusal to let India gain access to land-locked Afghanistan
and Central Asia.
 Reduced dependence on Iran
 It also provides India an alternate transport corridor route for Europe by reducing over
dependence on Chabahar Port and International North–South Transport Corridor (INSTC).
 Opportunity to join Trans-African Corridor
 Trans-African corridor is an envisaged US and the EU plan to build a corridor connecting
Angola, the Democratic Republic of Congo, and Zambia. Effective implementation of Indian
Middle East Europe Corridor project would increase India’s chances of getting an
opportunity to join Trans-African corridor.
 Increase in Trade Competitiveness
 This economic corridor will make trade between India and Europe 40% faster.
 This will increase the trade competitiveness of Indian exports.

 Challenges to the India-Middle East-Europe Corridor (IMEC)

 Infrastructure Development
 Building the necessary rail links, terminals, and inland container depots (ICDs) at major Gulf
and Mediterranean ports is a complex and extensive endeavor.
 Cross-Border Connectivity
 Ensuring seamless connectivity across borders, especially in the Middle East, demands
cooperation between multiple countries.
 This includes extending rail networks from the Gulf to Israel through Jordan.
 Environmental Considerations
 IMEC's commitment to green and sustainable growth involves addressing environmental
challenges, including reducing greenhouse gas emissions.
 Coordination and Financing
 Coordination among participating countries and securing financing are crucial to overcome
financial barriers and ensure the corridor's viability.
 Logistics and Connectivity Issues
 Developing a multimodal transport corridor involving rail, road, and sea routes spanning
multiple countries requires complex logistical planning and coordination among
stakeholders.
 Selecting the most viable and cost-effective routes, assessing the feasibility of rail and
road connections, and ensuring optimal connectivity are key challenges.
  Missing Rail Links and Construction
 Significant portions of rail links are missing, especially in the Middle East, requiring
substantial construction efforts and investment to complete the rail network.
 Coordination among Multiple Countries
 Coordinating efforts, policies, and regulations among multiple countries with diverse
interests, legal systems, and administrative procedures is a major challenge in realizing
this cross-continental corridor.
 Potential Opposition and Competition
 Opposition or competition from existing transport routes, especially Egypt's Suez Canal,
which may see reduced traffic and revenue, could pose challenges and diplomatic hurdles.
 Cost and Financing
 Estimating and securing adequate financing for the construction, operation, and
maintenance of the corridor is a significant challenge.
 The costs for development are estimated to be substantial, and funding sources need to be
identified.
 Initial estimates suggest that developing each of these IMEC routes could cost
anywhere between USD 3 billion to USD 8 billion.

 Way Forward
 Balancing the geopolitical interests of participating nations and addressing potential political
sensitivities, especially regarding Israel, is crucial for smooth implementation.
 Addressing environmental impact concerns, ensuring sustainability, and adhering to green and
eco-friendly practices in construction and operation are critical aspects of the project.
 Implementing robust security measures to safeguard cargo and infrastructure from potential
threats, theft, piracy, and other security risks is essential.
 For smooth operations, it is essential to achieve technological compatibility and uniformity in
terms of gauges, train technologies, container dimensions, and other crucial issues across many
countries.
 For a successful implementation, it is essential to strike a balance between the geopolitical
interests of the participating countries and any potential political sensitivities, particularly with
regard to Israel.
 Important facets of the project include addressing environmental impact issues, assuring
sustainability, and following green and eco-friendly building and operation practises.
 Strong security measures must be put in place in order to protect infrastructure and cargo from
potential threats, theft, piracy, and other security issues.
 IMEC marks a historic moment for India and its partners, offering incredible potential for
regional and global growth.

As a catalyst for collective growth, global cooperation, and

connectivity, IMEC embodies the spirit of Vasudhaiva
Kutumbakam, benefiting millions across continents. This
corridor's establishment is just the beginning of a new era
of global economic collaboration and shared prosperity.
 India’s Act East Policy
 About
 The ‘Act East Policy’ announced in November, 2014 is the upgrade of the “Look East Policy”.
 It is a diplomatic initiative to promote economic, strategic and cultural relations with the vast
Asia-Pacific region at different levels.
 It involves intensive and continuous engagement with Southeast Asian countries in the field
of connectivity, trade, culture, defence and people-to-people-contact at bilateral, regional and
multilateral levels.

 Aim
 To promote economic cooperation, cultural ties and developing a strategic relationship with
countries in Indo-pacific region with a proactive and pragmatic approach and thereby improving
the economic development of the North Eastern Region (NER) this is a gateway to the South
East Asia Region.

 Look East Policy

 In order to recover from the loss of the strategic partner -USSR (end of the Cold war 1991),
India sought to build up a relationship with the USA and allies of the USA in Southeast Asia.
 In this pursuit, former PM of India PV Narasimha Rao launched Look East policy in 1992, to
give a strategic push to India’s engagement with the South-East Asia region, to bolster its
standing as a regional power and a counterweight to the strategic influence of the People’s
Republic of China.

 Difference Between Look East and Act East

 Look East
 Look East policy focused on the Association of Southeast Asian Nations
(ASEAN) countries + Economic Integration.
 India became a dialogue partner of ASEAN in 1996 and summit level partner in 2002.
 In 2012 the relationship got upgraded into a Strategic Partnership.
 The time when India launched the Look East Policy in 1992, India's trade with ASEAN was
$ 2 billion. After signing the Free Trade Agreement in 2010 with ASEAN, the trade has
grown to $ 72 billion.
 India is also an active participant in several regional forums like the East Asia Summit
(EAS), ASEAN Regional Forum (ARF) etc.
 Act East
 Act East Policy focused on ASEAN countries + Economic Integration + East Asian
countries + Security cooperation.
 4C's of Act East Policy:
 Culture
 Commerce
 Connectivity
 Capacity building
 Security is an important dimension of India's Act East Policy.
 In the context of growing Chinese assertiveness in the South China Sea and the Indian
Ocean, securing freedom of navigation and India's own role in the Indian Ocean is a key
feature of Act East Policy.
 In pursuance of this, India has been engaged under the narrative of Indo-Pacific and
informal grouping called QUAD.
 Objectives of Act East Policy
 Promote economic cooperation, cultural ties, and develop a strategic relationship
with countries in the Asia-Pacific region through continuous engagement at regional,
bilateral, and multilateral levels.
 To increase the interaction of the North-Eastern Indian states with other neighboring
countries.
 To find out the alternatives of the traditional business partners like; more focus on
the Pacific countries in addition to the South East Asian countries.
 To curb the increasing impact of China in the ASEAN regio n. Under the “Act East
Policy” the government is relying on the 3 C’s (Culture, Connectivity, and Commerce) to develop
better relations with ASEAN nations.

 Significance
 Under the Act East Policy (AEP), the India-Japan strategic partnership has been lifted to an
entirely new level, underscoring the importance of Indo- Pacific cooperation.
 India believes in an Indo-Pacific that is free, open and inclusive, and one that is founded
upon a cooperative and collaborative rules-based order.
 ASEAN’s centrality remains the abiding contemporary characteristic of the Indo-Pacific
at the regional level.
 India has placed the ‘Indo-Pacific’ at the heart of its engagement with the countries of
South, Southeast and East Asia. Gradually, Act ‘East’ is getting transformed into Act
‘Indo-Pacific’.
 The Act East Policy aims to enhance connectivity between Northeastern states, including
Arunachal Pradesh, and neighboring nations.
 It was initially an economic policy but has evolved to include cultural, political, and strategic
components.
 The policy focuses on India-ASEAN cooperation in domestic initiatives. This includes
infrastructure, manufacturing, trade, and smart cities.
 Major projects under the policy include:
 The India-Myanmar-Thailand Trilateral Highway Project.
 Rhi-Tiddim Road Project.
 Border Haats.
 Agartala-Akhaura Rail Link between India and Bangladesh.
 Intermodal transport linkages and inland waterways through Bangladesh.
 Kaladan Multimodal Transit Transport Project and the Trilateral Highway Project connecting
the North East with Myanmar and Thailand.
 Under India-Japan Act East Forum, projects such as Road and Bridges and modernization
of Hydro-electric power projects have been undertaken.
 Other Initiatives
 Assistance extended in the form of medicines/medical supplies to ASEAN countries during
the pandemic.
 Scholarships with offers of 1000 PhD fellowships have been offered at IITs for ASEAN
countries participants.
 Quick Impact Projects (QIPs) are small-scale, low cost projects that are planned and
implemented within a short time frame.
 India is also implementing Quick Impact Projects in Cambodia, Laos, Myanmar and
Vietnam to provide development assistance to grass-root level communities in the fields of
education, water resources, health etc.
 Importance of Act East Policy
 The Act East Policy is bolstered due to China's increasing influence in the Southeast Asian and
Indian Ocean regions.
 The policy can help secure freedom of navigation and the rule of law in the Indo-Pacific region.
 India's engagement with QUAD is an extension of its efforts to enhance security in the Indo-
Pacific region.
 The end of the Cold War and China’s growing power has changed the nature of Indo-ASEAN
relations. However, economic connections and security cooperation are expected to further
strengthen these relations.
 India's Act East Policy aims to achieve its long-term developmental goals for the Northeastern
region.
 It provides an additional path to accelerate economic development, countering China's rising
aggression in South Asia.

 Progress under Act East Policy

 Engagement with ASEAN
 ASEAN-India engagement has become deeper and has scaled new heights. India is now the
4th largest trading partner of ASEAN. Southeast
 Asian countries favor India’s increased involvement to counter China’s expansionist policies
in the region.
 India has allocated $1 billion for promoting connectivity at the India-ASEAN Summit.
 Cooperation on Regional Initiatives
 India is steering a number of sub-regional programmes and projects such as the BBIN
corridor, Myanmar-Thailand Trilateral Highway, Kaladan multimodal project etc.
 North-East development
 The Act East Policy focuses mainly on the Northeast region.
 The Government of Japan has decided to invest around ₹ 13,000 Crore in several ongoing, as
well as new projects in different states of India’s North-Eastern region.
 India-Japan Act East Forum was established in 2017. It will identify specific projects for
economic modernization of India’s North-East region.
 Security Engagement
 Defence cooperation has increased with East Asian countries.
 In 2014, India and Vietnam signed a Memorandum of Understanding (MOU) that opened up
a line of credit for Vietnam to purchase defense equipment from India.
 Since 2015, India has carried out joint maritime-law enforcement patrols and military
exercises with ASEAN countries.
 Similarly, the first summit of QUAD grouping took place in 2021.
 Far East Involvement
 Recently, India has reached out to Far East economies especially Russia. India has announced
to extend a $1 billion line of credit towards the development of the Russian Far East.
 This is important as it is an energy-rich region and would help India’s economic growth.

 Factors Inhibiting The Success Of Act East Policy

 There has been a growth in China’s influence combined with growing China-India tensions. Both
China’s direct influence and that of ethnic Chinese in the region are on the rise. Further the civil
society is impressed with the way China has handled the pandemic and provided aid to the region.
 The issue in the South China Sea is problematic with the People’s Republic of China making
assertive claims to the region
  The regional security of all the Asian countries is threatened with the growing of the Chinese
influence.
 The control of the Chinese diaspora in the economy of Malaysia, Indonesia and Singapore.
 The growing Chia-Russia relationship poses a threat to India’s security.
 India’s lack of initiatives on trade and investment in the South East Asian countries.
 The issue of connectivity acts as a major obstacle in the path of development.
 On the other hand, Sino-India relations are undergoing severe stress as seen with recent clashes
on the border areas of LAC.
 India needs to continue with its efforts to forge closer relationships with the regional and
multilateral organizations like ASEAN, BIMSTEC, IORA, etc.
 Further India was the only country to withdraw from the recent Regional Comprehensive
Economic Partnership (RCEP) deal.
 There is rising concern in the region with India’s approach towards its minorities, especially
Muslims and Christians.
 Growing concern about Hindu majoritarianism in India has impacted civil society attitudes in
countries like Indonesia, Malaysia, Thailand and Singapore.
 India deployed the soft power of “Buddhist diplomacy” but that too has not gained much
traction as inter-religious tensions in the region grow.

 Way forward
 The Act East policy is seeking regional cooperation with ASEAN which provides India with a
counterweight to potentially keep a check on an increasingly assertive China that seeks regional
domination in Asia.
 India needs to continue with stepped-up efforts to forge closer partnerships with concerned
regional and Multilateral organizations such as ASEAN, ASEAN Regional Forum, East Asia
Summit, BIMSTEC, Asia Cooperation Dialogue, Mekong Ganga Cooperation, and Indian Ocean
Rim Association.
 On the cultural front, Buddhist and Hindu links could be energized to develop new contacts and
connectivity between people.
 On connectivity, special efforts should be made to develop a coherent strategy, particularly for
linking ASEAN with our North East which is aimed to be achieved through the act east policy.

 Conclusion
 India must take a fresh look at its Act East policy and the impacts of unsatisfactory economic
performance and sectarian politics at home.
 India must revamp its policy in such a way that its soft power enhances in the Southeast Asian
region. This would produce multiplier effects in achieving the intended objectives of Act East
policy.

South East Asia will drive the future economic growth, and will be
the driver of the "Asian Century”. It is imperative that India is an
inevitable part of this developing story.
 India’s Coastal Security
 About
 India's 7,516-kilometre-long coastline includes 5,422 kilometres of coastline on the mainland
and 2,094 kilometres on the islands belonging to nine states and four Union Territories
bordering the mainland and the islands with the Bay of Bengal in the East, the Indian Ocean on
the South and the Arabian Sea on the West.
 The coastline accounts for 90% of the country's trade and it spans 3,331 coastal villages and
1,382 islands.
 The coastline is distributed among nine states and four union territories (UTs). Among the
states, Gujarat has the longest coastline and among the UTs, Andaman and Nicobar Islands has
the longest coastline.
 The coastline houses 12 major and 200 minor ports, along with 95 landing centres,] and is
increasingly facing security challenges from adversarial neighbours and non-state actors.
 The coastal environment plays a vital role in a nation’s economy by virtue of the resources,
productive habitats and rich biodiversity.
 This has necessitated the adoption of a more structured and holistic approach with a long-term
strategy to modernise, update and strengthen naval surveillance and to plug loopholes in coastal
security architecture.
 Need for Coastal Security
 India’s coasts have always been vulnerable to criminals and anti-national activities. Numerous
cases of the smuggling of goods, gold, narcotics, explosives, arms and ammunition as well as the
infiltration of terrorists into the country through these coasts have been reported over the years.
 Factors that add to vulnerabilities of Indian coastline:
 Maritime Terrorism
 Hijacking, attacking, and sinking ships, taking hostages, sabotaging pipelines, and
attacking cities and strategic installations like naval bases and petrochemical storages.
 Attacks on Commercial Centres
 The 26/11 terror strike in Mumbai in 2008 targeted two iconic hotels (the Taj Palace and
Towers and the Oberoi Trident) and a Jewish centre (the Chabad House).
 Attacks on Ports and other Strategic Facilities
 Ports handling large volumes of traffic especially oil and other goods and having a large
population centre in its vicinity are most valued targets for the terrorists.
 Attacks on Ships
 Ships are soft targets for the terrorist groups as, except for their enormous size, they have
practically no means of protection.
 Ships could be hijacked, attacked by rockets, grenades and firearms, or packed with
explosives and destroyed.
 Piracy and Armed Robbery
 Piracy poses a major threat to sea navigation.
 Shallow waters of the Sunderbans have been witnessing acts of violence and armed
robbery.
 Smuggling and Trafficking
 Indian coasts have been susceptible to smuggling of items such as gold, electronic goods,
narcotics, and arms.
 Infiltration, Illegal Migration and Refugee Influx
 Large scale refugee influxes over the decades have resulted in widespread political
turmoil in the border states. For example the creek areas of Gujarat which has its
geographical proximity to Pakistan and has complex terrain conducive for infiltration.
 Political turmoil, religious and political persecution, overwhelming poverty, and lack of
opportunities in Sri Lanka and Bangladesh is an ideal situation for illegal migration
of Bangladeshi citizens to India.
 The frequent straying of fishermen into neighbouring country waters has not
only jeopardised the safety of the fishermen but has also raised national
security concerns.

 Maritime and Coastal Security Set-up

 The Indian Navy is responsible for India’s maritime security, including offshore and coastal
security. Indian Navy is assisted by Coastal Police, Indian Coast Guard (ICG), and other Central
and State agencies in the task of maritime security.
 The Indian Coast Guard is also authorised and commissioned to protect coastal security in
Territorial Waters, including areas to be patrolled by Coastal Police. The Commander Coastal
Command has been designated as Director-General of the Indian Coast Guard, responsible for
liaison with central and state authorities in all areas related to coastal safety and security.

 Government Initiatives in Coastal Security Infrastructure

 National Committee for Strengthening Maritime and Coastal Security: headed by Cabinet
Secretary coordinates all matters related to Maritime and Coastal Security.
 Indian Coast Guard: custom marine organization was merged with the India Coast Guard and
was entrusted with the following responsibilities:
 Law enforcement in India’s jurisdictional waters.
 Safety and protection of:
 Artificial islands.
 Offshore terminals.
 Installations and other structures and devices in any maritime zone.
 Fishermen and providing them assistance at sea while in distress.
 Assisting the customs and other authorities in anti-smuggling operations.
 Coastal Security Measures during the 1990s
 Two joint operations namely were launched:
 Operation Tasha: launched by Indian Navy to prevent illegal immigration and the
infiltration of LTTE militants to and from Sri Lanka.
 Operation Swan: launched in the immediate aftermath of the Mumbai bomb
blasts with aim to prevent landings of contraband and illegal infiltration along the
Maharashtra and Gujarat coasts.
 Coastal Security Measures Post Kargil War: Kargil Review Committee (KRC) constituted to
study the circumstances that had led to the war has recommended several coastal security
measures like:
 Specialised marine police.
 Strengthening of the ICG.
 Creating fishermen watch groups
 Installing vessel traffic management systems in major ports.
 Setting up Joint operation centres (JOCs).
 Creating an apex body for the management of maritime affairs.
 Marine Police Force: under the Coastal Security Scheme (2005) marine police force was
created with the aim to strengthen infrastructure for patrolling and the surveillance of the
coastal areas, particularly the shallow areas close to the coast.
 Coastal Security Architecture: post the 26/11 Mumbai attacks, the existing multilayered
 arrangements have been further strengthened, and other initiatives like:
 National Investigation Agency was set up in 2009 to deal with terrorist offences.
 National Intelligence Grid (NATGRID) has been constituted to create an appropriate
database of security-related information.
 A three-tier security grid was installed with the Indian Navy, the coast guard, and the
marine police jointly patrolling India’s near-seas.
 Electronic Surveillance: National Command Control Communication and Intelligence
Network (NC3I) has been launched to provide near gapless surveillance of the entire coastline
and prevent the intrusion of undetected vessels, the coastal surveillance network project. It
comprises:
 Coastal radar chain.
 Automatic identification system (AIS).
 Vessel traffic management and information system (VTMS).
 Important Initiatives after 2008 Mumbai Attacks:
 National Committee on Strengthening Maritime & Coastal Security (NCSMCS) under
Cabinet Security.
 NC3I (National Command, Control & Communication Intelligence Network) to share
intelligence between navy, marine police and ICG.
 Joint Operation Centres by Navy at Mumbai, Visakhapatnam, Kochi and Port Blair.
 Other Coastal Security Initiatives
 Community Interaction Programmes (CIP): CIPs are conducted by ICG with three-fold
objectives: train fishermen to be “Eyes and Ears” in intelligence collection, raise awareness
 among fishermen about safety hazards at sea and sensitise the fishing community about the
current security situation.
 Fishermen biometric ID cards: Department of Animal Husbandry Dairying & Fisheries
(DAHD&F) issues Fisherman Biometric ID Cards to the fishermen. 99 % of the total
identified eligible fishermen.
 Tracking of vessels/boats: All vessels over 20m long are required by law to be equipped
with Automatic Identification System (AIS) equipment.
 Coastal mapping: is an important step in strengthening coastal security. It is a way of
mapping information such as coastal police stations, local police stations, intelligence centres,
fisheries, fishing communities, harbours, customs check posts, hospitals, train stations, bus
stations, bomb disposal services, and more.
 National Academy of Coastal Policing (NACP): has been established to provide intensive
and high-level training for Marine Police of nine Coastal states, five Union Territories and as
well as Central Police Forces.

 Challenges
 Lack of Coordination: The involvement of different agencies and ministries at centre, state
and local level invariably leads to coordination problems although several efforts have been
made to create greater synergies between them like:
 Formulation of Standard Operating Procedures.
 The Conduct of Joint Coastal Security Exercise.
 Setting up of coordination committees.
 Lack of clarity: among various stakeholders about their roles in ensuring coastal security.
 Shortage of manpower: in police stations, (only 25% of the sanction)
 Poor Training: Lack of a dedicated training academy for the ICG.
 Discontent in fishermen communities: interferes with the effective functioning of the coastal
security architecture as fishermen are considered the ‘eyes and ears’ of the coastal security
architecture and, therefore, an integral part of it.
 Difficult terrain, seasonal weather patterns, administrative lapses:. all contribute towards
introducing gaps in surveillance and the monitoring mechanism.
 Delays in land acquisition and support infrastructure: such as barracks and staff quarters at
several locations.
 Low infrastructure: creation
 Jetties under the Coastal Security Scheme are yet to be constructed.
 Below par state-level monitoring mechanisms.

 Way Forward
 Surveillance and Interagency Coordination
 Beyond expediting the installation of coastal radar chains and AIS stations and ensuring
broad access to information, the authorities must ensure the mandatory fitment of AIS on
power-driven vessels with a length more than 10m.
 The central government must address the problems of coordination arising out of the
interactions of multiple agencies (with overlapping jurisdictions) and delayed responses.

 Stronger Involvement of Coastal Police

 Instead of setting up a coastal border security force with no legal powers, the authorities
must move to strengthen and better integrate the coastal police into the littoral security
architecture.
  A Legislative Framework
 Comprehensive legislations to place systems and processes for the protection of
India’s maritime infrastructure, covering both the shipping and port sectors.
 Statutory duties of government departments, Port trusts, state maritime boards, non-major
ports and private terminal operators and other stakeholders need to be clearly outlined, as
also minimum standards of port security requiring statutory compliance.
 Strengthening of the Coast Guard
 The CG must be strengthened to play a leadership role in coastal security.
 Ambiguities from the Coast Guard Act need to be removed to ensure all security agencies
are clear about the roles and responsibilities they are expected to perform.
 National Commercial Maritime Security Policy Document
 The government must promulgate a National Commercial Maritime Security Policy
Document, to articulate its strategic vision for maritime security.
 It must also promulgate a national strategy for Commercial Maritime Security for efficient,
coordinated, and effective action for protection of the port and shipping infrastructure.
 Reinforce Coastal Regulation Zone Regulations (CRZ)
 There is an apprehension among environmentalists that CRZ laws are being diluted in
favour of tourism, shrimp farming and industry lobby groups, without taking into
consideration the views of experts or the public.
 Coastal Security Exercises
 Exercises like Sagar Kavach and Sea Vigil need to be conducted regularly, in order to
generate awareness about threats emanating from the sea as well as to develop synergies
among the concerned agencies.

 Conclusion
 India faces many threats and challenges from its maritime domain. Whereas some of these threats
and challenges are obvious, others are potential in nature. The scope and intensity of the threats
and challenges also vary. While threats – such as maritime terrorism – have the enormous ability
to destroy national security, challenges like smuggling and the straying of fishermen can also
jeopardise the safety of the nation.
 Review of the coastal security apparatus in the country is a continuous process. A three tier
coastal security ring all along our coast is provided by Marine Police, Indian Coast Guard and
Indian Navy. Government has initiated several measures to strengthen Coastal Security, which
includes improving surveillance mechanism and enhanced patrolling by following an integrated
approach.
 Over the years, Indian policy makers and security establishments have been engaged in devising
policies and measures to put in place an effective response mechanism to deal with these threats
and challenges.
 Thus, securing the country’s coasts and its adjacent seas from these threats and challenges
requires a comprehensive strategy.

The coastal security construct of the present day has

successfully built synergy and coordination, which are very
much required in the current security environment.
 India’s Necklace of Diamonds Strategy
 The Chinese Factor
 China is expanding its footprint in the Indian Ocean through its 'Debt Trap Diplomacy' and
'String of Pearls Strategy' to contain Indian hold in the Indian Ocean.
 Recent satellite images have suggested that China has been modernising its Djibouti military
base. Through its debt trap policy, China lures the strategically located nations around India to
borrow infrastructural loans. Once the nations are indebted, China pressurizes them to support its
geostrategic interests.
 Through its String of Pearls strategy, China is expanding its footprints to contain Indian hold in
the Indian Ocean. It is creating a ring around India through strategically placed nations such as at
Chittagong (Bangladesh), at Karachi, Gwadar port (Pakistan) and at Colombo, Hambantota (both
in Sri Lanka) and other facilities.

 Impact of String of Pearls on India

 The String of Pearls is a strategy deployed by China, by building a network of commercial and
military bases and ports in many countries. This strategy has been deployed by China to protect
its trade interests, as a major chunk of its trade passes through the Indian Ocean and various
choke points like Strait of Hormuz, Strait of Malacca and Lombok Strait.
 It endangers Indian maritime security. China is developing more firepower with more
submarines, destroyers, vessels, and ships. Their presence will pose a threat to India’s security
through the water.
 Impact on the Indian economy – Indian resources will be diverted towards defense and security.
Thus, the economy will not reach its potential, hampering economic growth. This may further
lead to instability in India and the whole east and southeast region.
 The strategic clout of India which it enjoys today in the Indian Ocean will be reduced. China
doesn’t have any openings in the Indian Ocean, the Strings of pearls will lead to China
surrounding India and it will be able to dominate it. Countries that today consider India as a
partner in response to China may end up in the lap of China.

 Necklace Of Diamonds Strategy

 The Necklace of Diamonds strategy is India’s response to China’s String of Pearls strategy,
which involves expanding its military network and influence in the Indo-Pacific and Indian
Ocean regions.
 The Necklace of Diamonds strategy involves encircling China by improving India’s naval
presence, expanding its military bases, and enhancing its relationships with other nations in the
region.
 The strategy involves getting access to naval bases in countries that are strategically
placed and also developing relationships with other nations in the region.
 India got access to several strategically located ports, such as the Changi Naval Base in
Singapore, Sabang Port in Indonesia, Chabahar Port in Iran and Duqm Port in Oman. It plans to
get secure military access to Assumption Island in Seychelles.
 These ports provide India with direct access to the Indian Ocean and enhance its ability to
respond to any potential threats in the region.
 In addition to naval bases, India is also developing its relationships with other nations in the
region. India has signed agreements with Mongolia to develop a bilateral air corridor, with Japan
 to build the Asia-Africa Growth Corridor (AAGC), and with Vietnam to enhance its military
cooperation.
 India has also made visits to all five Central Asian countries, doubling trade with the region in
just four years.

 To understand how India is working on this strategy, the region's geography needs to be kept in
mind:
 The Indian Ocean Region has 28 countries, spanning 3 continents.
 The Indian Ocean is a major route for international trade, connecting the Atlantic and the
Pacific Oceans.
 Some 80% of the maritime oil trade passes through just 3 chokepoints:
 Strait of Hormuz
 Malacca Strait
 Bab el Mandeb Strait
 Both India and China have been racing to establish presence in the vicinity of these routes,
for choking these routes means having a leash on the other's economy.
 This idea of choking the other with a string of 'pearls' 'diamonds' forms the core of the India's
and China's strategies.
 The phrase 'Necklace of Diamonds' Strategy was 1st mentioned in 2011, by the then - Foreign
Secretary Lalit Mansingh. He used the term to refer to India's efforts to protect its interests, in
response to China's String of Pearls Strategy.
 It is to be noted that, unlike 'SAGAR, Look East/ Act Policy, etc. 'Necklace of Diamonds'
Strategy is not an officially promulgated strategy, but rather a phrase used to interpret certain
government policies by commentators i.e. the phrase hasn't found mention in official
discourse.
  This strategy involves putting in place a competitive network of alliances- with military,
security and economic angles.
 Under this strategy, India is cooperating with strategically located countries like Indonesia,
Japan, Mongolia, Oman, Seychelles, Singapore, Vietnam, the Central Asian Republics, etc. to
'garland' China.
 The strategy mainly involves the use of:
 Joint defence exercises.
 Port calls.
 Reciprocal visits by military delegation.
 Combined trainings.
 Economic cooperation.

 Opportunities
 One of the main benefits of the “Necklace of Diamonds” strategy is the increased regional
competitiveness of India with China.
 The Necklace of Diamonds strategy provides India with greater control over important shipping
lanes and key ports that are critical to the region’s trade and commerce.
 By partnering with countries such as Singapore, Iran, Seychelles, Indonesia, and Oman, India is
building a network of allies who can help in achieving our interests and goals in the region. This
will enhance India’s bargaining power and ability to influence regional developments, further
boosting its competitiveness.
 The ports in Iran, Seychelles, Indonesia, and Oman provide India with access to new trade routes,
which can enhance its economic competitiveness.

 Challenges
 Most nations have economies that are dependent on China, making it challenging for India to
negotiate with them, as no country wants to get into conflict with China.
 China has a strong military presence in the region, which makes it difficult for India to establish
its dominance.
 India’s “Necklace of Diamonds” strategy involves several countries with differing interests, and it
can be difficult to find common ground and ensure the smooth implementation of the strategy.
Such an example is the failure of India to secure a military base in Seychelles, while China is
considering a military base in the same region in Madagascar.
 China’s investments in its “string of pearls” exceed the investments made by India in its
“necklace of diamonds.”
 There is a need to prevent delays in providing funding for the projects to build trust. This was
observed in Iran, which has decided to proceed with the Chabahar-Zahedan railway line project
on its own due to delays in funding from India.

 India's Strategic Bases

 Changi Naval Base, Singapore
 In 2018 India signed an agreement with Singapore. The agreement has provided direct access
to this base to the Indian Navy.
 While sailing through the South China Sea, the Indian Navy can refuel and rearm its ship
through this base.
 Chabahar Port, Iran
 In 2016 India signed an agreement to build this port.
 The port provides access to Afghanistan and an important trade route to Central Asia
  Sabang Port, Indonesia
 In 2018, India got the military access to Sabang Port which is located right at the entrance of
Malacca Strait.
 This strait is one of the world's famous choke point. A large chunk of trade and crude oil
passes on to China through this region.
 Duqm Port, Oman
 In 2018, India got another military access after Sabang Port in Indonesia. The Duqm Port is
located on the south-eastern seaboard of Oman.
 The port facilitates India’s crude imports from the Persian Gulf. In addition to this, Indian
facility is located right between the two important Chinese pearls-- Djibouti in Africa and
Gwadar in Pakistan.
 Assumption Island, Seychelles
 In 2015, India and Seychelles agreed upon the development of the naval base in this region.
This gives the military access to India.
 This base is of strategic importance to India as China desperately wants to increase its
presence in the African continent through the maritime silk route.
.
 India's Strategic Cooperation
 Apart from getting direct access to the strategically placed naval bases, India is also developing
new naval bases, developing the old bases and is enhancing relations with other nations to garland
China.
 Building ports in collaboration and signing bilateral agreements with countries is usually to
improve trade ties with the respective countries and open different trade routes for India. It helps
India to counter the Chinese influence in these countries.
 Mongolia
 PM Modi is the first Indian PM to visit Mongolia.
 Both the countries have agreed and will collaborate to develop a bilateral air corridor using
India's credit line.
 Japan
 India and Japan have jointly declared to build the Asia-Africa Growth Corridor (AAGC).
 Vietnam
 India is maintaining good relations with Vietnam and has so far sold Brahmos Missile and
patrol boats to the Vietnam.
 Central Asia
 PM Modi visited all the 5 countries of Central Asia in one go and becomes the first Indian
PM to do this. Within 4 years, trade with Central Asian countries has doubled after his visit.
 It can be concluded that India has maintained healthy relations with all the nations in China's
periphery. This will give strategic access to India and the pattern can be seen as the necklace
of diamonds garlanding China in a counter encirclement.
 Indonesia
 India is building a deep-sea Port in Indonesia, a place named Sabang.
 It has strategic significance as it is close to the Strait of Malacca and India’s Andaman &
Nicobar Islands.
 Myanmar
 India built a deep water port in Sittwe in 2016.
 Bangladesh
 India would help Bangladesh modernize the Sea Port in Mongla.
 India can also use the Chittagong port in Bangladesh.
  Oman
 India has signed agreements to access strategically located naval facilities in Oman.
 This facility is close to the Strait of Hormuz. More than 30% of oil exports pass through the
Strait of Hormuz.
 Singapore
 India has signed an agreement to access Changi Naval Base of Singapore, which is
strategically located close to the Strait of Malacca.
 Military and Naval Relationships
 To upgrade and train its navy, India has developed a strategic naval relationship with
Myanmar which gives India an increased footprint in the area.
 It has also made agreements for military cooperation in the region with Japan, Australia and
the USA. The four countries carry out joint military exercises in the IOR region and are
known as the ‘QUAD’.
 Building Coastal Radar Networks
 Bangladesh
 India has recently signed an agreement with Bangladesh to install Coastal Surveillance
Radar Systems along the coastline of Bangladesh.
 This will help India to monitor Chinese Warships which have been frequently visiting the
Bay of Bengal.
 The Maldives
 India will install Coastal Radar Systems (CSR) in the Maldives.
 These radars will relay live images, videos, and location information of ships moving in
the Indian Ocean Region.
 Sri Lanka
 Coastal Surveillance Radars (CSR) have been installed in Sri Lanka.
 India is planning to setup more CSR in Sri Lanka.
 There are constant ongoing efforts by the Governments of India and Sri Lanka to solidify
India- Sri Lanka ties.
 Mauritius
 Coastal Surveillance Radars CSR) have been installed in Mauritius.
 Seychelles
 Coastal Surveillance Radars (CSR) have been Installed in Seychelles.

 Conclusion
 India’s “Necklace of Diamonds” strategy is a key element of its efforts to increase its regional
competitiveness. Through this strategy, India is able to secure critical shipping lanes, enhance its
strategic partnerships, and strengthen its presence and influence in the region.
 While this strategy offers several benefits to India, it also presents several challenges that India
must overcome in order to be successful. As the Indian Ocean region continues to play a critical
role in global trade and commerce, India’s “Necklace of Diamonds” strategy will play a vital role
in shaping the future of the region.
 India will need to work closely with its regional partners, increase its investments in the strategy,
and be prepared to respond to any potential threat posed by China’s actions in the region.

Whoever controls the Indian Ocean will dominate Asia. This ocean
will be the key to the seven seas in the 21st Century. The destiny of
the world will be decided on its waters.
 India’s Neighbourhood First Policy
 India’s Neighbourhood First Policy

 About
 India shares its geographical boundary with Afghanistan, Bangladesh, Bhutan, China,
Maldives, Myanmar, Nepal, Pakistan, and Sri Lanka.
 India’s policy towards its immediate neighbourhood is based on efforts to build peace and
cooperation in South Asia.
 India’s neighbourhood first policy, accords primacy to nations in periphery with focus on
encouraging trade, connectivity and people-to-people contact.
 Under its 'Neighbourhood First' policy India is committed to developing friendly and
mutually beneficial relations with all its neighbours.
 India is an active development partner and is involved in several projects in these countries.
 India’s policy of ‘Neighbourhood First’ focuses on creating mutually beneficial, people-
oriented, regional frameworks for stability and prosperity.
 India’s engagement with these countries is based on a consultative, non-reciprocal and
outcome-oriented approach.
 It focuses on delivering benefits like greater connectivity, improved infrastructure, and
stronger development cooperation in various sectors, security and broader people-to-people
contacts.
 Purpose
 Connectivity
o India has entered into MoU (Memorandum of Understanding) with members of
the South Asian Association for Regional Cooperation (SAARC).
o These agreements ensure a free flow of resources, energy, goods, labour, and
information across borders.
 Improving Relations with Neighbours
 o Priority is to improve the relations with immediate neighbours as peace and
tranquillity in South Asia is essential for realising development agenda.
 Dialogue
o It focuses on vigorous regional diplomacy by engaging with neighbouring nations
and building political connectivity through dialogue.
 Economic Cooperation
o It focuses on enhancing trade ties with neighbours.
o India has participated and invested in SAARC as a vehicle for development in the
region.
o One such example is the Bangladesh-Bhutan-India-Nepal (BBIN) grouping for
energy development i.e. motor vehicles, waterpower management and inter-grid
connectivity.
 Disaster Management
o The policy also focuses on cooperating on disaster response, resource
management, weather forecasting and communication and also capabilities and
expertise in disaster management for all South Asian citizens.
 Military and Defence Cooperation
o India is also focusing on deepening security in the region through military
cooperation by conducting as well as participating in various defence exercises.

 Salient Features Of India’s Neighbourhood First Policy

 Immediate Priority To Neighbours
 Priority is to improve the relations with immediate neighbours as peace and tranquillity in
South Asia is essential for realizing development agenda.
 The neighbourhood first policy of actively focuses on improving ties with India’s immediate
neighbours.
 Dialogue
 It focuses on vigorous regional diplomacy by engaging with neighbouring nations and
building political connectivity through dialogue.
 First initiative in this direction was extending an invitation to all heads of government of
SAARC countries for the oath taking ceremony of the PM in 2014.
 Resolving Bilateral Issues
 Focus is on resolving bilateral issues through mutual agreement. For instance, India and
Bangladesh have signed a pact to operationalise the historic Land Boundary Agreement
(LBA).
 Connectivity
 India has entered into MoU with members of the South Asian Association for Regional
Cooperation (SAARC).
 These agreements ensure a free flow of resources, energy, goods, labour, and information
across borders.
 Economic Cooperation
 It focuses on enhancing trade ties with neighbours.
 India has participated and invested in SAARC as a vehicle for development in the region.
One such example is the Bangladesh-Bhutan-India-Nepal (BBIN) grouping for energy
development i.e. motor vehicles, waterpower management and inter-grid connectivity.
 Technical Cooperation
 The policy put emphasis on technical cooperation. Recently a dedicated SAARC satellite was
developed to share the fruits of the technology like tele-medicine, e-learning etc. with the
people across South Asia.
  Disaster Management
 India’s offer cooperation on disaster response, resource management, weather forecasting and
communication and also capabilities and expertise in disaster management for all South
Asian citizens. For example, India provided immense assistance to its neighbour Nepal in the
aftermath of the 2015 earthquake.
 Military And Defence Cooperation
 India is also focusing on deepening security in the region through military cooperation.
 Various exercises like Surya Kiran with Nepal, Sampriti with Bangladesh aim to strengthen
defence relations.
 Also, India has committed to play a greater role in capacity building of the armies of Bhutan,
Sri Lanka, Nepal and Maldives by providing training to their cadets at NDA, IMA and OTA.

Joint Exercise Name Exercise Type Between

Mitra Shakti Joint Military Exercise India-Sri Lanka
SLINEX Joint Naval Exercise India-Sri Lanka
Surya Kiran Joint Military Exercise India-Nepal
PANEX Humanitarian Assistance and Disaster Relief (HADR) Exercise India-BIMSTEC
Hand in Hand Joint Military Exercise India-China
SAMPRITI Joint Military Exercise India-Bangladesh
IN-BN CORPAT Joint Naval Exercise India-Bangladesh
Table Top Ex Joint Air Force Exercise India-Bangladesh
EKUVERIN Joint Military Exercise India-Maldives
IMBEX Joint Military Exercise India-Myanmar
IMCOR Joint Naval Exercise India-Myanmar

 Challenges in India’s Neighbourhood First Policy

 Relation with Pakistan
 Relation with Pakistan, remains India’s biggest diplomatic and security challenge.
 India’s challenge is to manage relationships with a state which, openly, uses terror as an
instrument of state policy and has fractured, multiple power centres.
 Unstable Afghanistan
 Afghanistan remains a challenge too. Fragile within and facing state-sponsored external
threat from Pakistan, a possible state collapse would spawn jihadist terrorism in all directions
from which India is unlikely to remain immune.
 Indian diplomacy is active in international efforts to stabilise the country.
 Growing Chinese Pressure
 China is another big challenge that is increasing its presence around India. The relationship
is marked with suspicion over China’s policy towards Pakistan, including the construction
of the Gwadar port. Also, China-Pakistan economic corridor running through POK.
 It failed to take a meaningful direction and growing Chinese pressure has prevented the
country from winning allies in the region.
 On the maritime front, China is extending its influence across the Indo-Pacific region.
 Interference in Domestic Affairs
 India is interfering in the domestic affairs of neighbouring countries especially in Nepal in
the violation of their sovereignty.
 India is also creating hurdles in free transit and free trade within and beyond Nepal and
keeps suppressing its people and government.
  Impact of India’s Domestic Politics
 India’s domestic policies are creating problems in Bangladesh, a Muslim-majority country,
showing India’s neighbourhood first policy faces serious challenges even in friendly
territories like Bangladesh.
 Impact of India’s Tilt towards West
 India draws closer to the West, particularly through the QUAD and other multilateral and
mini-lateral initiatives.
 But Sri Lanka’s connections with the West are not moving in a good direction as the
country’s current government faces increasing criticism from Western capitals on human
rights issues and freedoms.
 Anti-Indian sentiments
 Anti-Indian sentiments are getting rooted in the minds of people of region due to perceived
notion of India’s big brother attitude and its economic dependence to India.
 For instance, the recent step of Demonetization impacted many countries like Nepal,
Bangladesh, Bhutan, Sri Lanka, and Myanmar which use the Indian currency as a parallel
currency within their borders.

 India-Afghanistan Relations
 India and Afghanistan share a strong bond based on historical and cultural links.
 The Strategic Partnership Agreement between the two countries provides help to reform and
rebuild Afghanistan’s infrastructure.
 In order to encourage Afghanistan’s exports, India provides access them to duty free trade.
 Phoenix, APTECH, KEC, Spice Jet, Air India GSA are some of the renowned Indian companies
doing business in Afghanistan.
 Indian film music and songs are also influenced by Afghani music.

 India-Bangladesh Relations
 In 1971, the fragmentation of Pakistan happened and East Pakistan got disintegrated with West
Pakistan and Bangladesh was formatted. India supported the boiled struggle of East Pakistan of
that time.
 India has some strong geographical, cultural, historical and economic ties with Bangladesh.
 India and Bangladesh share a relationship of ‘friends of all seasons’. The strategical position of
Bangladesh is important for India’s defense at northeasters end.
 Bangladesh has started to shift towards Islam and it has become a point of concern for India.
India is a democratic country and it always supports the democratic values soothe internal
stability of Bangladesh is important for India as well.
 India and Bangladesh share some conflicts as well. One of them is the border issue between both
of the countries. The border between India and Bangladesh got finalised in 1947 and after the
formation of Bangladesh, India shares 4351 km long boundaries.
 The Indo-Bangladesh border crosses through 5 states and this borderline often used for
smuggling. Water dispute of 54 trans-border rivers is another reason for conflict between India
and Bangladesh. The illegal immigration issue is another problematic issue for India.
 Despite the presence of all the above mentioned issues, India and Bangladesh share hood
economical relationships.

 India-Bhutan Relations
 India and Bhutan have a unique and long-standing bilateral relationship marked by mutual trust,
friendliness, and understanding.
  The unique connection has been fostered through regular high-level visits and conversations
between the two nations.
 India and Bhutan established diplomatic relations in 1968, creating an Indian special office in
Thimphu.
 The Treaty of Friendship and Cooperation between India and Bhutan was signed in 1949 and
amended in February 2007.
 In 2018, India and Bhutan commemorated the Golden Jubilee of the beginning of their official
diplomatic relations.
 Since the early 1960s, when Bhutan established its Five Year Plans, India has provided economic
aid to Bhutan’s socioeconomic growth.
 The core of bilateral economic cooperation is mutually beneficial hydropower cooperation with
Bhutan.
 The Government of India has constantly supported Bhutan’s socioeconomic growth. The two
countries cooperation in hydropower is an example of win-win cooperation.
 There are active cultural interactions between India and Bhutan. Many Bhutanese pilgrims visit
sacred Buddhist places in India.
 Most Bhutanese students chose India as their preferred study-abroad destination, and the Indian
government provides nearly all of them with scholarships.

 India-China Relations
 India and China are Asia’s two growing powers.
 In addition to being the most populous nation, they are also home to two of the world’s oldest
civilizations, the Chinese and Indus Valley Civilizations.
 Historically, India and China have had cultural and commerce ties dating back to the 2nd century
BC.
 On April 1, 1950, India and China formally established diplomatic relations..
 However, the border dispute between India and China dominated the 1950s, eventually leading to
war between the two nations in 1962.
 China began to claim huge portions of Indian Territory in the North East Frontier Agency
(NEFA, now Arunachal Pradesh) and Ladakh by issuing maps depicting these areas as part of
China.
 In 1956-57, China expanded its frontiers and built a 110 km long road through India’s Aksai
China region (Ladakh).
 Relations between India and China are currently deteriorating. The two great powers clash along
their disputed boundary in the Himalayan area.
 In June 2017, a military standoff occurred between India and China on the Doklam plateau,
located at a tri-junction between India, China, and Bhutan.

 India-Maldives Relations
 India and the Maldives have ancient ethnic, linguistic, cultural, religious, and commercial ties,
and their relations are close, friendly, and multifaceted.
 In 1965, India was among the first countries to recognize and establish diplomatic relations with
the Maldives following its independence.
 In 1972, India established a CDA mission and a resident High Commissioner in 1980.
 In November 2004, the Maldives established a full-fledged High Commission in New Delhi, one
of the country’s only four diplomatic posts overseas.

 India-Myanmar Relations
 Relations between India and Myanmar are based on common historical, ethnic, cultural, and
religious links. India, the birthplace of Lord Buddha, is a pilgrimage place for Myanmar's people.
  In 1951, India and Myanmar signed a Treaty of Friendship.
 India and Myanmar have a 1600-kilometer-long land border and a marine border in the Bay of
Bengal.
 The physical proximity of the two nations has aided in the development and maintenance of
friendly relations, as well as the facilitation of people-to-people interaction.

 India-Nepal Relations
 India and Nepal have been good neighbours. Between both of the countries with a majority of
Hindus, an ethnic demographic relationship exists.
 The citizens of India and Nepal have cross border marriages.
 India and Nepal share an age-old relation which has been described in Hindu mythology. And at
present time frequent high-level meetings make this bond stronger.
 Nepal is now a democratic country. India has played an important role in the development of
Nepal especially after the massive earthquake in Nepal in 2015; India helped Nepal a lot in the
redevelopment work.
 The flagship projects of Nepal like B.P. Koirala Institute of Health Sciences was completed under
the Indian assistance. Overall India’s relation with Nepal is friendly and coordinative.

 Indo-Pakistan Relations
 The two nations have a complicated and mainly antagonistic relationship founded on several
historical and political events, most notably the partition of British India in August 1947; the
India-Pakistan border is one of the world’s most militarised international boundaries.
 Since British India’s partition in 1947, territorial disputes over the Kashmir area have caused two
of the three major Indo-Pakistani wars, in 1947 and 1965, and a limited war in 1999 (Kargil war).
 India also fought the 1971 war with Pakistan where India helped create a new country-
Bangladesh.
 However, India wants cordial relations with Pakistan as part of its “Neighborhood First Policy.”
 India’s continuous view is that conflicts between India and Pakistan should be addressed
bilaterally and peacefully.
 India would not compromise on national security matters and will take robust and decisive action
to counter all attempts to undermine India’s security and territorial integrity.

 India-Sri Lanka Relations

 India and Sri Lanka have a long history of intellectual, cultural, religious, and linguistic contact
spanning over 2,500 years.
 Since Independence, India, and Sri Lanka have established bilateral relations on various levels,
and significant advancements in the execution of development aid programs for internally
displaced people (IDPs) and underprivileged groups of the Sri Lankan population have helped to
strengthen the two nations’ relationship.
 High-level exchanges of visits have characterized political relations between India and Sri Lanka
at periodic intervals.
 The India-Sri Lanka Free Trade Agreement (ISFTA) was signed in 1998 and has been in effect
since March 2000.
 India and Sri Lanka have a strengthening defense partnership based on intensive training and
service-to-service links.
 The Cultural Cooperation Agreement, signed on November 29, 1977, in New Delhi by the
governments of India and Sri Lanka, serves as the foundation for the periodic Cultural Exchange
Programs between the two nations.
 Way forward
 Transportation
 As the largest country, India should be leading to establish cross-border transport and
communication links.
 Strengthening Markets
 India should work with its neighbour in strengthening their markets and its own infrastructure
to its neighbours.
 Dialogue
 India must ensure its neighbour of continuous support for their development. Efforts must be
made to strengthen Indian exports in the region.
 Soft power
 India’s soft power and common culture provide an opportunity for India to strengthen its
cultural roots further in the region.
 Regional connectivity
 This must be pursued with greater vigour while security concerns are addressed
through cost-effective, efficient and reliable technological measures which are in use in
other parts of the world.

 Conclusion
 India is a vast country with a mosaic of cultures. It has earned the position of respect in South
East Asia.
 India has maintained good relations with all its neighbours due to its progressive mindset.
 India’s foreign policy involves maintaining cooperation, freedom and peace with all the
neighbouring countries. Ignoring the conflicts of the pasts, Indian political leaders always try to
cooperate with the neighbouring countries.
 India is an industrialized, developing country. It has a long history of international
collaboration, is a member of SAARC, BIMSTEC, and BRICS, and is an essential component
of the emerging world.
 India was a founder member of various international organisations, including the United Nations,
the Asian Development Bank, G20, and the Non-Aligned Movement.
 India has a separate ministry responsible for international relations. It’s known as the Ministry of
External Affairs (MEA).
 India’s immediate neighbourhood directly impacts it geopolitically, geo-strategically and geo-
economically because of its vicinity. Thus, working with them is important for India to rise as a
superpower. Emphasis must be on sustainable and inclusive development.
 Integrating India’s regional economic and foreign policy remains a major challenge. Therefore,
India should resist compromising bilateral relationships with neighbours for short economic
interests.
 The present circumstances have forced India to take some harsh steps against terrorist training
camps situated in Pakistan. The step taken by the Indian government was supported by the other
powerful nations of the world. To maintain peace in South Asia, India has to tackle its two
neighbours very carefully. These two neighbours are Pakistan and China.
 Meaningful dialogue can improve the relationship between India and its neighbour countries.

You can change your friends but not your neighbours.

So it becomes a must have to develop cordial relationships
with all our neighbours.
 India’s Taliban Challenge
 Background
 The Taliban emerged in the early 1990s in northern Pakistan following the withdrawal of Soviet
troops from Afghanistan.
 It is an Islamic fundamentalist political and military organisation operating in Afghanistan. They
have dominated Afghan polity for quite some time and feature regularly in international affairs.
 They seek to reimpose their strict version of Islam in Afghanistan.
 Civil war
 The first time the Taliban took Kabul was in 1996.
 Afghanistan was in ruins and much of its infrastructure was destroyed by a raging civil war.
 Terrorist Attack
 On 11th September 2001, terrorist attacks in America killed nearly 3,000 people.
 A month after 9/11, the US launched airstrikes against Afghanistan - Operation Enduring
Freedom to hunt down Osama Bin Laden who was being given shelter by the Taliban.
 Transitional Government in Afghanistan
 After the attacks, the North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) coalition troops declared
war on Afghanistan.
 The US dislodged the Taliban regime and established a transitional government in
Afghanistan.
 The US had reached the conclusion long ago that the war was unwinnable and approached for
peace talks.
 Foreign Powers
 Over the last two decades, foreign powers including India helped rebuild roads, dams,
government offices, hospitals, rural infrastructure, the economy, and education.
 Peace Talks
 Murree Talks
 In 2015 the US had sent a representative to the first-ever meeting between the Taliban
and the Afghan government that was hosted by Pakistan in Murree in 2015.
 Doha Talks
 In 2020, before the Doha Talks started, the Taliban had maintained that they would hold
direct talks only with the US, and not with the Kabul government, which they did not
recognise.
 In the agreement, the US administration promised that it would withdraw all American
troops from Afghanistan by 1st May, 2021.
 The deadline has been pushed to 11th September 2021.
 US Exit 2021
 The USA signed a deal with the Taliban that paved the way towards a full withdrawal of
USA troops from Afghanistan and also represent a step towards ending the 20-year-war in
Afghanistan.
 The peace deal was expected to kick-off two processes- a phased withdrawal of US
troops and an ‘intra-Afghan’ dialogue.
 By July 2021, the US claimed that it had withdrawn 90% of the troops and Taliban claimed
that it had controlled over 85% of the Afghan Territory.
 Taliban Takeover
 Taliban took control of the regime in Afghanistan in August 2021 by disposing the Afghan
National Army.
  This was the first time since their ouster 20 years ago in the wake of the 9/11 strikes that
Taliban fighters had entered the city — they first seized the Capital in 1996.
 In 2021, the Taliban took over a readymade country after the withdrawal of USA from
Afghanistan.
 But administering a nation of 38 million requires capacity and finances which the Taliban are
short on both.
 Many wealthy people, and those of the middle class with means and education, including
civil servants, have fled the country, not wishing to be part of the Taliban regime.
 No Recognition
 The international community has not yet recognised the regime formally, and sanctions,
including travel bans on many Taliban, remain in place.
 Their access to international banking and finances are limited.

 Present Scenario of Taliban

 Economy
 The Taliban presented an annual budget based entirely on domestic revenue.
 Afghanistan is the heart of Asia and countries in the region that want to trade with each other
have to go through Afghanistan.
 Most of Afghanistan’s revenues are now being raised through customs duties.
 It is also exporting coal to Pakistan.
 They are also leasing out small mines to local investors.
 Banks are functioning, except for international transfers.
 Schools and hospitals are open.
 Security
 They have restored peace apart from the Daesh or ISKP (Islamic State Khorasan Province),
which has carried out attacks in Kabul.
 The killing of al-Qaeda leader Ayman al-Zawahiri in a Kabul neighbourhood by the US has
added to the Taliban’s insecurity.
 Scrapped the constitution
 The regime has scrapped the constitution promulgated by the previous Islamic Republic of
Afghanistan.

 Impacts
 No Change Towards Civil Society
 There hasn’t been much change in the Taliban’s attitude towards civil society from the time
they last ruled in Kabul.
 But outright brutalities, including public executions, have not been reported yet.
 A dress code has been prescribed for both men and women, but it is not strictly implemented.
 Ban on the Education of Girls
 The most draconian anti-people action by the Taliban so far has been to ban the education of
girls beyond class 6 in school, and to make it difficult for women to work.
 Extrajudicial Killings
 UN has reported extrajudicial killings, arbitrary detentions, instances of incommunicado
detentions, and torture and ill-treatment of former government and military officials.
 Those of the previous regime who remain in the country live in hiding for fear of being
tracked down and killed.
 Hazaras and Tajiks
 The minority communities that the Taliban have targeted such as the Hazaras and Tajiks feel
more vulnerable than the majority Pashtun.
  Poverty Related Issues
 Millions of Afghans have plunged into poverty and half of the nation’s population of nearly
38 million is living under the poverty line, according to a report by the United Nations.

 Role of the International Community

 The UN’s humanitarian response has helped Afghanistan keep its head above water.
 Until the Taliban banned high school education for girls, the UN was paying teachers salaries.
 It was also ensuring that community doctors and other health workers were paid. The
International Community of the Red Cross (ICRC) is financing the Indira Gandhi Children’s
Hospital in Kabul.
 In the absence of international banking facilities, UN planes have flown in $1bn in hard cash,
including to fund money transfers to the needy through partner agencies, which has helped to
increase the circulation of money in the economy.
 Some INGOs are even using hawala, euphemistically calling the middlemen “money transfer
agents”.

 Significance of Afghanistan for India

 Economic and Strategic Interest
 Afghanistan is a gateway to the oil and mineral-rich Central Asian republics.
 Afghanistan's main advantage is its geography, as anyone who is in power in
Afghanistan controls the land routes connecting India with Central Asia (via Afghanistan).
 Located at the heart of the historic Silk Road, Afghanistan was long the crossroads of
commerce between Asian countries connecting them to Europe, and enhancing religious,
cultural, and commercial contacts.
 Developmental Projects
 The massive reconstruction plans for the country to offer a lot of opportunities for Indian
companies.
 Three major projects- The Afghan Parliament, the Zaranj-Delaram Highway, and
the Afghanistan-India Friendship Dam (Salma Dam), along with India’s assistance of more
than 3$ billion in projects, hundreds of small development projects (of schools, hospitals and
water projects) have cemented India’s position in Afghanistan.
 Security Interest
 India has been the victim of state-sponsored terrorism emanating from Pakistan supported
terrorist group operating in the region (e.g., Haqqani network).
 Thus, India has two priorities in Afghanistan:
 To prevent Pakistan from setting up a friendly government in Afghanistan, and
 To avoid the return of jihadi groups, like Al Qaeda, which could strike in India.

 Issues Involved
 India is concerned about the Taliban’s links with Pakistan’s ISI and efforts by the latter to use
the Haqqani network to target India’s interests in Afghanistan.
 India’s Afghanistan policy continues to be assessed vis-a-vis Pakistan, which opposes any
security role for India in Afghanistan and sees India’s presence there as detrimental to its
interests.
 Taliban also has link with Jaish-e-Muhammad (JeM) and Laskar-e-Toiba (LeT) who are behind
various terrorist activities against India.
 India still does not recognise the Taliban. However, if it considers the option of entering into
direct talks with the Taliban, it would constitute a major departure from its consistent policy of
dealing only with recognised governments.
  Afghanistan has been plunged into chaos after the Taliban took over in the wake of the pullout
of American forces from the country. It not only ensured a swift Taliban advance across
Afghanistan but also a peaceful surrender of Kabul.
 Reports from the provinces point to gross human rights abuses by the Taliban. If the new
Taliban dispensation demonstrates a better record in Kabul, it might encourage the world to
respond positivel.
 Nevertheless, the Taliban’s entry into Kabul marks the beginning of a new phase in the
relationship between Afghanistan and India.

 India’s Stand in the Current Situation

 Friendship
 Afghanistan is possibly the only country in South Asia where people spontaneously declare
hand on heart that they love India.
 Visa Issue
 People of Afghanistan are hurt that India shut its doors on them when they most needed its
help during Taliban retaking over Afghanistan.
 Indian Embassy
 The reopening of the Indian Embassy has given that hope legs, even though there is no
indication from India yet that it is going to restart consular work, despite repeated
declarations that India’s approach to Afghanistan is dictated by the people-to-people links
between the countries, and a desire to assist Afghans in a dire humanitarian situation.
 Food Aid and Medicines
 India has been sending food aid and medicines to the country since 2021.
 Strategic Interests
 India sees Afghanistan as vital for its strategic interests in the region, including access to
Central Asia, and ensuring that Pakistan is not able to relocate India-focused terror groups to
Afghanistan.
 Infrastructure Projects
 Taliban want India to complete the infrastructure projects that it had left unfinished in the
country.
 From 2002 to 2021, India spent $4 billion in development assistance in Afghanistan, building
high-visibility projects such as highways, hospitals, the parliament building, rural schools,
and electricity transmission lines.
 One of the projects that was left incomplete was the Shahtoot Dam to provide drinking water
to 2 millionn residents of Kabul.

 Challenges For India

 Issue of Indian Security
 The restoration of Taliban rule in Afghanistan presents some very serious potential
challenges for Indian security.
 The challenges range from securing its development infrastructures to safely evacuating
Indians stranded in troubled Afghanistan.
 Spread of International Terrorism
 For India, a bigger challenge will be about the Taliban’s renewed support for international
terrorism and Pakistan’s re-direction of jihadi groups that have allegedly fought with the
Taliban towards India.
 Religious Fundamentalism
 Like all radical groups, the Taliban will have trouble balancing its religious ideologyIndia
hence, faces a challenge to deradicalise the region for long lasting peace and stability.
  New Regional Geopolitical Developments
 There can be new regional geopolitical alignments (such as China-Pakistan-Taliban) which
may go against the interests of India.
 Meanwhile, the US withdrawal compels the creation of a new balance of power system in and
around Afghanistan.
 Moreover, the US will try to shape the international attitudes towards the new regime.
 No Contiguity With Taliban
 Unlike Pakistan, China and Iran, India has no contiguity with Afghanistan.
 India has no such security responsibilities and no direct access to Central Asia.
 This may give reasons to the Taliban to hit back at India through Pakistan in J&K, given that
LeT and Jaish are operating in Afghanistan alongside the Taliban.

 India’s Options
 Broader Diplomatic Engagement
 India should consider appointing a special envoy dedicated to Afghanistan.
 The envoy can ensure that Indian views are expressed at every meeting, and broaden
engagement with the Taliban.
 Decoupling of Taliban-Pakistan
 Although Pakistan’s leverage over the Taliban is real, it may not be absolute.
 The Taliban is bound to seek a measure of autonomy from Pakistan. India will have to wait a
while before the current issues between India and the Taliban can be overcome.
 Balancing the Opportunities in Afghanistan
 Structuring the internal balance of power within Afghanistan has always been hard. A deeper
Sino-Pak partnership in Afghanistan will inevitably produce countervailing trends.
 However, for a patient, open-minded and active India, there will be no dearth of balancing
opportunities in Afghanistan.
 Leverage Indian Infrastructural Developments
 Indian $3 billion assistance to Afghanistan is in concrete projects that serve its population and
have earned it their goodwill that will endure.
 The need today is to not stop the development work in Afghanistan and to continue the good
work.
 Global Cooperation
 There is a lot less global acceptance of terrorism today than in it was in the 1990s.
 No major power would like to see Afghanistan re-emerge as a global sanctuary of terror.
 The world has also imposed significant new constraints on Pakistan’s support for terror
through mechanisms like the Financial Action Task Force.

 Way Forward
 India needs to re-evaluate its decisions and be more omnidirectional in its approach to deal with
all forces that are central to the future of Afghanistan.
 The changing political and security situation requires India to be more open to adapting its
maximalist position and starting a dialogue with the Taliban.

India, as would be impacted by the consequences of American

withdrawal, has to work with Taliban and other regional powers to
protect its interests and stabilise Afghanistan. If India remains active and
patient too, many opportunities could open up in the new Afghan phase.
 India-UAE Relations
 India and the UAE established diplomatic relations in 1972.
 There are strong ties between India and the United Arab Emirates (UAE) based on millennia of
cultural, religious, and economic exchange.
 There have been centuries of people-to-people and barter trade between the two regions.
 India-UAE relations were bolstered with diplomatic ties between India and the UAE established
in 1972. The UAE established an embassy in Delhi in 1972, and India established an embassy in
Abu Dhabi in 1973.
 The greater push has been achieved in bilateral relations when the visit of India’s PM to the UAE
in August 2015 marked the beginning of a new strategic partnership between the two countries.
 Further, during the visit of the Crown Prince of Abu Dhabi to India in January 2017 as the chief
guest at India’s Republic Day celebrations, it was agreed that bilateral relations were to
be upgraded to a comprehensive strategic partnership. This gave momentum to launching
negotiations for an India-UAE comprehensive economic partnership agreement.
 Around 3 million Indians are living harmoniously in the UAE. As India seeks to enhance
economic engagement and deepen security cooperation with the Gulf, it finds a willing partner in
the UAE.
 As UAE ‘Look[s] East’ to find partners for its economic growth and with security concerns
emanating from turmoil in West Asia and growing threat from terrorism, it finds a natural partner
in India.
 UAE has a special place due to its business-friendly atmosphere, willingness to invest in the
Indian economy and its important role in maintaining peace and stability in the region.
 Pillars of Cooperation
 Economic Cooperation
 The UAE is India’s number three trading partner and its number two export destination after
the United States.
 India ranks as the UAE’s second-largest commercial partner.
 Trade between the two countries is around US$ 70 Billion.
 The non-oil trade amounts to around US$ 40 billion of this total. Approximately US$ 30
billion worth of goods and services were imported by India along with export of US$ 30
billion goods and services.
 Energy Cooperation
 One of the main cornerstones of collaboration between the two countries is energy
cooperation
 India’s fourth-largest crude oil supplier is now the UAE.
 This type of cooperation has evolved from a buyer-seller connection to one that involves a
“Strategic Partnership,” which is a key aspect.
 Oil and gas investments in India are expected to total over US$ 300 billion, as the country has
risen to the position of third-largest consumer of energy goods.
 Defence and Strategic Cooperation
 The security collaboration has expanded in recent years.
 India has already observed UAE territory being utilised for different anti-Indian activities
because of the UAE’s popularity as a destination for Pakistani diaspora.
 Since the signing of the MoU on Defence Cooperation in 2003 and the establishment of the
Joint Defence Cooperation Committee (JDCC), the two countries have engaged in regular
interaction.
 Diaspora
 An estimated 3.5 million Indians live abroad and send back over $19 billion in remittances
each year.
 For Indian nationals from all around the country, the UAE remains a popular choice for
travel.
 The UAE has the biggest concentration of residents from Kerala.

 Reasons For UAE’s Tilt Towards India

 Geopolitical Conditions
 As Iran is threatening continuously to close the Strait of Hormuz in case there is a conflict
with Saudi Arabia or US. This will adversely affect UAE as well.
 UAE saw Pakistan as a partner and incorporated a deep economic and security relationship
with it. But in the present day, Pakistan does not seem to be of much help to UAE. Already
facing internal issues, Pakistan failed to come to the aid of Saudi Arabia in its war against
Iran-backed rebels in Yemen and has been unable to curb jihadists operating from its land
across West Asia.
 India is an important destination for oil and energy purchase as the US is on the way of
becoming hydrocarbon independent. UAE’s massive sovereign wealth funds can act as a
great resource in the development of infrastructure in India.
 There has been a rising convergence between India and UAE on the terror issue and both the
countries talked of the need to combat terror groups without any discrimination given the fact
that five UAE diplomats were killed in an attack in Kandahar in Afghanistan.
 Countries like Syria, Iraq, Libya and Yemen are suffering from violent conflicts. The Gulf
Cooperation Council (GCC) has not produced expected results.
  Economic Relations
 Trade and commerce forms the backbone of the bilateral relations.
 UAE has been one of India’s leading sources of FDIs.
 UAE is India’s third largest trade partner after China and the United States.
 The UAE accounts for 8 percent of India’s oil imports and was fifth largest supplier of crude
oil to India.
 Security and Defence Cooperation
 Another significant pillar of India-UAE ties is reflected in their growing cooperation in
security and defence sector.
 With the spread of radicalism in Gulf and South Asia, India looks to enhance security
cooperation with UAE to counter terrorist threats and combat radicalization.
 India and the UAE conduct joint air combat exercises, such as ‘Desert Eagle II’, to
enhance security cooperation and counter terrorist threats.
 Naseem-Al-Bahr and Gulf Star are bilateral naval exercises between the Indian Navy and
the UAE Navy which aims to enhance maritime security, promote cooperation in anti-
piracy operations, and strengthen naval ties between the two nations.

 Challenges in India-UAE Relations

 Slow Implementation of Investments
 The establishment of a $75 billion investment fund by the UAE for infrastructure projects in
India, announced in 2015, has faced delays in finalizing the modalities and governance
structure.
 This slow implementation hampers the realization of investment commitments.
 Lack of Clarity And Transparency
 Indian companies operating in the UAE often face challenges due to a lack of clarity in
commercial regulations and labor laws.
 Additionally, a lack of transparency on the part of Emirati businesses adds to the difficulties
faced by Indian companies.
 Commercial Challenges
 Indian companies based in the UAE face challenges due to unclear commercial regulations,
labour laws, and a lack of transparency by Emirati businesses.
 Issues Concerning The Indian Diaspora
 Indian migrants in the UAE face cumbersome and strict regulations, particularly in relation to
Emirati employers.
 Problems such as favouritism towards workers of other nationalities and a slight drop in
remittances inflow from the UAE to India have been observed.
 A large number of untalented and unskilled Indian labourers or migrants working in the UAE
are subjected to terrible working conditions and are denied the protections afforded to other
workers.
 Influence of the Pakistan Factor
 Historical and civilizational ties between India and the Gulf region are strained due to the
influence of the Pakistan factor.
 Political relations are affected by tensions between India and Pakistan, which impact India’s
relations with countries in the region.
 Balancing Geopolitics
 India’s relations with Iran and the UAE’s relations with China create a dynamic where
geopolitical considerations can sometimes challenge the bilateral relationship between India
and the UAE.
  Energy Pricing Disagreements
 As an OPEC country, the UAE has a different perspective on energy pricing compared to
India, a major oil consumer.
 Disagreements over energy pricing, including India’s call for a cap on prices, have led to
heated exchanges between oil ministers in the past.
 Air services agreement
 India and the UAE have yet to renegotiate their air services agreement.
 The UAE seeks to increase the number of flights and destinations to India, while India
maintains certain caps to protect its domestic airlines. This issue has been a source of
contention between the two countries.
 Iran Issue
 The UAE and Iran have territorial disputes over the Tunbs and Abu Musa islands.
 Iran is aggressive in its interactions. It will be another Iranian-Arab feud. India’s energy
security, trade and diaspora ties will be harmed if there is a regional conflict.

 Significant Importance of UAE for India’s Act East and Look West Policy
 Act East Policy
 As the UAE looks eastward to expand its economic growth, it finds India as a natural partner
due to its rapidly growing economy, large consumer market, and skilled workforce.
 Look West Policy
 The UAE is equally important for India in its Look West Policy, which aims to deepen ties
with countries in West Asia. India’s political and diplomatic engagements with the UAE have
significantly increased in recent times, and the two countries have established a strategic
partnership.
 The UAE serves as a willing partner for India in its efforts to enhance economic engagement
and security cooperation in the Gulf region.
 With the UAE’s “Look East” approach aligning with India’s Look West Policy, the two
countries find mutual benefits in expanding trade, investment, and security collaboration.
 The UAE’s geographic location, stability, and status as a major economic and financial hub
in the region make it a key player in India’s West Asia policy.

 Significance of UAE to India

 Strategic
 Energy Security: UAE cooperation is vital for India’s energy security and development.
UAE is 5th largest exporter of energy resources to India (2015-16) and its cooperation is also
crucial for Indian Strategic Petroleum Reserve which is being developed by India for crisis
period.
 Terrorism: India and the UAE signed an extradition treaty back in 1999. With the rise of
global terrorist organizations and spread of radicalism in Gulf and South Asia, India looks to
enhance security cooperation with the Gulf countries including the UAE to counter terrorist
threats and combat online radicalization.
 Kashmir and Pakistan: In the UN, the OIC (Organization of Islamic Cooperation, 57
members) frequently tables resolutions against India regarding the situation in Kashmir and
the GCC tends to lean in Pakistan’s direction on the matter. UAE’s perceived clout in both
the Gulf Cooperation Council (GCC) and the Organization of Islamic Cooperation (OIC) is
vital for protecting India’s interest and concern for Kashmir.
 Trade Route: Freedom of navigation and maritime security are of strategic interest to both
the nations. India’s trade and energy security is inextricably linked to the security of the
Straits of Hormuz and Bab-el-Mandeb.
  Economic
 Investment: UAE has the largest sovereign wealth fund. Its $800 billion sovereign wealth
fund is a large resource pool from which investment can be made in infrastructure
development in India- progress on these lines can be seen in Abu Dhabi’s interest in Indian
Highway projects. The Joint production of Defence equipment under the “Make in
India” program is another important area of focus.
 It has planned to invest $75 billion in India. Greater investment from the UAE for India’s
infrastructure sector, hence, becomes crucial.
 Exports: UAE is the only country in the Persian Gulf with which India has a favorable trade
balance, despite it being a substantial source of crude oil for India. UAE is also seen as the
gateway for India’s export to Africa and Central Asia.
 Diaspora’s Interest
 Indian expatriates comprise around 30% of the total population of the UAE.
Apart from remittances, the safety of Indian Diaspora, given the volatile situation in the Gulf
is a concern for India.

 Way Forward
 As India and UAE look forward to enhance their bilateral relations, there are areas that provide
further opportunities and should be tapped to further the ties.
 There is untapped potential as far as Indian health industry and medical sector is concerned.
Hence, medical tourism can be an important area where India can attract Emiratis. There is
further untapped potential in the arena of renewable energy, particularly solar energy.
 There is a scope for improving the investment climate in India to attract UAE businesses. India
has a huge market and there is a significant scope for growth in automobile industry, services
sector, agriculture and allied industries.
 Further, there is a need for enhancing the people-topeople contacts for familiarisation and
increasing interactions between think tanks, researchers and through academic exchanges.
 In Defence sector, there is a need to further enhance cooperation through joint training programs
for Indian and UAE officers.
 Thus, India needs a comprehensive region-wide policy review for the Gulf, not a piecemeal one.
This will enable India to extract the most benefit of its relationship with UAE.

 Conclusion
 The UAE will play a vital part in this process as India’s expertise grows around the world and the
country emerges as an emerging force. Indian participation in the United Nations Security
Council (UNSC) as a non-permanent member will give India a greater opportunity to cooperate
with its ally across the Arabian Sea.
 Their benefits also extends to a wide range of spheres from increased trade and employment
opportunities to investment opportunities and a partner in geo-political aspirations ranging from a
common outlook towards sustainable development, climate change, combating terrorism,
endorsing maritime trade and security and promoting peace and stability in the area. In the
coming years, these close ties in various spheres could be assumed to grow closer and smoother
thereby providing opportunities and promoting prosperity in the region and beyond.

The UAE today is India’s closest partner in the Arab world and
fortunately, there is enough resilience in bilateral ties to withstand
the recent convulsions. It will take a sustained public diplomacy
effort to further improve the relations.
 Indo-Pacific Region
 What is the Indo-Pacific Region?
 About
 In a world undergoing dynamic transformation, few regions are changing more rapidly than
the others like the Indo-Pacific region. It is indisputable that the Indo-Pacific is
the 21st century’s locus in trade and technology incubation that makes Indo-Pacific a
prominent addition to the geopolitical lexicon.
 In line, the security and stability of this region remains a major issue and goes beyond a mere
consideration of emerging political equations. And to achieve open and secure Indo-
Pacific, stakeholder nations need a 'collaborative management' approach.
 Indo-Pacific is a recent concept. It was about a decade ago that the world started talking about
the Indo-Pacific; its rise has been quite significant.
 One of the reasons behind the popularity of this term is an understanding that the Indian
Ocean and the Pacific are a linked strategic theater.
 Also, the centre of gravity has shifted to Asia. The reason being maritime routes, the Indian
Ocean and the Pacific provide the sea lanes. The majority of the world’s trade passes through
these oceans.
 An alternative to the long-dominant “Asia-Pacific,” which signified the eastward movement
of global developments from the Euro-Atlantic dimension, is the Indo-Pacific.
 Geographically, it is a theatre that combines the Pacific Ocean, the Indian Ocean, and the
surrounding land masses.
 The region is understood differently in various nations. The Indo-Pacific is an area, according
to nations like the US that extends from the coastlines of the Indian subcontinent to the
western shore of the Americas. In contrast, the notion is far more expansive in India and
Japan, reaching the African continent’s coasts.
 India, the United States, Australia, Japan, members of ASEAN, and other maritime nations
that hold key positions in the Indian and Pacific Oceans, including small island nations, are
major players in the Indo-Pacific.
 Significance
 The Indo-Pacific region is one of the most populous and economically active regions of the
world which includes four continents: Asia, Africa, Australia and America.
 The dynamism and vitality of the region is self-evident, 60% of the world's population and
2/3rd of the global economic output makes this region a global economic centre.
 The region is also a great source and destination for Foreign Direct Investment. Many of the
world’s critical and large supply chains have an Indo-Pacific connection.
 There are vast reserves of marine resources in the Indian and Pacific Oceans combined,
including offshore hydrocarbons, methane hydrates, seabed minerals and rare earth metals.
 Sizable coastlines and Exclusive Economic Zones (EEZs) provide littoral countries with
competitive capabilities for exploiting these resources.
 In turn, a number of the world's largest economies are located in the Indo-Pacific region,
including India, U.S.A, China, Japan, and Australia.

 What forces are causing the world to turn to the Indo-Pacific?

 Vast Natural Resources
 The immense quantities of marine resources found in the Indian and Pacific Oceans together
include offshore hydrocarbons, methane hydrates, sea bed minerals, rare earth metals,
fisheries, etc.
  A competitive environment for the exploitation of these resources has been established by the
extensive coastlines and Exclusive Economic Zones (EEZs) of littoral countries.
 China as a factor
 A number of regional and extra-regional nations have expressed concern in recent years about
China’s assertive foreign policy, rapid economic growth, military development, and power
projection. The following are the concerns of world nations regarding China’s foreign policy.
o Belt and Road Initiative– A number of nations, including India, have serious concerns
about the BRI’s lack of openness and transparency as well as its involvement in
irresponsible financing practices that place unsupportable financial burdens on people.
This makes it possible to employ these initiatives as strategic military installations and
coercive tactics.
o Militarization of the Indian Ocean Region– In addition to its existing commercial
ports, China has developed new ones throughout the Indo-Pacific, including the ports of
Gwadar (Pakistan) and Hambantota (Sri Lanka). Due to their proximity to vital choke
points, these ports are strategically significant, but there have also been rumors that they
could be used for military reconnaissance and surveillance operations.
 Non- Traditional Threats
 Due to its size, the area faces a variety of risks that are challenging to identify and manage,
including piracy, illegal fishing, human trafficking, terrorism, and environmental dangers.
 All nations must work together and integrate their efforts to combat these challenges.
 Trade and Economical Factors
 The Indo-Pacific Region makes up 65% of the global population, occupies 44% of the
planet’s surface area, generates 62% of global GDP, and supports 46% of global trade in
goods.
 In addition to being a wealthy market, the region also manages international supply networks.

 India and Indo-Pacific: Interests

 Cooperate with Others for Security Architecture
 A lot of India’s special partners, the US, Australia, Japan and Indonesia want India’s
presence in the South China Sea, East China Sea, basically to counter China.
 India, however, seeks to cooperate for an architecture for peace and security in the region.
The common prosperity and security require the countries to evolve, through dialogue, a
common rules-based order for the region.
 Indo-Pacific Extends from Africa to America
 For India, Indo-Pacific stands for a free, open, inclusive region. It includes all nations in the
geography and also others who have a stake in it.
 In its geographical dimension, India considers the area from the shores of Africa to the
shores of America.
 Equal Share in Trade and Investment
 India supports rule-based, open, balanced and stable trade environment in the Indo-Pacific
Region, which lifts up all nations on the tide of trade and investment.
 This is the same as what the country expects from the Regional Comprehensive Economic
Partnership (RCEP).
 Countering China
 India aspires to reduce the role of China in the region with an inclusive approach with other
nations so that Chinese aggressions will take a back stand.
 Geo-Political aspirations
 To expand its own presence in the region, especially in Africa, the Middle East, and
Southeast Asia and maintain its role as a net security provider.
  Unified ASEAN
 Unlike China, India seeks a unified ASEAN, not a divided one.
 China tries to play off some ASEAN members against others, thereby in a way executing
‘divide and rule’ conquest strategy.
 Peace and Security in the Indian Ocean
 90% of India’s trade and its energy supplies are transported via the Indian Ocean, while about
50% of India’s trade is concentrated in the Indo-Pacific region.
 India seeks to guarantee freedom of navigation, protect choke points, end conflicts amicably,
and confront unconventional security concerns in the Indian Ocean region (IOR).
 Fostering sustainable development
 Climate change will have a negative impact on India in the future. India supports the region’s
sustainable development as a result of the growth of the blue economy.
 Against Dominance of a Single Player
 India is looking for democratising the region. Earlier, the region used to be almost like an
American lake.
 However, there exists a fear that the region will become Chinese lake now. India doesn't
want hegemony of any player in the region.

 Challenges in the Indo-Pacific Region

 Theatre of Geo-Strategic Competition
 Indo-Pacific is the principal theatre of geo-strategic competition between different
multilateral institutions like QUAD and Shanghai Cooperation Organisation.
 China’s Militarization Move
 China has been a challenge to India’s interests and stability in the Indian Ocean. India's
neighbours are receiving military and infrastructural assistance from China, including
submarines for Myanmar, frigates for Sri Lanka, and its overseas military base in Djibouti
(Horn of Africa).
 Also, China has a hold over Hambantota port (Sri Lanka), which is just a few hundred miles
off the shores of India.
 Hotspot For Non-Traditional Issues
 The region's vastness makes it difficult to assess and address multiple risks, including
incidents of piracy, trafficking and terrorism.
 The Indo-Pacific region is facing serious challenges related to geographical and ecological
stability due to climate change and the three consecutive La Niña events that are
causing cyclones and tsunamis.
 Also, illegal, unregulated and unreported (IUU) fishing and marine pollution is hampering
the aquatic life of this region.
 India’s Limited Naval Capacity
 Indian Navy has limited resources and capacity to strengthen its efforts because of limited
allocation of Indian military budget. Also, lack of overseas military bases creates a
fundamental logistical challenge for India to maintain its presence in the Indo-Pacific.

 How can India Enhance its Presence in the Indo-Pacific?

 Issue based Coalitions
 Indo-Pacific collaboration cannot be successful without coordinated and issue-based
partnerships framed by a burden-sharing model.
 Recently, three maritime nations, France, the UAE and India, launched a trilateral framework
in the Indo-Pacific for cooperation in maritime security, humanitarian assistance and disaster
 relief (HADR), blue economy, regional connectivity, energy and food security and people-to-
people cooperation.
 Maritime Awareness
 From Indian Naval perspective, there is a need to create broader and more reliable situational
awareness of developments in the Indian Ocean Region through intelligence gathering and
surveillance, with Andaman and Nicobar Islands as a line of sight.
 With 1/5 of the world's population and the 5th largest economy, India is entitled to have its
own side, weigh its own interests, and make its own choices and these choices will not be
cynical and transactional, but rather reflect a balance of Indian values and national interests.
 India emphasises upon all alignment, for example, it only participated in the military
component of Vostok Exercise and abstained from the naval component that took place near
the Kuril Island (disputed region of Russian and Japan).
 Also, India’s SAGAR vision (Security and Growth for all in the Region), is a template
of shared responses to shared challenges in the Indo-Pacific.
 Enhancing Engagement with Indo-Pacific Countries
 India needs to ramp up defence production at home as well as promote arms exports that will
open the door for a more active Indian engagement with hard security issues in the Indo-
Pacific.
 India is now looking to liberalise trade relations with strategic partners like Australia and
the sale of the Brahmos supersonic cruise missile systems to the Philippines lend a sharper
edge to India’s engagement with the Indo-Pacific.
 Towards Free, Open and Secure Indo-Pacific: The need of the hour is to stress upon
promoting economic collaboration and collective growth in Indo-Pacific, with active
participation of stakeholder nations in economic and social front aiming for open, connected,
prosperous, secure, and resilient Indo-Pacific and ensure a more inclusive and sustainable
future.

 What is India’s blueprint for Indo-Pacific?

 A free, open, inclusive region.
 Southeast Asia is at the center of the Indo-Pacific.
 A common rules-based order for the region: This kind of order must adhere to values like
equality of all nations, regardless of size and strength, faith in dialogue, sovereignty, and
territorial integrity.
 Equal access to common spaces on sea and in the air, as a right under international law: It would
necessitate open business, unrestricted travel, and the peaceful resolution of differences in
conformity with international law.
 Circumventing power rivalries through partnerships: Nations must take care to prevent conflicts
from arising from competitiveness and disputes from arising from differences. As one of the
foundations of the new order, India supports regional architecture and groupings and anticipates
partnerships based on similar values and interests.

 How is India’s Vision of the Indo-Pacific different from other countries?

 It is important to realize that India does not view the Indo-Pacific region as an alliance or plan
meant to subjugate or oppress any one nation. The same cannot be true for other nations, such as
the US, whose Indo-Pacific strategy calls for an Indo-Pacific that is free and open but does not
articulate inclusivity openly.
 It suggests that the US could not be amenable to China’s engagement and gives the idea of the
Indo-Pacific a “containment” character.
 India’s Policy towards Indo-Pacific
 India’s major region of focus is still the Indian Ocean, despite its desire to increase its diplomatic
and political presence throughout the Indo-Pacific. Let’s talk about the fundamental components
of India’s Indo-Pacific strategy.
 Strengthening traditional roles
 As a Security Provider: India has been the primary security provider and strategic partner to
most of its smaller neighbors like Maldives, Mauritius, Seychelles, and Sri Lanka.
 As a first responder: Due to its strategic position, India’s navy is among the first to reach
nations requiring humanitarian assistance or medical aid in times of crisis and disasters
 For example,
o Operation Vanilla: Indian Navy provided humanitarian assistance and disaster relief to
Madagascar.
o Mission Sagar: Indian Navy provided Food Items, COVID-related Medicines, and
Special Ayurvedic Medicines with Medical Assistance Teams to Maldives, Mauritius,
Seychelles, Madagascar, and Comoros
 Naval Strategy
 Maritime Domain Awareness (MDA): With the help of intelligence, surveillance, and
reconnaissance, the Indian Navy hopes to acquire a solid and comprehensive strategic
situational awareness of developments in the IOR. Among the organizations that support
MDA initiatives are
 Information Management and Analysis Centre (IMAC): It generates India’s coastal MDA
picture by fusing the information it receives from various sources.
 Information Fusion Center for the India Ocean Region (IFC-IOR): By creating a shared,
coherent image of the marine situation and serving as the region’s maritime information hub,
it seeks to give regional MDA. Non-military white shipping agreements and coastal
surveillance radar chains on IOR islands are two further Indian measures aimed at enhancing
regional MDA capabilities.
 Expansion of India’s Naval Presence: The Indian Navy began its Mission Based
Deployments (MBDs) in 2017 in an effort to increase its presence and visibility. For instance,
lately, the MBD enabled the Indian Navy to respond quickly to a cyclone in Mozambique and
flood-hit Madagascar.
 Joint exercises: They produce positive operational interactions and improve the capabilities
of the naval forces in a variety of different domains. The Malabar Exercise (conducted by the
United States, Japan, and Australia), as well as Varun (France).

 Way Forward
 The countries in the region should have equal access as a right under international law to the
use of common spaces on sea and in the air that would require freedom of navigation,
unimpeded commerce and peaceful settlement of disputes in accordance with international law.
 It is important to establish connectivity in the region based on respect for sovereignty and
territorial integrity, consultation, good governance, transparency, viability and sustainability.
 Maritime Domain Awareness (MDA) is necessary for Indo-Pacific security.
 Security & peace and law-abiding nature of the countries around the region is crucial. This will
also allow multipolarity in the region. The smaller states in the region expect India to step up to
the plate and help them widen their options, both economically as well as militarily. India
should try to fulfill their aspirations.

The new strategic reality of the twenty-first century is represented by the creation of
the Indo-Pacific as a new geographical region that joins the Pacific and Indian Ocean.
International North–South Transport Corridor (INSTC)
 About
 The International North–South Transport Corridor (INSTC) is the ship, rail, and road route for
moving freight between India, Russia, Iran, Europe, and Central Asia.
 The primary goal of INSTC is to enhance connectivity and promote trade and economic
cooperation among these regions.
 It is a 7,200-kilometer Multi-Mode Transit System that connects ship, rail, and road routes for
moving cargo between India, Iran, Azerbaijan, Russia, Central Asia, and Europe.
 It was launched on 12th September 2000 in St. Petersburg, by Iran, Russia and India for the
purpose of promoting transportation cooperation among the Member States.
 The INSTC is designed to provide an alternative and shorter trade route between South Asia and
Northern Europe. It connects the Indian Ocean and the Persian Gulf to the Caspian Sea and
further extends to Northern and Western Europe.
 It is not a new concept. This ancient route was used by European, Indian, and many other foreign
traders to reach out to the Central Asian markets.

 Routes and Modes

 Central Corridor
 It begins from the Jawaharlal Nehru Port in Mumbai and connects to the Bandar Abbas port
(Iran) on the Strait of Hormuz.
 It then passes through the Iranian territory via Nowshahr, Amirabad, and Bandar-e-Anzali,
runs along the Caspian Sea to reach the Olya and Astrakhan Ports in Russia.
 Western Corridor
 It connects the railway network of Azerbaijan to that of Iran via the cross-border nodal
points of Astara (Azerbaijan) and Astara (Iran) and further to Jawaharlal Nehru port in India
via sea route.
 Eastern Corridor
 It connects Russia to India through the Central Asian countries of Kazakhstan, Uzbekistan,
and Turkmenistan.
 Members of the project
 The founding members are Russia, India and Iran. But since the signing of the agreement in 2002,
the progress on the route has been slow.
 But in January 2012, India discussed the various modalities to take the project forward. As a
follow-up, support from other Central Asian nations was sought, and now the group has been
expanded.
 There are 13 member states of the INSTC project:
 India  Tajikistan
 Iran  Kyrgystan
 Russia  Oman
 Azerbaijan  Turkey
 Armenia  Syria
 Kazakhstan  Ukraine
 Belarus
 Others:
 Bulgaria is the Observer State.
 The Baltic countries like Latvia and Estonia have also expressed willingness to join the
INSTC.
 Turkmenistan currently is not a formal member but is likely to have road connectivity to the
corridor, after being formally invited by India.
 Azerbaijan and Armenia are heavily involved in the project with both countries currently building
new train lines and roads to complete the missing links in the NSTC.

 Objectives of INSTC
 Reduced Transit Time
 The corridor aims to significantly decrease the time it takes for goods to travel between India,
Iran and Russia.
 Enhanced Trade
 INSTC seeks to facilitate increased trade between member countries by providing a more
efficient transportation route.
 Economic Growth
 By expediting the movement of goods, the corridor contributes to economic growth and
development in the participating nations.
 Connectivity
 The INSTC promotes connectivity and cooperation among countries in South Asia, Central
Asia and Europe.

 Significance of INSTC
 The corridor is aimed at reducing the carriage cost between India and Russia by about 30% and
bringing down the transit time from 40 days by more than half.
 It could be considered as a very important corridor for the development of freight traffic in the
region.
 This corridor is capable of boosting India’s economy.
 Indian exports are expected to increase substantially.
 This corridor is expected to increase market access to the member nations who can also benefit
through various backward and forward linkages.
 INSTC fosters collaboration among countries, promoting economic partnerships and mutual
benefits.
 India and INSTC
 India shows interest in extending INSTC membership to countries like Afghanistan and
Uzbekistan.
 Establishing a land route via Kabul and Tashkent to form the INSTC’s “Eastern corridor” would
maximise the potential of this collaboration.
 Also, India wants to include Chabahar port to be included in the International North-South
Transport Corridor (INSTC).
 The potential export sectors in India that benefit from INSTC include perishable goods (fruits and
vegetables), high-value items like ATMs, industrial printers, 3D printers, robotic assembly
accessories, etc., cross-border e-commerce, and sectors that are likewise.

 Significance of INSTC for India

 Regional Supply Chains Across Eurasia
 The creation of diverse supply chains across Eurasia might surely alter the stereotype of East
as the producer and West as the consumer.
 Alternate Route
 India sees INSTC as an alternative means of connecting with Central Asia, which is rich in
hydrocarbons and has strategic importance.
 Given the obstacles in the straight route through Pakistan, it creates a permanent alternate
route for trade between Afghanistan and Central Asia.
 China and Pakistan are working to strengthen their economic and trade ties through the China
Pakistan Economic Corridor (CPEC) and the Gwadar port, both of which are part of
China's Belt and Road Initiative (BRI).
 Alternative to Suez Canal
 Suez Canal’s blockage in 2021, which roughly cost 12% of global trade and reportedly held
up trade valued at USD 9 billion per day, has amplified the optimistic outlook towards the
INSTC as a cheaper and faster alternative multimodal transit corridor.
 Reducing Time and Freight Cost
 INSTC consists of sea routes, rail links, and road connections that connect Mumbai in India
to Saint Petersburg in Russia, passing through Chabahar Port.
 The INSTC is projected to reduce transit time by 40%, shortening it from 45-60 days to 25-30
days.
 Additionally, it is expected to decrease freight costs by 30% in comparison to the Suez Canal
route.
 Chabahar Port
 India has invested in the Chabahar Port located in the Iranian province of Sistan-Balochistan
and also signed an intergovernmental agreement for the INSTC.
 The Chabahar port is regarded as a doorway to golden chances for India, Iran, and
Afghanistan to trade with Central Asian countries.
 Chabahar is a port in southwestern Iran on the Gulf of Oman.
 It is Iran's sole port with direct access to the sea. It is situated on the southern coast of Iran's
energy-rich Sistan-Balochistan region.
 Economic Engagement
 For India, it provides a shorter trade route with Iran, Russia, and beyond to Europe, creating
scope for increased economic engagement.
 “Connect Central Asia” Policy
 When looked at in sync with the Ashgabat Agreement, the INSTC could be the key to India’s
“Connect Central Asia’’ policy.
 Challenges for INSTC
 The main challenges faced by INSTC are that the majority of projects associated with the INSTC,
have not received financial support from major international financial institutions such as
the World Bank, ADB (Asian Development Bank), European Investment Bank and Islamic
Development Bank.
 This is mainly due to the unilateral sanctions imposed by the United States on Iran, which has led
to concerns about possible “secondary sanctions."
 The harsher sanctions imposed on Iran after the US's withdrawal from the JCPOA (Joint
Comprehensive Plan of Action) in 2018 resulted in many global companies withdrawing from
infrastructure projects in Iran.

 Way Forward
 The INSTC has great potential for various stakeholders, but realizing its full benefits requires
more financing, cooperation, political will, and strategic planning.
 Funding is a major challenge, and private sector involvement is limited due to security threats and
political instabilities in the region. Harmonization of tariffs and customs is also important for the
corridor's success.
 To increase trade volume, it is crucial to improve informational connectivity and create demand.
Currently, the export of goods from South Asia and Southeast Asia to Europe through the Suez
Canal route is insufficient. Addressing this demand deficit is necessary for the successful
implementation of the ambitious INSTC project.
 The success of the corridor depends on geopolitical stability among member countries.
 The development of efficient transportation infrastructure is crucial for seamless operations along
the corridor.
 Moreover, the INSTC offers member countries the opportunity to collaborate and enhance
economic integration. Establishing industrial parks and special economic zones focused on
sectors of mutual interest, such as pharmaceuticals and agriculture, can further contribute to the
development and commercial value of this connectivity corridor.

 Current Status
 A dry run of container movement via the green corridor was conducted during April 2017 to test
and verify the smooth customs facilitation, connecting India with Russia and Europe via Iran.
 On July 7, 2022, Russian company RZD Logistics announced that it has successfully completed
its first transport of goods to India via the INSTC. This statement was also confirmed by Iranian
and Indian trade companies.

 Conclusion
 INSTC is an ideal start to project India as a big global player. Even though the investment is well
worth it with its economic, political, and geo-strategic benefits, it is testing India’s financial
backbone. India can do well to rope in other interested parties for partnering in the project, like
Japan which also sees Central Asia as a lucrative market for its products.
 While challenges exist, the shared vision of boosting trade, connectivity, and economic prosperity
among member countries remains a driving force behind the INSTC's journey.

The INSTC emerges as a transformative initiative with the power to

reshape trade and economic dynamics. By connecting India's extended
neighborhood and providing efficient routes, the corridor paves the
way for enhanced collaboration and growth.
 Inter-State River Disputes in India
 About
 Inter-State Water Disputes in India arise due to disagreements over the use, distribution, and
control of inter-state river basin waters. It is one of the most contentious issues in Indian
federalism today.
 To resolve water disputes between states, the Indian Parliament passed the Inter-State River
Water Disputes (ISRWD) Act in 1956, and various Inter-State Water Dispute Tribunals were
established.
 Despite having 18% of the world's population composition, India possesses only 4% of the global
renewable water resources. Interstate water disputes arise when multiple states disagree on the
utilization, allocation, and management of rivers that traverse their boundaries.
 Many of India's significant river basins, including some medium-sized ones, are shared between
multiple states. Consequently, the development of projects by one state on an interstate river can
affect the interests of other basin states.
 States frequently have differing views on the equitable distribution of water resources within the
country and the appropriate river water allocation among them.

 Mechanism for Resolution of Inter-State River Water Disputes

 The Inter-State River Water Disputes Act of 1956 governs the resolution of water disputes.
 Under this act, if a State Government requests the resolution of a water dispute and the Central
Government determines that negotiations are insufficient, a Water Disputes Tribunal is
established to adjudicate the matter.
 In 2002, the act was amended to incorporate key recommendations from the Sarkaria
Commission.
 These amendments introduced a one-year timeframe for establishing water disputes tribunals and
a three-year timeframe for reaching a decision.

 Agreements on Inter-State rivers

 The first step to resolving inter-state water disputes in mutual discussions and negotiations. The
states or parties involved can mutually negotiate on the terms and conditions and form an
agreement.
 In case, these negotiations do not work out, the next initiative is taken by the government, under
the Inter-State River Water Disputes Act, 1956. Then comes the Inter-state Water Disputes
Tribunals in India into force. The active tribunals in the country include:

 List of Inter-State Water Disputes

River States in Dispute Tribunal Year of
Tribunal
Formation
Ravi and Beas  Punjab Ravi & Beas Water Tribunal 1986
 Haryana
 Rajasthan
Krishna  Maharashtra Krishna Water Disputes Tribunal II 2004
 Telangana
 Andhra Pradesh
 Karnataka
Vamsadhara  Odisha Vansadhara Water Disputes Tribunal 2010
 Andhra Pradesh
Mahadayi/Mandovi  Maharashtra Mahadayi Water Disputes Tribunal 2010
 Goa
 Karnataka
Mahanadi  Chhattisgarh Mahanadi Water Disputes Tribunal 2018
 Odisha

 Other Major Inter-State Water Disputes in India

River States in Dispute Tribunal Year of Status
Tribunal
formation
Godavari  Madhya Pradesh Godavari Water 1969 The verdict was given in July 1980.
 Maharashtra Disputes
 Andhra Pradesh Tribunal
 Karnataka
 Odisha
Narmada  Rajasthan Narmada Water 1969 The verdict was given in July 1979.
 Madhya Pradesh Disputes
 Gujarat Tribunal
 Maharashtra
Cauvery  Kerala Cauvery Water 1990 The report and decision were issued in
 Karnataka Disputes February 2007.
 Tamil Nadu and Tribunal As a result of a Special Leave Petition
Puducherry (SLP) filed by the party states in the
Hon’ble Supreme Court, the matter is
currently under consideration.

 Constitutional Provisions for Inter-state Water Disputes

 Article 246 of the Constitution deals with the subject matter of laws to be made by the Parliament
and by the Legislatures of the States.
 Given below are the laws and the provisions under the Indian Constitution for inter-state water
disputes:
 Entry 17 of State List
 Issues related to water supplies, irrigation and canals, drainage and embankments, water
storage and water power are mentioned under this list.
 Entry 56 of the Union List
 The regulation and development of inter-State rivers and river valleys for the interest of
the public falls under this list. This provision empowers the Union government.
 Article 262 (1)
 Parliament may, by law, provide for the adjudication of any dispute or complaint with
respect to the use, distribution or control of the waters of, or in, any inter-State river or
river valley.
 Article 262 (2)
 Notwithstanding anything in this Constitution, Parliament may, by law, provide that
neither the Supreme Court nor any other court shall exercise jurisdiction in respect of any
such dispute or complaint as is referred to in clause (1).
 Inter-State River Water Disputes Act, 1956
 The Interstate River Water Disputes Act, 1956 was enacted under Article 262 of the Constitution
of India to resolve the water disputes that would arise in the use, control and distribution of an
interstate river or river valley.
 Over the years many amendments have been made in this Act to further simplify and ease out the
agreements and settlements between the related states.
 Inter-State River Water Disputes (Amendment) Bill, 2019:
 The latest amendment to this Act was introduced in Lok Sabha on July 25, 2019.
 It will further streamline the adjudication of inter-State river water disputes.
 The Bill seeks to amend the Inter-State River Water Disputes Act, 1956 with a view to
streamline the adjudication of inter-state river water disputes and make the present
institutional architecture robust.
 Issues with Interstate Water Dispute Tribunals
 Protracted proceedings and extreme delays in dispute resolution. Water disputes such as
the Godavari and Cauvery disputes in India have faced long delays in resolution.
 Opacity in the institutional framework and guidelines that define these proceedings; and ensuring
compliance.
 The composition of the tribunal is not multidisciplinary and it consists of persons only from
the judiciary.
 The absence of water data that is acceptable to all parties currently makes it difficult to even
set up a baseline for adjudication.
 The growing nexus between water and politics has transformed the disputes into turfs of vote
bank politics.
 This politicisation has led to increasing defiance by states, extended litigations and subversion of
resolution mechanisms.

 Measures to Resolve Water Disputes

 Bring Inter-state water disputes under interstate council constructed by the president
under article 263 and need for consensus-based decision making.
 States must be motivated for water use efficiency in every domain and water harvesting and
water recharging to reduce the demand on river water and in situ water source.
 Need of a single water management agency for both ground and surface water on scientific
basis and also for technical advice on union, river basin, state and district level for water
conservation and water management.
 Tribunals must be fast track, technical and also have a verdict enforceable mechanism in a time
bound manner.
 A central repository of water data is necessary for informed decision making. It is important
for the central government to take a more active role in resolving inter-state water disputes.

 Conclusion
 The Centre’s proposal to set up a single, permanent tribunal to adjudicate on inter-state river
water disputes could be a major step towards streamlining the dispute redressal mechanism.
 However, this alone will not be able to address the different kinds of problems—legal,
administrative, constitutional and political—that plague the overall framework.
 Centre’s proposal to set up an agency alongside the tribunal that will collect and process data on
river waters can be a right step in this direction.
 To strengthen the cooperative federalism, parochial mindset making regional issues superior to
national issues should not be allowed.
 So disputes must be resolved by dialogue and talks and the political opportunism must be
avoided.
 A robust and transparent institutional framework with cooperative approach is need of the hour.
 All these measures will streamline the process of resolving such inter-state water disputes in the
country.

Inter-state river water disputes hinder the cooperative

federalism of our nation and provide parochial mindset making
regional issues superior to national issues. One should realise
that our nation is a family in which all states are its members.
 Left Wing And Right Wing Politics
 About
 Right-Wing Politics and Left-Wing Politics are two warring ideologies different in their outlook
and applications.
 Right-Wing politics is centered around beliefs that certain social orders and hierarchies are
inevitable and natural, with this belief being supported by natural law or tradition.
 Left-wing politics supports social equality often in opposition to social hierarchy or any other
form of class division.

 Differences between Right Wing and Left Wing

Left-Wing Right-Wing

Left-wing politics is more liberal in its approach and outlook. Right-wing politics are more conservative.

Left-wing economics policies involve reducing income Its economic policies involve low taxes, less regulation on
equality, increasing tax rates for the wealthy, and government businesses by the government.
spending on social programs and infrastructure.

Left-wing politics believe that society will benefit from an Right-wing ideologies believe that when individual rights
expanded role for the government will be beneficial to the and civil liberties are prioritized and the government is less
society. involved, the best results can be achieved.

Left-wing politics is characterized by an emphasis on equality, Right-wing politics is characterized by ideas of authority,
fraternity, progress and reform. hierarchy, tradition and nationalism.

Left-wing nationalism is based on social equality, popular Right-wing nationalism is influenced by Romantic
sovereignty and national-determination. It associates itself Nationalism where the state derives its legitimacy from the
closely with national liberation movements. culture it governs, including, language, race and custom
“born” within this culture.

Left-wing politics is traditionally against religious institutions Right-wing politics have always found supporters who
and believe that state and religion must be separate from each believe that religion should play an expanded role in
other (Secularism). society.

Populist ideas in the left-wing do not include horizontal Populism is a recurring theme in right-wing political circles.
exclusion and will rely more on egalitarian ideals. Populism is a political approach that appeals to ordinary
people who feel that their rights are ignored.

The term ‘Left-wing’ has a similar origin during the French The term ‘Right-wing’ has its origins during the days of the
revolution where anti-monarchy revolutionaries were seated on French Revolution (1789-1799) where the supporters of the
the left side of the hall. Monarchy were seated on the right hall of the National
Assembly.

The right wing walks the walk; the left wing taxes the people that talk the talk.
Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act
(MGNREGA)
 MGNREGA
 The Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA), also
known as Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Scheme (MNREGS) is
Indian legislation enacted on August 25, 2005 by the Ministry of Rural Development.
 MGNREGA is a rural wage employment program in India.
 It provides for a legal guarantee of at least 100 days of unskilled wage employment in a financial
year to rural households whose adult members are willing to engage in unskilled manual work at
a predetermined minimum wage rate.
 The Ministry of Rural Development (MRD), Govt of India is monitoring the entire
implementation of this scheme in association with state governments.
 MGNREGA is the largest social security scheme in the world

 The Objectives of MGNREGA

 It provides 100 days of guaranteed wage employment to rural unskilled labour.
 The main aim of the MGNREGA scheme is to provide a source of livelihood for the
economically weaker section of the society.
 It helps to grow economic security.
 It takes initiative to decrease the number of migration of labour from rural to urban areas.
 MGNREGA scheme helps proactively the weaker section of society.
 The scheme will strengthen the Panchayati Raj across India.

 Eligibility Criteria
 Must be Citizen of India to seek MGNREGA benefits.
 Job seeker has completed 18 years of age at the time of application.
 The applicant must be part of a local household (i.e. application must be made with local Gram
Panchayat).
 Applicant must volunteer for unskilled labour.

 Key Features of MGNREGA

 Legal Right to Work: Unlike earlier employment guarantee schemes, the act aims at
addressing the causes of chronic poverty through a rights-based framework.
 At least one-third of beneficiaries have to be women.
 Wages must be paid according to the statutory minimum wages specified for agricultural
labourers in the state under the Minimum Wages Act, 1948.
 Demand-Driven Scheme: The most important part of MGNREGA’s design is its legally-
backed guarantee for any rural adult to get work within 15 days of demanding it, failing which
an ‘unemployment allowance’ must be given. This demand-driven scheme enables the self-
selection of workers.
 Decentralised Planning: There is an emphasis on strengthening the process of decentralisation
by giving a significant role in Panchayati Raj Institutions (PRIs) in planning and implementing
these works. The act mandates Gram Sabhas to recommend the works that are to be
undertaken and at least 50% of the works must be executed by them.
 Transparency and Accountability: Wall writings, citizen information boards, management
information systems, and social audits are all options for proactive disclosure. Gram Sabhas carry
out social audits so that the locals may keep track of how the programme is being implemented.
  Wage-material Ratio: The Act stipulates a minimum wage-material ratio of 60:40.
 Wages: Unless the central government notifies of a pay rate, wages shall be paid by the wages
stipulated for agricultural labourers in the state under the Minimum Wages Act of 1948. (This
should not be less than ₹ 60 per day). Currently, the federal government sets pay rates, which
vary by state.
 Funding: The federal government and the states split the cost of funding. Wages (for unskilled,
semiskilled, and skilled labour), material costs, and administrative costs make up the three main
categories of expenditures. 100% of the cost of unskilled labour, 75% of the cost of semi-skilled
and skilled labour, 75% of the cost of supplies, and 6% of the cost of administrative expenses are
covered by the central government.
 Time-bound Guarantee of Work and Unemployment Allowance: Employment must be
provided within 15 days of being demanded failing which an ‘unemployment allowance’ must be
given.
 Worksite facilities: All work sites should have facilities such as crèches, drinking water and first
aid.

 Significance of MGNREGA
 Social
 Empowerment of Vulnerable Sections: Large-scale engagement of women, people from
traditionally marginalised groups like Scheduled Castes and Scheduled Tribes (SCs/STs), and
others. Women generate 47% of the total person-days, while SCs/STs contribute 51% of the
total person-days.
 Poverty Alleviation: The less poor have used it as a means to augment their income by
working during slow agricultural seasons, while the poor have used it as a means of
escaping poverty.
 Distress Migration: MGNREGA has a highly positive impact on poor households with a
drastic reduction in the distress migration. Some studies even point to improved education for
children in MGNREGA households.
 Economical
 Employment Generation: Since this program’s introduction in 2006, it has altered the rural
labour market’s makeup. Rural households are given the chance to make a minimal income
by receiving employment cards under this programme.
 Increasing Wage Rate: Increasing the wage rate in rural areas and thereby increasing the
purchasing power in rural India
 Thrust to the Rural Economy: Strengthening the rural economy through the creation of
infrastructure assets.
 Financial Inclusion: Payments under the scheme today are mostly by way of direct transfer
into beneficiary accounts — which in turn forced people to open 10 crore new bank or post
office accounts. The scheme has indirectly enabled households to get freed from the clutches
of local money lenders too.
 Political
 Decentralisation: Strengthening PRIs by involving them in the planning and monitoring of
the scheme.

 Challenges of MGNREGA
 Economical
 Inadequate Budgetary Allocation: Researchers determined that the scheme should have
received a higher allocation of funds which was less than the actual amount, to satisfy the
registered work requirement.
  Ridiculously Low Wage Rate: MGNREGA wage rates are now lower than the matching
state/UT minimum wages. The MGNREGA wage rate cannot be less than the state’s
minimum agricultural wage rate, according to several rulings. Because workers aren’t
interested in working for MGNREGA programmes due to the absurdly low pay rates,
contractors and intermediaries are now in control locally.
 Inflation: As agricultural labourer’s pay has multiplied, forcing farmers to seek higher prices
for their food grains through Minimum Support Prices, the MGNREGA initiative to reduce
poverty has come at the expense of skyrocketing food prices (MSPs).
 Affected Labour Market: Rural agricultural labourer wages are pushing farmers to
mechanise their operations, which is proving to be more cost-effective.
 Impact on Urban Sectors: MGNREGA also has implications for the increase of urban
wages in sectors like infrastructure and real estate, which depend on migrant workers from
rural areas. This increases the costs of real estate and infrastructure projects.
 The Banking Puzzle: The rural banks are highly de-capacitated in terms of staff and
infrastructure and thus always remain hugely crowded.
 Administrative Challenges
 Fabrication of Job Cards: The availability of fraudulent job cards, the use of fictitious
identities, missing data, and delays in entering information into employment cards are only a
few of the problems.
 Demand-supply Mismatch in Work Allocation: Researchers have discovered a growing
disparity between the supply and demand for labour.
 Delay in Payment of Wages: The majority of states have not fulfilled the MGNREGA
requirement to pay wages within 15 days. Additionally, workers are not reimbursed for late
wage payments. Wage payments are frequently delayed for weeks or even months without
providing any sort of compensation.
 Non-payment of Unemployment Allowances: When the job is not readily available, the
majority of states do not provide unemployment benefits. The failure to provide dated
receipts for the requested work hinders employees from requesting unemployment benefits.
 Workers Penalised for Administrative Lapses: The ministry withholds wages from
employees of states that fail to comply with administrative obligations within the allotted
time frame.
 Political
 Asymmetry: The ability of the states to predict labour demand and then submit a plan
articulating the same is what determines the flow of resources to certain states. The
programme may be regressive because of the reduced resource flow in the poorer states due
to their inability to plan. Thus, there is a chance that programmes like MGNREGA, which
depend on the ability of the states to implement them, will lead to a budgetary imbalance.
 Corruption: Muster rolls are inflated and middlemen pocket the difference. As a result, a
large amount of money is siphoned-off by them.
 Social
 Behavioural Implications: People who are employed under MGNREGA are developing the
habit of getting paid for doing nothing, which could have major repercussions for India’s
human prowess and outlook. This is because most of the labour done under MGNREGA is
not well planned and is frequently perfunctory.
 Impact on Skilled Occupations: Many specialised professions, such as handloom weavers
and rural craftsmen, are losing their workforce to MGNREGA, which causes a loss of
expertise in that particular field. Thus, even though employment guarantee programmes like
MGNREGA offer higher incomes and have little to no effect on skill development, they are
losing the distinctive abilities that have been accumulated through generations.
 Way forward
 Wage: Each state’s minimum wage should be adhered to, and the CPI-Rural index should be used
to index pay rather than the previous Consumer Price Index for Agricultural Laborers (CPI-AL).
Similarly, wages must be updated yearly.
 Training of Functionaries: Training and capacity building of elected representatives and other
functionaries of PRIs must be done regularly as it will facilitate their involvement in the
implementation of MGNREGA.
 Context-specific Projects: States have different needs for development because they are at
different stages of socioeconomic development. Therefore, it should be permitted for state
governments to carry out projects that are appropriate for their location. Under MGNREGA, a
greater emphasis should be placed on skilled and semi-skilled jobs.
 Social Audits: Social audits must mandatorily be held every six months. The performance of
MGNREGA is better in states with effective social audit mechanisms.
 Regular Monitoring: The Ministry of Rural Development sends out National Level Monitors
(NLMs) to conduct routine and targeted MGNREGA monitoring and to investigate accusations of
improper use of money, among other things. By their recommendations, states should implement
appropriate procedures and enhance the frequency of NLM monitoring.
 Regulation of Job Cards: It should be made illegal to possess job cards with elected PRI
representatives and MGNREGA officials, as well as to not register employment-related
information in job cards.
 Convergence: A greater emphasis on convergence with other schemes such as the PMKSY,
National Rural Livelihoods Mission, National Rural Health Mission, etc.

 Conclusion
 There is a need for better coordination between various government departments and the
mechanism to allot and measure the work.
 Some discrepancies in the payouts need to be addressed, too. Women in the sector, on an
average, earn 22.24% less than their male counterparts.
 State governments must ensure that public work gets started in every village. Workers
turning up at the worksite should be provided work immediately, without much delay.
 Local bodies must proactively reach out to returned and quarantined migrant workers and
help those in need to get job cards.
 Gram panchayats need to be provided with adequate resources, powers, and responsibilities
to sanction works, provide work on demand, and authorise wage payments to ensure there are
no delays in payments.
 MGNREGA should be converged with other schemes of the government. For example,
Green India initiative, Swachh Bharat Abhiyan etc.
 Also, the MGNREGA payment procedures should be simplified to ensure transparency and
accountability.
 Better coordination must be ensured among various government departments involved.
 Better mechanism must be provided to allot and measure work.
 Also, the MGNREGA payment procedures should be simplified to ensure transparency and
accountability.

MGNREGA is playing a critical role in providing economic security for the

rural population. Therefore, the government must take steps to ensure that
it is made use of to its fullest extent to address the current economic
problems and bringing the economy back on track.
 Narco-Terrorism in India
 Narco-Terrorism
 The involvement of terror organizations and insurgencies in drug trafficking is called "Narco-
Terrorism".
 Narco-terrorism is the intersection of the illegal drug trade and terrorism.
 Drug trafficking organizations engage in acts of terrorism to further their illicit activities or
intimidate governments and people.
 Narco-terrorism refers to the nexus between terrorist organizations and drug trafficking
activities. They pose a significant threat to India’s internal security.
 Narco-terrorism was first used in 1983 by the former President of Peru, Belaunde Terry to
describe campaigns by drug traffickers using terrorist methods such as the use of car bombs,
assassinations and kidnapping against the anti-narcotics police in Coloumbia and Peru.
 Though initially used in the context of drug trafficking related terrorism in South America, the
term has come to be associated with terrorist groups and activities around the world and more so
in the Central and South-East Asia.
 As the term itself suggests, narco-terrorism combines two criminal activities, drug trafficking and
terrorist violence. Narcoterrorism is motivated mainly by economic reasons as it helps the
terrorist organizations raise huge sums of money with minimum cost for their activities.
 Thus, the political, ideological, religious and the ethno-nationalist motives generally associated
with terrorism are secondary to the economic gains associated with it.
 Examples include:
 Financing terrorist groups through drug proceeds,
 Using violence and intimidation to control drug trafficking routes and areas,
 And carrying out acts of terrorism to destabilize governments and societies.
 Jammu and Kashmir and Punjab has seen a steep rise in drug trafficking in recent years.
 Illegal drugs, including heroin and marijuana, are grown and produced in neighboring countries
and smuggled into India.
 Drug money is used to fund separatist and militant groups, contributing to ongoing terror and
violent activities.

 Origin and Spread of Narco-terrorism

 The origin of narco-terrorism is unclear, but it became widespread in the 1980s and 1990s.
 Drug trafficking organizations in countries like Colombia and Peru carried out increasingly
violent and sophisticated criminal and terrorist activities.
 They finance themselves through the drug trade and use it to further terrorism, such as bombings,
kidnappings, and assassinations.

 Narco-terrorism in India
 State-sponsored Terrorism
 Narco-terrorism is a key component of Pakistan’s state-sponsored cross-border terrorism,
which is used to fund and conduct asymmetric warfare against its neighbors.
 Porous Borders
 India has a 15,106-kilometre porous border and a 7,516-kilometre coastline. China,
Pakistan, Bhutan, Myanmar, Afghanistan, Nepal, and Bangladesh are all on the same side
of those lengthy boundaries.
 Inefficient Policymaking
 Terrorist and militant actions are a problem in India, which are supported by the
neighboring countries.
 It’s no surprise that few Indians see the importation of ganja, opium, hashish, and other
drugs as a concern because secessionism, terrorism, and insurgency have occupied the
thoughts of policymakers and the general people.
 India’s Position between Triangle and Crescent
 India is inconveniently placed between the Golden Crescent and the Golden Triangle,
two of the world’s most active hotbeds of illegal drug trafficking.
 The Golden Triangle is defined as the area where Thailand, Laos, and Myanmar intersect.
 Until the early twenty-first century, when Afghanistan overtook the Golden Triangle as
the world’s leading producer, the Golden Triangle produced the majority of the world’s
heroin.
 Golden Triangle (SE Asia)
 The Golden Triangle is the area where the borders of Thailand, Laos, and Myanmar
meet at the confluence of the Ruak and Mekong rivers. The name “Golden Triangle”
was coined by the CIA.
 Along with Afghanistan in the Golden Crescent, it has been one of the largest opium-
producing areas of the world, since the 1950s. Most of the world’s heroin came from
the Golden Triangle until the early 21st century when Afghanistan became the
world’s largest producer.
 Golden Crescent
 The Golden Crescent is the name given to one of Asia’s two principal areas of illicit
opium production (with the other being the Golden Triangle), located at the
crossroads of Central, South, and Western Asia. This space overlaps three nations,
Afghanistan, Iran, and Pakistan, whose mountainous peripheries define the crescent.
  Terror Funding
 The lion’s share of the source of terror funding in Kashmir emanates from across the
border in Pakistan through its notorious agency ISI. The
 ISI generates its finances through narco-financing which comes from the control of
narcotics trade in the Afghanistan-Pakistan region.
 Pakistan as a Major Culprit
 Pakistan has the highest per capita heroin addiction rate in the world.
 The ISI pumps drugs in Jammu and Kashmir with twofold intentions.
 Drug-peddling funds terrorist activities; on the other, there is a strong correlation between
receptive attitudes towards Jihadism and drug use.
 Northeast Region
 Drugs, sourced from Myanmar and Bangladesh, has a direct bearing on the funding of
terror and extremist activities in the northeast.
 A series of intermittent seizures in India of ‘yaba’ tablets that were meant for Bangladesh
indicates the existence of multiple exit points along the border in Tripura, Assam, and
Meghalaya. The proceeds of this drug-trade find its way to insurgent-outfits.

 How is it flourishing in India?

 Terrain difficulties
 The riverine stretches along Punjab and J&K’s border are difficult to police effectively.
 Historic connections and provocations
 There are ethnic and economic ties across the border, contributing to smuggling activities.
 Vast nexus
 Seizures represent only a small fraction of the actual drugs flowing across the border.

 Laws and Regulations against Narcotic Trafficking

 Narcotics Drugs and Psychotropic Substance Act 1985
 This provides to carry out controlled delivery mechanisms measures as it deems necessary or
expenditure for the purpose of preventing and combating abuse of narcotic substances.
 Provides minimum punishment of 10 years.
 Narcotics Control Bureau (NCB)
 Nodal agency for enforcement of laws concerning narcotic drugs and psychotropic
substances.
 Bilateral Agreements
 India signed bilateral agreements with USA, UK, Myanmar, Afghanistan, UAE, Mauritius,
Zambia, and the Russia for ‘drug control’.
 India is a signatory of UN and SAARC convention on narcotic drugs and psychotropic
Substances.

 Exploitation of Narco-terrorism by Pakistan

 Targeting Drug-Addicted Youth
 The cognitive impairment caused by drug abuse makes these individuals vulnerable to
manipulation and radicalization.
 Pushing Drugs To Influence Cognitive Behaviour
 Pakistan has accelerated its efforts to push narcotics, especially heroin. The objective is to
create instability in the region, brainwash the youth, and weaken their cognitive behavior.
  Funding Terror Activities
 Narco-trade serves as a source of funding for terrorist activities in Jammu and Kashmir. The
proceeds from drug trafficking are used to finance militant groups operating in the region.
 Manipulation through Drug Addiction
 Terror outfits manipulate drug-addicted individuals to serve their agenda. This manipulation
creates a cycle of drug addiction and radicalization, further fueling the problem of narco-
terrorism.

 Challenges
 Drug menace
 It has gripped several border states irrespective of gender, caste and religion.
 Law and Order problem
 Increase in law and order problem due to drug consumption and affect effects.
 Crime
 Increase in crime rate to make quick money for drugs purchase.
 Proxy war
 Use of drugs as silent weapon by Pakistan to wag proxy war against India.
 Trafficking
 Increase in Trafficking of women and Children from border states.
 Fake currency
 Inflow of fake Indian currencies notes.
 Radicalisation
 The drug’s and money is used to brainwash youths and radicalise them posing threat to
Internal security.
 Terrorism
 Money earned is used to fund militancy in Kashmir and other border states.

 Factors Contributing To Such Rise

 Proximity to drug-producing regions
 India’s proximity to the “Golden Crescent” (including parts of Afghanistan, Iran, and
Pakistan), provides easy access to narcotics.
 Cross-border connections
 India shares borders with countries like Pakistan, which is known for its involvement in drug
trafficking.
 Financing mechanism
 Socioeconomic factors such as poverty, unemployment, and lack of opportunities can
contribute to the involvement of individuals in the drug trade.
 Corruption and weak law enforcement
 Corruption within law enforcement agencies can facilitate the operations of drug trafficking
networks ex. in Punjab.
 High profits and demand
 The lucrative nature of the illegal drug trade makes it an attractive source of revenue for
terrorist organizations.
 Transnational nature of the trade
 Transnational drug syndicates collaborate with terrorist organizations, facilitating the flow of
drugs and funding for terrorist activities.
 Security Implications
 Criminalization of Youth
 Drug trafficking and abuse can lead to an increase in crime, violence, and corruption within
communities.
 Public Health Concerns
 Drug addiction and related health issues, such as the spread of infectious diseases through
shared needles, pose significant challenges to public health systems.
 Threat to National Security
 The linkages between drug trafficking networks and terrorist organizations create a complex
security environment with civilian-military conflict.
 Drain on Resources
 Security forces, intelligence agencies, and law enforcement entities need to dedicate
substantial human resources, equipment, and funding to effectively counter narco-terrorism.

 Impact And Implications Of Narco-terrorism In India

 Terror Financing
 Narco-terrorism serves as a source of funding for terrorist organizations.
 The profit generated from drug trafficking activities provides financial resources to support
their illicit activities, including recruitment, training, procurement of weapons, and planning
of terrorist attacks.
 This poses serious security concerns in India.
 Social Unrest
 Drug addiction, organized crime, and violence associated with drug trafficking can
undermine law and order, weaken institutions, and erode the social fabric.
 This can lead to an increase in crime rates, social unrest, and a sense of insecurity among the
population.
 Drug addiction and strains of public health will make it difficult to hold the law-and-order
situations in the country.
 Cross-Border Implications
 India shares porous borders with neighboring countries like Nepal and Bhutan, making it
vulnerable to cross-border drug trafficking and infiltration of terrorists.
 This poses challenges to India’s efforts to counter terrorism and maintain border security.
 Undermining Economic Growth
 Drug trade can undermine legitimate economic activities, discourage investments, and divert
resources away from productive sectors.
 It also leads to a loss of human capital as individuals get involved in drug trafficking or fall
victim to addiction.

 Efforts to Combat Narco-terrorism

 Rehabilitation Programs and Counselling Centers
 The government has allocated funds for drug rehabilitation measures and established
counselling centers across all districts.
 Rehabilitation facilities have been set up under the National Action Plan for Drug Demand
Reduction.
 Operation Sadbhavana
 The Indian Army has implemented Operation Sadbhavana, which includes de-addiction
counseling centers and awareness camps.
  De-addiction counselling centers help drug-addicted youth, while awareness camps aim to
educate the public about the dangers of drug abuse.
 They conduct drug awareness camps periodically to caution people against the use of drugs.
 Nasha Mukt J&K Campaign
 The campaign, launched by LG, aims to make Jammu and Kashmir drug-free
 The “Zero Tolerance Policy” of the state police and anti-narcotics task force has been praised
for its effectiveness.
 Continued vigilance by security forces and agencies is crucial to eliminate the nexus between
criminals and Pakistan-sponsored terror modules.

 Steps taken by the Army to tackle Narco-terrorism in J&K and North East
 Anti-drug operations
 The Army has carried out regular anti-drug operations in the region, aimed at destroying
illegal drug crops and disrupting drug trafficking networks.
 Interdiction
 The Army has increased its efforts to intercept drug shipments and arrest those involved in
the drug trade, both within Jammu and Kashmir and along the border with Pakistan.
 Intelligence gathering
 The Army has been working closely with other security agencies, including the Central
Bureau of Investigation and the Narcotics Control Bureau, to gather intelligence on drug
trafficking networks and to build cases against those involved.
 Border security
 The Indian Army has been working to enhance border security in the region, including
through the deployment of additional troops and the use of technology, such as unmanned
aerial vehicles, to reduce the flow of drugs into the region

 Recommendations to Curb Narco-Terrorism

 Strengthening Law Enforcement
 ED’s jurisdiction should be improved and extended to monitor terrorist financing and money
laundering.
 By investigating the hawala network operated by Pakistan ED can cut off the funding sources
of narco-terrorism.
 Strengthening law enforcement agencies including border control monitoring, and inter-
agency coordination is crucial for countering narco-terrorism.
 International cooperation
 As narco-terrorism is not a problem of a single country, nor does it operate within a country.
 So, cooperation and collaboration with neighboring countries and international partners are
essential in addressing narco-terrorism.
 Socioeconomic Development, Public Awareness, And Rehabilitation
 Promoting socio-economic development, improving education and healthcare facilities, and
implementing effective drug prevention are vital to minimize narco-terrorism.
 It would reduce the demand for illegal drugs in society.
 Anti-Drone Technology
 Pakistan utilizes drones to transport narcotics.
 There is a need to enhance anti-drone technology along the Line of Control (LOC) and the
international border.
 Way forward
 Multilateral Cooperation
 Enhance international cooperation and information sharing to disrupt drug trafficking
networks and dismantle the nexus between drug trade and terrorism.
 Advanced Technology Integration
 Invest in advanced technologies to enhance detection and interception of drug shipments,
monitor financial transactions, and secure border areas.
 Community Engagement and Rehabilitation
 Focus on community awareness, education, and rehabilitation programs to prevent drug abuse
and support individuals struggling with addiction.
 Target Financing Networks
 Strengthen efforts to track and disrupt the financing networks supporting narco-terrorism
through collaboration with financial institutions and international organizations.
 Cross-Border Intelligence Sharing
 Strengthen intelligence-sharing mechanisms and conduct joint operations with countries
sharing borders affected by drug trafficking.
 De-radicalization
 Implement sustainable economic development programs to provide viable alternatives to
communities involved in the drug trade.
 Strengthening of Criminal Laws
 India has to restructure its criminal justice system, with forensic science playing a key role in
combating narco-terrorism.
 The government needs to implement the existing laws strictly to prevent drug trafficking and
its resultant drug abuse.
 Friendly International Relations
 India should take the initiative and reach out to Afghans from all walks of life, including
women, political leaders, and business organizations, who are seeking aid in establishing a
credible, representative, and inclusive government in their nation.
 Rehabilitation
 India should work for robust rehabilitation efforts by having good infrastructure.
 Strengthening Narcotics Control Bureau
 NCB should be given more powers and authority to keep strict vigil in Narcotics business.
 Awareness
 Drug sensitization programs and awareness trainings should be granted for curbing the illicit
drug trade.
 Border Security
 Security along the border region with neighbouring countries has to be strengthened.

 Conclusion
 Narco-terrorism is a major threat to the internal security of India as facilitates terror financing,
increases drug addiction in society, social unrest, and undermine economic growth.
 Strengthening of law enforcement, intelligence sharing, international cooperation, socio-
economic development, and community awareness, would reduce the impact of challenges of
narco-terrorism in internal security in India.
.
The government and law enforcement agencies need to take robust measures to
combat narco-terrorism in India to prevent its adverse impacts on security, public
health, and stability of the society.
 North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO)
 NATO
 North Atlantic Treaty Organization (NATO) is a military alliance established by the North
Atlantic Treaty (also called the Washington Treaty) of April, 1949, by the United States, Canada,
and several Western European nations to provide collective security against the Soviet Union.
 There are currently 30 member states.
 NATO is a security alliance whose fundamental goal is to safeguard the Allies freedom and
security by political and military means.
 NATO remains the principal security instrument of the transatlantic community and expression of
its common democratic values.
 It is the practical means through which the security of North America and Europe are
permanently tied together.
 NATO enlargement has furthered the U.S. goal of a Europe whole, free, and at peace.
 Article 4 of the treaty ensures consultations among Allies on security matters of common
interest, which have expanded from a narrowly defined Soviet threat to the critical mission in
Afghanistan, as well as peacekeeping in Kosovo and new threats to security such as cyber attacks,
and global threats such as terrorism and piracy that affect the Alliance and its global network of
partners.
 Article 5 of the treaty states that if an armed attack occurs against one of the member states, it
should be considered an attack against all members, and other members shall assist the attacked
member, with armed forces if necessary.

 Origin of NATO
 After World War II in 1945, Western Europe was economically exhausted and militarily
weak (the western Allies had rapidly and drastically reduced their armies at the end of the war).
 In 1948 the United States launched the Marshall Plan, which infused massive amounts of
economic aid to the countries of western and southern Europe on the condition that they
cooperate with each other and engage in joint planning to hasten their mutual recovery.
 As for military recovery, under the Brussels Treaty of 1948, the United Kingdom, France, and the
Low Countries—Belgium, the Netherlands, and Luxembourg—concluded a collective-defence
agreement called the Western European Union.
 It was soon recognized, however, that a more formidable alliance would be required to provide an
adequate military counterweight to the Soviets.
 In March 1948, following a virtual communist coup d’état in Czechoslovakia in February, the
three governments began discussions on a multilateral collective-defence scheme that would
enhance Western security and promote democratic values.
 These discussions were eventually joined by France, the Low Countries, and Norway and in April
1949 resulted in the North Atlantic Treaty.
 At the end of World War 2, the deteriorating relations between the United States and the USSR
eventually led to the Cold War.
 The USSR sought to expand its influence in Europe through the spread of communism, while the
US saw the ideology of the USSR as a threat to its way of life.
 In 1955, when the Cold War was gaining momentum, the Soviet Union signed up socialist
republics of Central and Eastern Europe to the Warsaw Pact (1955). The Pact, essentially
a political-military alliance, was viewed as a direct strategic counterweight to NATO.
 It included Albania, Bulgaria, Czechoslovakia, East Germany, Hungary, Poland, and Romania.
The Pact was officially disbanded in early 1991 after the dissolution of the Soviet Union itself.
 Member States
 The NATO Alliance consists of 30 member states from North America and Europe.
 Its original members were Belgium, Canada, Denmark, France, Iceland, Italy, Luxembourg, the
Netherlands, Norway, Portugal, the United Kingdom, and the United States.
 Joining the original signatories were Greece and Turkey (1952), West Germany (1955, from 1990
as Germany), Spain (1982), the Czech Republic, Hungary, and Poland (1999), Bulgaria,
Estonia, Latvia, Lithuania, Romania, Slovakia, and Slovenia (2004), Albania and
Croatia (2009), Montenegro (2017), North Macedonia (2020) and Finland (2023).

 Structure
 NATO is comprised of two main parts, the political and military components.
 NATO Headquarters is where representatives from all the member states come together to
make decisions on a consensus basis.
 It also offers a venue for dialogue and cooperation between partner countries and NATO member
countries, enabling them to work together in their efforts to bring about peace and stability.
 Headquarters: Brussels, Belgium.
 Headquarters of Allied Command Operations: Mons, Belgium.

 Objectives of NATO
 NATO’s essential and enduring purpose is to safeguard the freedom and security of all its
members by political and military means.
 Political objectives: NATO promotes democratic values and enables members to consult and
cooperate on defence and security-related issues to solve problems, build trust and, in the
long run, prevent conflict.
 Military Objectives: NATO is committed to the peaceful resolution of disputes. If
diplomatic efforts fail, it has the military power to undertake crisis-management operations.
 These are carried out under the collective defence clause of NATO's founding treaty - Article
5 of the Washington Treaty or under a United Nations mandate, alone or in cooperation with
other countries and international organisations.
 NATO has only once invoked Article 5, on September 12, 2001 following the 9/11 attacks on
the World Trade Center in the US.

 Purpose of NATO
 NATO is an alliance of 31 countries that guarantees freedom and security to its members through
military and political means.
 The main purpose of NATO includes:
 NATO aims to provide a long-lasting peaceful environment in European countries based on
the individual values of liberal democracy, human rights, and the rule of law.
 NATO personifies the trans-Atlantic link that helps to secure Europe from North America.
 NATO provides a common platform for many countries that they can use to have discussions
over political and military issues and take decisions on the problems that may affect their
security.
 NATO responds to nonmember threads by utilizing collective defence and proper crisis
management by encouraging cooperative security, as outlined in the 2010 strategic concept.

 Importance of NATO
 NATO promotes democratic values and encourages consultation and cooperation on defence and
security issues to build trust and, in the long run, prevent conflict.
 NATO is committed to the peaceful resolution of disputes.
  If diplomatic efforts fail, it has the military capacity needed to undertake crisis-management
operations.
 In the history of NATO, Article 5 has been invoked just once, and that was in response to the
9/11 terrorist attacks in the United States.

 Functioning of NATO
 NATO has an integrated military command structure but very few forces or assets are exclusively
its own.
 Most forces remain under full national command and control until member countries agree to
undertake NATO-related tasks.
 All 31 allies have an equal say, the Alliance’s decisions must be unanimous and consensual, and
its members must respect the basic values that underpin the Alliance, namely democracy,
individual liberty and the rule of law.
 NATO's protection does not extend to members' civil wars or internal coups.
 NATO is funded by its members. The U.S. contributes roughly three-fourths of NATO's budget.

 Present Issues in the NATO Alliance

 It is divided on how to share the military burden and balance between NATO and the EU’s
willingness for an independent military role.
 There is no convergence in decision-making in matters related to Russia, the Middle East, and
China.
 Conflicts among NATO members have increased. For example, Greece and Turkey.
 NATO’s recent adventures in Afghanistan, Iraq and Libya have not been successful.

 Should India join NATO?

 Arguments in Favour of Joining
 End of Cold War Era
 During the Cold War, India’s refusal was premised on its non-alignment.
 This argument has little justification once the Cold War ended during 1989-91.
 NATO has regular consultations with both Russia and China, despite the gathering
tensions with them in recent years.
 This presents a case for India to join the alliance.
 To Combat Terrorism
 India has seen many terrorist attacks – 26/11 Mumbai terror attack, Pulwama, Uri
attack etc.
 Hence, security analysts suggest that India should join NATO to combat terrorism on
a long-term basis.
 Members of NATO are well-established partners of India
 Indian membership would simply mean having regular contact with a military
alliance, most of whose members are well-established partners of India.
 India has military exchanges with many members of NATO — including the US,
Britain, and France — in bilateral and minilateral formats.
 Hence, collective engagement with NATO should not be problematic.
 To Contain China
 NATO is increasing its footprints in Indian Ocean Region where China is aggressive.
 NATO membership would help India in containing China.
 Assessing the Potential Benefits
  Proponents argue that joining NATO could provide India with a security umbrella,
access to advanced military technologies, intelligence-sharing platforms, and
interoperability with other member states.
 These factors have the potential to strengthen India's defenCe capabilities and
modernization efforts.

 Arguments Against Joining the Alliance

 It would hurl India headlong into the Global War on Terror
 Joining NATO on full-term basis could become problematic for India as it would drag
India into various conflicts around the globe.
 Collective self-defence article would force India to contribute its troops to support
NATO.
 Sovereignty and Principle of Non-Alignment
 Joining the alliance would lead to the establishment of NATO bases on India’s territory
which may be considered an infringement of our sovereignty.
 So far, India has not joined any military bloc and remained true to the principle of non-
alignment which forms the core of India’s foreign policy.
 India's Unique Regional Challenges
 India faces a distinctive set of regional dynamics, including border disputes, terrorism,
and conflicts. These challenges require a tailored approach, and joining NATO could
divert resources and attention away from these pressing issues.
 While NATO possesses relevant competencies, its broader geopolitical agenda spanning
from Eurasia to the Indo-Pacific may not align with India's immediate priorities.
 Implications for India's Relationships
 India's relationship with Russia, a significant partner in dealing with regional security
challenges and moderating China's stance, could be jeopardized by joining NATO.
 While India has its own bilateral issues with China and a strategy for the Indo-Pacific,
aligning with a U.S.-led alliance system may limit India's freedom of action and hinder
its pursuit of an independent policy towards China.
 Additionally, it could provide China with justification for increasing military build-up
along the India-China border and frequent intrusions.
 Balancing these relationships while managing potential geopolitical consequences would
pose a significant challenge for India and lead to further military build-up along the
India-China border.

 Conclusion
 While the lure of increased security cooperation and access to advanced military technologies
may be appealing, India must carefully weigh the potential implications of joining the NATO.
 Maintaining its policy of strategic autonomy, addressing unique regional challenges, and
preserving key partnerships should guide India's decision-making process.
 India needs to open a strategic dialogue with NATO and work towards areas of common security
concern. However, it must refrain from becoming a formal member of NATO.

The motto of NATO is, "One for all and all for one". This basically
means, If you attack one member, you’ll face the combined wrath of
them all. This, in an ideal world, would mean greater military
backing for India in case it joins NATO.
 Online Education in India
 Online Education
 Online Education is a method of learning which involves technology. With the help of online
education, students can gain knowledge and information from any corner of the world. Online
Education in India is the future of learning.
 Since the lockdown, all states swiftly and diligently responded to the COVID-19 situation and
used existing online resources to provide student education continuously.
 The non-technical teachers geared up and learned what seemed impossible to them at first and
contributed towards providing a world-class education to the young generation of the country.

 Significance of Online Education

 Online literacy is a learning method using technology and is a broad technical discipline aimed at
helping all students gain knowledge in every corner of the country.
 Online Education in India is believed to be the future of learning. The Government of India has
defined different channels and taken several initiatives to disseminate educational and pedagogic
means and sources in various parts of the country.
 Recognising the rapid development of online education, the government has introduced a new
National Education Policy (NEP) that emphasises digitisation as well as the use of technology in
education.
 Another focus is on Edtech for further training, especially in rural areas. This initiative was
primarily taken to provide quality education, especially within tier 2 and tier 3 towns and villages.
What looked like a distant dream was successfully carried out and is wonderfully implemented
across the nation.

 Online Education in India Goals

 To develop high-quality electronic content in all local languages to cater to the diversity of
various languages in India.
 Develop virtual training and laboratories along with high-end skill development courses.
 Create guidelines for online/online education to tackle the online divide.
 Development of online classrooms.
 Integrating the Indian education system using technology.
 Development of a framework for online evaluation in the age of online education and ensuring a
consistent student plus teacher experience through multi-mode access to education via web
portals, webinars, mobile apps, TV, radio, and podcasts.
 The focus will be on increasing mobile phone usage to enable “anytime, anywhere” access and
enhance penetration.
 Teachers will be encouraged to use e-learning resources.

 Initiatives on Online Education

 DIKSHA (Online Infrastructure for Knowledge Sharing): e-Learning: It is the ‘one nation;
one online platform’ for school education in India launched in 2017, available for schools in all
states from class 1 to 12. And can be accessed through mobile applications and web portals.
 VidyaDaan: For content contribution at the national level. And allows donation or contribution
of e-learning resources for school education by experts, private bodies, and educational bodies.
 E-textbooks: E-Pathshala app and web portal can be used to access e-textbooks. Audio and video
content of NCERT available in different languages – English, Sanskrit, Urdu, and Hindi.
  Radio: Shiksha Vani is a radio show of the CBSE used by learners of grades 12 to 9, containing
more than 430 pieces of audio content for all subjects.
 PRAGYATA: The MHRD released guidelines on online education titled PRAGYATA. Under
the PRAGYATA guidelines, only 30 minutes of screen time per day for interacting with parents
is recommended for kindergarten, nursery and preschool. Live classes by school for students
range from 1.5 to 3 hours.

 Other Government Initiatives for Smooth Conduct of Online Education

 E-PG Pathshala: to provide e-content for studies.
 SWAYAM: providing an integrated platform for online courses.
 NEAT: uses Artificial Intelligence to make learning more personalized and customized as per the
requirements of the learner
 MANODARPAN: covers a wide range of activities to provide psychosocial support to students,
teachers and families for mental health and emotional wellbeing.
 DAISY: Special e-content for visually and hearing impaired developed on Digitally Accessible
Information System (DAISY) and in sign language on NIOS website/ YouTube.
 Swayam Prabha TV: channel per class from 1 to 12 (one class, one channel).

 Challenges with Online Education

 For online education, the Internet is required. However, there are many places that lack internet
connectivity, and it has become a major challenge for Online Education in India.
 People from socio-economic backgrounds can’t afford devices and technology.
 Training the teachers is another challenge. Only those who are technically sound can conduct
online classes.
 Government colleges and schools are not provided with proper facilities for online classrooms.

 Issues of Online Education

 Access: During Covid-19, a study was conducted by the Azim Premji Foundation that showed
that almost 60 percent of school children in India cannot access online learning opportunities.
Moreover, a report by Oxfam India found that even among students of urban private schools, half
of the parents reported issues with Internet signal and speed.
 Content: The present curriculum of India was not designed to be integrated with technology. Due
to this reason, a teacher finds difficult to make the curriculum digital-friendly.
 Issue of Privacy: A young student may not know to protect his/her personal data. Given the issue
of digital illiteracy in India, online education might actually lead to more harm than good.
 Lack of Soft Skills: Offline education is not only for giving enriching content, but also for
ensuring that soft skills like interpersonal skills, empathy, respect, etiquette, sharing, caring can
also be taught to the students. These skills are difficult to teach in an online medium.
 Social Inequity: e-Learning is a privilege for the students from middle and upper class but it
has proved to be a nuisance for students from the lower middle class and people living below
the poverty line (BPL).
 Technological Constraints: Poor students, who do not have access to e-resources (computers,
laptops, internet connectivity), will not be able to attend classes from home. Teachers too might
have technical constraints and if teachers are equipped but the same might not be the case for
the institutions.
 Lack of Practical Learning: Most of the subjects like beauty culture, fashion design and
tailoring, office management, travel and tourism, web design etc need practical learning so it is
difficult to teach them from a distance.
  Traditional classroom organisations: like schools and colleges, as social space whereby a
student not just learns the academic knowledge but many social skills also, are indispensable.

 Advantages of Online Education

 When India fought the COVID19 Pandemic, Indian online education was the only learning source
for all students.
 Online Education in India became the only source of imbibing pedagogical information, technical
know-how, and practical experience in various subjects for students.
 There is no restriction on learning and study location in online education practices.
 Students can always take online classes with online learning material easily available, making
learning and teaching between students and teachers easily accessible.
 Online Education in India acts as a supplement, and making digitisation cost-effective which
became a major government motivation.

 Benefits of Online Education

 Accessibility: The most important benefit of online education is that is can be accessed by
anyone who owns an internet-supported smartphone.
 Productivity: Online education enhances productivity as it uses adaptive technologies and cut
down the travel time of the students. The increased time would ensure that the students are giving
due duration to their studies.
 Efficiency: It is more efficient than offline schooling in terms of effectiveness, affordability,
accessibility, time consumption, and education quality.
 Reduces Rural-Urban Divide: Online education can resolve challenges related to educational
equity. Online education has the ability to reduce the rural-urban divide in terms of quality
education.
 Reduces Migration: Many students move to urban areas for quality education. Online education
has restricted migration as it has made education accessible to the rural hinterlands.

 Way Forward
 Developing e-content in local languages that would address the diversity of Indian languages.
 Addition of virtual labs and skill development courses.
 Priority must be given to getting access to online education anytime, anywhere.
 To get the best e-learning resources, teachers have to upskill themselves.
 Structuring Online education guidelines to address the online divide.
 Multi-mode access to education through TV channels, radio, web portals, and podcasts.
 The government should start making access to technology universal in the public education
system. Private players can make e-resources accessible and available to students under
the Corporate Social Responsibility (CSR).
 The definition of the right to education needs to expand and promote online education so that it
addresses the importance of connectivity and access to knowledge and information.
 Traditional classroom organisations should give way to online education.
 Further, there is a need for deep reflection on curriculum and to ensure scientific literacy within
it as the society still struggles against superstitions and hardly fights misinformation actively.

Online Education in India has an overall positive impact on students as they

can access their study materials whenever they want. Students can attend
online classes at their convenience and learn from highly skilled educators.
 Smart Work vs Hard Work
 Difference Between Hard Work And Smart Work
 ‘Dreams don’t work unless you do’. We have often heard that ‘work smart and not hard’, but
what really is smart work? Does only smart work bring you success, and if so, then why are so
many of us still busy putting our blood and sweat into working hard to reach our goals? Whether
we should opt for smart work or hard work, which will bring us more efficient results.
 Some basic examples: Ages ago, the cage man pushed his cart or huge pieces of stone to carry it
from one place to another.
 But the modern man-made wheel barrow easily carries its load and travels long distances with
less effort and more efficiency.
 This is a classic example of smart work. When we work on a given task depending on its worth
and put our effort and apply our brain in order to produce maximum results by using minimum
labour, then it is known as Smart Work.
 Whereas Hard work is all about consistently working towards a particular goal, irrespective of its
worth, without being worried about the result or using any means to reduce your effort.
 While both methodologies have their pros and cons, it is normally seen that an amalgamation of
both gives perfect and efficient results.

 Hard Work
 Commitment
 Hard work requires a lot of commitment and sincerity from the person and is not easy to
follow.
 A hard worker needs to consistently work towards what he perceives to be worth it, no matter
how challenging the situation is.
 Success for the Hard Worker comes after putting in long hours at work, which deprives him
or her of comforts in life.
 Traditional format
 Hard work sticks to the traditional form of doing work.
 And there are not many changes that are incorporated into the pattern of working.
 Tedious
 Being a traditional form of working pattern, hard work requires a lot of effort and
consistency, and thus it becomes tedious and tiresome.
 Overnight success is not ensured by hard work.
 Monotonous
 Hard work aims at quantity and may become monotonous and boring for some.
 But if done with heart and soul, it can give you the best results.

 Smart Work
 Requires in-depth knowledge
 One of the prerequisites of smart work is having in-depth knowledge of the work in hand, as
that will make your work easy.
 And you can look for efficient ways to do the work in a more planned and organized way
 . Faster realization of goals
 Not relying on traditional ways and using improvised ways of working smart is a faster
method that helps you reach your goals earlier.
  Saves a lot of time
 Being a smart worker saves a lot of time as you can find ways and means to reduce your work
by using logical and innovative ways to achieve your goals.
 This not only saves you time but also gives you enough time to learn a new task while
completing the present one.
 Builds your strengths
 When one acquires in-depth knowledge about any work and finds ways to improve the
working pattern in order to achieve the goal efficiently and in less time, it really builds up
your strengths and helps you become a master of the work at hand.
 The need of the hour
 In today’s era of technology and fast-moving times, smart work is the need of the hour.
 It provides an easier way to do a certain task and provides similar results in a shorter time
frame.
 Result of hard work
 While we see that smart work is a better option, what we forget is that smart work is the fruit
of hard work.
 Only when you work hard do you gather the expertise and knowledge to understand the work
at hand, efficiently improve on it, and work smartly.

 Well, some people believe that only hard work does not give them the desired results in the
allotted time frame, whereas smart workers attain their goals faster through proper Time
Management.
 On the contrary, some people also have the notion that it is a shortcut to hard work and can never
help you attain goals with the same efficiency and consistency as hard work.

 Benefits of Combining Hard Work and Smart Work

 Hard work and smart work go hand in hand. While hard work requires dedicated effort, smart
work demands advanced planning and innovative thinking.
 Combining both types of work increases productivity and efficiency.
 While hard work is crucial to reaching your goals, it’s not always enough. Combining hard work
and smart work can help you reach those goals with less effort.
 These two strategies are complementary and can be used to improve our life in many ways.
 Smart work leverages the time of others. The key to smart work is evaluating tasks to determine
their value. Instead of spending cognitive power wallowing in negative emotions, one should be
focusing their energies on tasks that are important and necessary.
 In addition to maximizing ones productivity, smart work is also important. It builds upon
strengths and abilities and allows you to achieve goals faster.
 In today’s fast-paced world, smart work is essential. It can make work more enjoyable and faster,
while still producing similar results.
 While hard work is focused on quantity, smart work emphasizes both quality and efficiency.
 When used in tandem, hard work is a good way to get the most out of your time and effort.
 Using smart work and hard work together will help one achieve goals faster.
 Hard work is important because it helps one focus, but smart work will also help save energy and
time.
 Smart work will help one focus on a specific task, while hard work allows one to focus on the
more important details of the process. Using technology to complete smart work is more fulfilling
than hard work. Intelligent work will give one more energy and results than hard work alone.
 Examples of Smart Work and Hard Work
 Hard work is important, but smart work is even more important. Smart work is choosing the right
industry, based on analytical criteria, talent, interests, hobbies, and family tradition. For example,
Bill Gates, the founder of Microsoft, chose to work in software, but he made smart decisions in
choosing the way he sold the program to other computer manufacturers, earning millions in the
process.
 Smart work uses technology to improve productivity, while hard work involves doing things
quickly and without much thought. If one is studying for an exam, smart work involves a process
that saves time and prepares one for the exam. Hard work can make one burn out, so smart
planning is the key to maximizing one’s productivity.
 Hard work, on the other hand, is crucial if one is looking to gain experience. Hard work can be
rewarding, because it helps you to learn new things while doing it.
 Smart work is the most efficient, and it’s the way to get things done without sacrificing quality.
Both methods are important, but they’re best when combined in perfect harmony.
 While hard work is the best way to get the job done, smart work involves maximizing the time
and resources you have to accomplish it. It involves long hours of labour, and often requires no
shortcuts. It is a rewarding method, but it can be stressful. Smart work, on the other hand,
involves smart planning and prioritization. And smart work is best for everyone.
 Success does not come overnight to the industrious, but only after long hours of work and
deprivation of the comforts of life. Those who work hard and intelligently will eventually reap all
the rewards and seize the golden opportunity, probably not to work at all.
 Sometimes people are quick to accept their defeat, but people who work hard will never accept
their defeat lightly. Or, in other words, one can also say that in order to intelligently perform any
work with the slightest error, certain knowledge and practice are required.

 End Goal: Smart Work vs Hard Work

 One can attain great heights and lead a better and more comfortable life if one incorporates
both smart and hard work together.
 Such a person, in due time, attains all the accolades and recognition. The reason is that the
combination of both smart work and hard work will help push you toward your goal through a
strategic approach.
 If you are not smart, your hard work will never pay off. Just like a donkey only does hard work, a
horse does hard work but uses his smarts whenever and wherever needed.
 In a similar way, smart work is the result of hard work; to master the quality of smart work, one
really needs to work hard.
 Through hard work, we gain experience, which helps us discover new things, which in turn helps
us work smartly.
 The effort is important, but where to make that effort makes a difference.
 So it is recommended that there should always be an amalgamation of both smart work and hard
work as they both complement and fill in for each other whenever required.
 So one should always remember-

‘Before you work smart, work hard and If you only work hard, and
not smartly, you may end up only working for the rest of your life.’
 Special Economic Zones (SEZ)
 About
 An SEZ is an enclave within a country that is typically duty-free and has different business and
commercial laws chiefly to encourage investment and create employment.
 Apart from generating employment opportunities and promoting investment, SEZs are created
also to better administer these areas, thereby increasing the ease of doing business.
 SEZs are established to address infrastructural and bureaucratic challenges and improve the
overall economy.

 Types of Special Economic Zones

 Free Trade Zones (FTZ)
 Tax-free area that provides essential facilities for activities like shipping, trading, import, and
export.
 Businesses under such areas enjoy exempted, reduced, or less controlled rules and regulations
on labour, etc.
 Export Processing Zones (EPZ)
 These areas promote the growth of the sickening export business in India.
 They were established to help and revive the growth of Indian export commodities,
particularly from the fast-growing sectors.
 Free Zones (FZ) / Free Economic Zones (FEZ)
 They are a unit of SEZs designated by the trade and commerce organizations of the countries.
 The free or free economic zones are in which the companies are taxed bare minimum to
encourage economic activities.
 Industrial Parks/ Estates (IE)
 It is an area planned for the purpose of industrial development within the country.
 The industrial parks consist of offices and light industries instead of heavy ones.
 Free Ports
 It is a port or other similar area with relaxed jurisdiction of customs and/ or national
regulations.
 A free port is a special customs area or territory with less strict customs regulations.
 Bonded Logistics Parks (BLP)
 Trade arrangements are similar to that of a bonded warehouse over a particular geographic
area.
 Goods can be stored, manufactured or manipulated without any duties or customs.
 Urban Enterprise Zones
 Policies to encourage economic growth and development.
 They generally provide add-ons like tax concessions, reduced regulations, and infrastructure
incentives to lure the investors and private companies to such zones.

 Salient Features of Special Economic Zone

 A Special Economic Zone is a designated duty-free area deemed to be foreign territory for the
purpose of trade operations, duties & tariffs.
 There is no requirement for a license for import.
 Other notable features are:
 The units in SEZ must become net foreign exchange earners within a period of 3 years.
 Full freedom for subcontracting.
 Special Economic Zones are allowed for trading, manufacturing, and other service activities.
 SEZs in India
 The first EPZ (Export Processing Zone) in Asia was set up in 1965 in Kandla, Gujarat.
 In 2000, the government started establishing SEZs under the Foreign Trade Policy to overcome
the limitations of EPZs.
 The Special Economic Zones Act was passed in 2005, and it came into force along with the SEZ
Rules in 2006. India’s SEZs were structured closely with China's successful model.
 Currently, India has 379 notified SEZs, out of which 265 are operational. Tamil Nadu, Telangana,
Karnataka, Andhra Pradesh, and Maharashtra account for 64% of the SEZs.
 The Board of Approval is the apex body and is headed by the Secretary, Department of
Commerce (Ministry of Commerce and Industry).

 Objectives of the SEZ Act

 To create additional economic activity.
 To boost the export of goods and services.
 To generate employment.
 To boost domestic and foreign investments.
 To develop infrastructure facilities.

 Major Incentives and Facilities Available to SEZ

 Duty free import/domestic procurement: of goods for development, operation and
maintenance of SEZ units.
 Exemption from various taxes: like Income Tax, minimum alternate tax, etc.
 External commercial borrowing: by SEZ units upto US $ 500 million in a year without any
maturity restriction through recognized banking channels.
 Single window clearance: for Central and State level approvals.

 Challenges
 Unutilized Land in SEZs
 About 50% of land has remained unutilized in SEZs due to presence of sector specific
constraints in utilization of land.
 Existence of Multiple Models
 There are multiple models of economic zones such as SEZ, coastal economic zone, Delhi-
Mumbai Industrial Corridor, National Investment and Manufacturing Zone, food park and
textile park which pose challenges in integrating the various models.
 Consequently, Indian SEZs have lost some of their competitive advantages globally and
hence need to have fresher policies.
 International Competition
 SEZs in India have not been as successful as their counterparts in many other countries.
ASEAN countries have tweaked their laws to attract investments at the cost of Indian SEZs.
 SEZs account for only 30% of India’s total exports (China – > 60%).
 Disparity between States
 Majority of the SEZs are in just in coastal states while NE states, Bihar and Jharkhand have a
minimum number of SEZs and very low FDI.
 Barrier in Single Window Clearance System
 As many states have not synced their state laws with central SEZ Act leading to delayed
approvals.
 Benefits of Special Economic Zones
 They increase Foreign Direct Investment (FDI).
 Special Economic Zones increase foreign exchange earnings.
 They aid in employment generation.
 They help in experimenting with new policies.
 Special Economic Zones increase exports.
 They boost the economy.

 Measures Taken By the Government to Revamp SEZs

 The government constituted a committee headed by Mr Baba Kalyani, in 2018 to study
the existing SEZs of India and prepare a policy framework to adopt strategic policy measures.
 It was set up with a broad objective to evaluate the SEZ policy towards making it WTO (World
Trade Organisation) compatible and to bring in global best practices to maximise capacity
utilisation and to maximise potential output of the SEZs.
 Recommendations of the Baba Kalyani Committee
 Rename SEZs in India as 3Es- Employment and Economic Enclave.
 Framework shift from export growth to broad-based employment and economic growth.
 Separate rules and procedures for manufacturing and service SEZs.
 Ease of Doing Business in 3Es such as one integrated online portal for new investments.
 Extension of Sunset Clause and retaining tax or duty benefits.
 Unified regulator for IFSC.
 Dispute resolution through arbitration and commercial courts.

 Way Forward
 Promotion of MSME investments in SEZs by linking with MSME schemes and allowing
alternate sectors to invest in sector-specific SEZs is among the recommendations by the Baba
Kalyani Committee on SEZs.
 It had also batted for additional enablers and procedural relaxations as well as granting SEZs
infrastructure status to improve their access to finance and enable long-term borrowings.

 Conclusion
 Each government determines its own definition of a special economic zone. Above all, companies
may also be offered tax vacations, in which they are allowed a period of cheaper taxation after
establishing themselves in a zone.
 Companies are also bestowed tax vacations, in which they are allowed a period of cheaper
taxation after establishing themselves in a zone. It is critical for the government. However, the
advantages of an SEZ considerably outweigh the drawbacks, which are almost insignificant.
 SEZs in India are areas that offer incentives to resident businesses. SEZs typically offer
competitive infrastructure, duty free exports, tax incentives, and other measures designed to make
it easier to conduct business.
 Accordingly, SEZs in India are a popular investment destination for many multinationals,
particularly exporters.

Special Economic Zones are globally recognized tools for promoting

economic growth. They offer various incentives to attract investment
and boost exports. Although SEZs in India face challenges, the
benefits they provide far outweigh the drawbacks.
Terrorism and Role of External State and Non-State Actors
In Creating Challenges to Internal Security
 Terrorism
 There is no universally accepted definition for terrorism.
 Many legal systems and government agencies use different definitions of terrorism.
 Terrorism is the planned, organized and systematic use of violence as a means of
coercion for political, religious or ideological purposes . It has become a global
phenomenon posing major threat to international peace, security and stability.
 The menace of terrorism whether perpetrated by individuals, groups or state forces is a
crime against humanity which has wounded societies all over the world.
 The terrorist has not only threatened the ideals of democracy and freedom but also caused
a serious challenge to the existence, progress and development of mankind.
 International terrorism poses an increasingly dangerous and difficult threat to world.
 Today’s terrorists seek to inflict mass casualties, and they are attempting to do so across
globe. They are less dependent on state sponsorship and are, instead, forming loose,
transnational affiliations based on religious or ideological affinity and a common hatred.
This makes terrorist attacks more difficult to detect and prevent.
 India is the seventh-largest and second-most populous country in the world. Its population is
divided into more than 2,000 ethnic groups, speaking more than 22 different languages and
practising nine recognised religions. Thus, it is widespread with divisions and the conflict
naturally follows. It is among the top ten most affected by terrorism.
 Not only is it facing religious extremism, but it also is mired by poverty, urban-rural divide, tribal
feuds, and ethnic nationalism - all leading to the problem of terrorism within the nation.
 India has been facing challenges on the front of internal security since independence from various
state and non-state actors.
 External State actors refer to those entities which have formal backing of a sovereign state for
carrying out any intended action.
 Non state actors on the other hand, have a considerable power of influencing international events
but they do not have formal state backing.
 Examples of state actors are the army, bureaucracy, intelligence agencies etc. whereas non state
actors would be NGOs, civil society organizations, extremist outfits, multinational companies etc.

 Types of Terrorism in India

 Ethno-Nationalist Terrorism
 This type of terrorism is motivated by ethno-nationalist and separatist goals.
 It gained global prominence during the post-Second World War era until religious terrorism
gained the centre stage.
 Ethnic terrorism is defined as deliberate violence by a subnational ethnic group to advance its
cause.
 Such terrorism gives high emphasis to either for the creation of a separate state or on the
elevation of the status of one ethnic group over others.
 Liberation Tiger of Tamil Eelam (LTTE) in Sri Lanka and insurgent groups in North East
India and the movement to create Khalistan are some examples of this type of terrorism.
 Religious Terrorism
 Currently, most of the terrorist activities are motivated by religious ideas.
 The practitioners of this type of terrorism consider the act of violence as either divine duty or
a sacramental act.
  It often embraces and justifies extreme acts of violence, making it far more destructive in
nature.
 This form of terror focuses on religious imperatives, a presumed duty for a specific
religious group, against one or more religious groups.
 Mumbai 26/11 terror attack in 2008 from an Islamic group in Pakistan is an example
of religious terrorism in India.
 Islamic State of Iraq and Syria (ISIS) and Al-Qaeda are some of the other examples of this
type of terrorism.
 Ideology Oriented Terrorism
 This type of terrorism use ideology to support violence and acts of terror.
 It is further classified into two groups:
 Left-wing terrorism involves the violence against the ruling elite mostly by the peasant
class to promote leftist ideologies. These ideologies are mostly based on ideas of thinkers
like Marx, Engels, Lenin, Mao Tse-tung, etc. The leftist ideologies believe that all
existing social relations and state structures in the capitalist society are exploitative and a
revolutionary change through violence is essential. The examples of this type of terrorism
include the Maoist groups in India and Nepal, Red Brigades in Italy, etc.
 Right-wing groups often aim to maintain the status quo or return to some past situation
which they feel they should conserve. Sometimes they even endorse
ethnic/racist/religious character too. They may also force the government to acquire
territory or to intervene to protect the rights of an "oppressed" minority in the
neighbouring country. Violence against migrants also comes under this category. The
examples for this type include Nazism, Fascism, white supremacy movement in the US
known as Ku Klux Klan (KKK), etc.
 State-sponsored terrorism
 Also known as warfare by proxy, State-sponsored terrorism is as old as the history of military
conflict.
 It has gained prominence in international politics between the 1960s and 1970s.
 Currently, some countries have embraced terrorism as a deliberate instrument of
foreign policy.
 One distinction that separates this type of terrorism from others is that it is
undertaken to achieve the defined foreign policy objectives rather than grabbing media
attention or targeting a specific audience.
 India has been facing this problem since independence due to Pakistan's state-sponsored
terrorism.
 Narco-Terrorism
 This form of terror focuses on creating illegal narcotics traffic zones.
 Drug violence in northwest India is an example of narco-terrorism in India.
 The term was first used by the former President of Peru in 1983 to describe the campaigns by
drug traffickers using terrorist methods like bombing, assassination, and kidnapping against
the anti-narcotics police in Columbia and Peru.
 Though this term was initially used to describe the drug trafficking-related terrorism in South
America, it has now come to be associated with terrorist groups and activities around the
world and more so in the Central and South-East Asia.
 However, it can also be used to describe as a means of terrorism or at any rate as a means of
funding terrorism.
 It combines two illegal activities - drug trafficking and terrorist activities.
 It is mainly motivated by economic reasons as it helps them fund other terrorist activities.
 The major terrorist groups involved in this activity include Al Qaeda, PKK (Kurdistan
Workers Party) in Turkey, Hizballah in Lebanon, Islamic terrorist groups in India, etc.
  Left-Wing Terrorism
 This form of terror focuses on economic ideology, where all the existing socio-
political structures are seen to be economically exploitative in character and
a revolutionary change through violent means is essential.
 Maoist violence in Jharkhand and Chhattisgarh are examples of left-wing terrorism in
India.

 Terrorist Groups In India

 Islamist Extremist Groups
 Most of the attacks by these groups are concentrated in and around Kashmir.
 While India claims the entire Kashmir as its sovereign territory, it only controls two-third of
the region, with Pakistan acting as a de facto governor to nearly 1/3 of the territory and
several other areas are under China's control.
 The principal groups operating in this area include LeT, JeM, Al Badr and Hizbul
Mujahideen. These groups coordinate under the United Jihad Council.
 Radical Sikh Groups
 There was always a tension between the Hindus and the Sikhs and their relations was at an
all-time low following Operation Blue Star - the military operation to remove Jarnail Singh
Bhindranwale and his followers from the buildings of the Harmandir Sahib complex in
Amritsar, Puniab.
 The assassination of the former PM Indira Gandhi by her two Sikh bodyguards worsened the
situation.
 Many innocent Sikhs were persecuted in response, leading to popular support of the
Khalistan movement that seeks to create a separate nation called Khalistan in Punjab region
to serve as a homeland for the Sikhs.
 These radical groups are still operating abroad in countries like Canada.
 Radical Hindu Groups
 Popularly known as the "Saffron Terror", these violent acts are motivated by Hindu
nationalist ideologies.
 The extent of the Hindu terror in India is highly debated at the domestic level.
 Riots or attacks targeting other religious groups are often characterised by a nationalist
undertone and not all participants are necessarily Hindu nationalists.
 Complexities like these and the issues surrounding the nature of the minority victims/targets
may lead to underreporting of the Hindu terror attacks.
 Tribal And National Separatist Groups
 These groups are motivated by non-religious ideologies and are often known for "communal
violence".
 India, for a very long time, has been the host for inter-tribal and ethnic conflicts.
 These incidents are mainly due to ethnic hatred, tribal competition and sectarian aspirations
that supersede any existing religious or ideological differences.
 These incidents are concentrated in the North East India that is politically, economically and
geographically isolated from the rest of the country.
 Left-Wing Terror Groups
 The largest among this group, the Naxalites, have been waging war against the government
since the 1960s.
 They have established a Mao inspired insurgency in the eastern part of India known as "Red
Corridor".
 Currently, they are estimated to have more than 40,000 individuals and are holding
significant swaths of the mineral-rich territory.
 They also have popular support in the poverty-stricken rural villages.
 Role of External State And Non-State Actors In Creating Challenges To
Internal Security
 State actors
 ‘State actor’ is used in the context where one government supports an actor in the
performance of an act or acts of terrorism against the other often deemed as a state
sponsor.
 Increasing activities of Pakistan’s Inter-Services Intelligence (ISI) in Nepal changed
the nature of the border completely. It has ties with the Taliban and other radical
groups. These groups have been involved with the radicalization of the Rohingya
refugees in Bangladesh. Groups such as the Lashkar-e-Taiba (LeT), the Haqqani
Network and the Taliban have repeatedly been used by Pakistan as instruments to
help it achieve its foreign policy objectives in India and Afghanistan.
 China’s People’s Liberation Army continues to deploy construction equipment for
road works. It uses spider excavators to build roads in the border area.
 China is setting up villages in uninhabited tri-junction stretches between India,
Bhutan and China, which are intended to support Chinese militar y facilities.
 China not following resolution mechanism of maritime disputes in reference to the
South China Sea where China is flexing its military muscle despite an international
tribunal verdict (UNCLOS) going against it.
 Non-state actors
 Pakistan has been a major exporter of terrorism to India . Non-state actors like
terrorist groups for instance Lashkar-e-Taiba, Jaish-e-Mohammad are a continuous
threat.
 Non state actor -sponsored terrorism, often motivated by fundamentalist ideologies,
backed by secretive but efficient financial networks, use of IT, clandestine access to
chemical-biological and nuclear materials, and illicit drug trafficking, has emerged as
a major threat to international stability.
 These groups aim to not only create instability in states like J&K; they also have
a larger aim of destabilising the country. This is done through sporadic terrorist
strikes, which spreads terror and panic. This could also adversely affect the ability of
the Indian state to pursue economic modernisation.
 Growing vulnerability of the coastline and also of the airspace, for example, Mumbai
and Purulia incidents.
 Insurgency, illegal migration from Bangladesh and smuggling activities reflect the
porosity (concern highlighted in Kargil Review Committee) of our borders.
 The deep-rooted nexus between drug mafias, arms dealers, and money launderers for
financing terrorism.
 The north-eastern states have been facing many challenges such as:
 Organized Crime, the UWSA is the largest of the organized criminal groups in the
region and operates freely along the China and Thailand borders.
 Ethnic Gangs.
 Insurgent Groups which can encourage trans-border terrorism and separatist
tendencies.
 Opium poppy cultivation in Burma’s Shan state.
 Illegal immigrants having livelihood interest.
 Refugee crisis like 40,000 Rohingya live in India.
 Insurgent groups active in the Northeast, namely ULFA-I, NDFB-S, UNLF hide in
Myanmar; together these could be a serious threat to internal security.
 Role of External State Actors in Causing Challenge To Internal Security
 All the states in the north-eastern region are different from each other because of
their ethnic diversity which comprises over 160 scheduled tribes and 400 other tribal or
sub tribal communities and groups with predominantly a rural economy.
 Deadlock over peace-talks and cease-fire agreements with various warring tribes, nexus
between many insurgent groups and organized crime syndicates , China’s linkages to
some anti-India insurgent groups, demand scrapping the controversial Armed Forces
(Special Powers) Act are some other key reasons for the survival of armed insurgency in
the north-eastern region.
 Countries surrounding India have been active in exploiting the volatile situation presented by
the turmoil in the northeast. Not only countries such as China, Pakistan, Bangladesh and
Myanmar, but also smaller powers such as Bhutan and Nepal have been involved in the region.
 Through political backing, economic assistance, logistic support, military training or arms
supplies these countries have varyingly contributed to the ongoing violence in this region. The
state may carry out a limited war against Indian state and this might have ramifications for our
internal security too.
 They might support the various insurgent groups, Naxalites, or separatist groups through funding,
training or logistics.
 There have been instances where state actors have been responsible for carrying out cyber
warfare through hacking and other espionage.

 Role of Non State Actors in Creating Problems For India

 Insurgency
 North-East suffers from violent movements based upon ethnic identities leading to clashes.
China is alleged to support such acts for instance. United Liberation Front of Asom (ULFA)
members of Assam were given shelter by China.
 Terrorism
 Pakistan has been a major exporter of terrorism to India. Non-state actors like terrorist groups
for instance Lashkar-e-Taiba, Jaish-e-Mohammad are a continuous threat.
 Non state actor -sponsored terrorism, often motivated by fundamentalist ideologies, backed
by secretive but efficient financial networks, use of IT, clandestine access to chemical-
biological and nuclear materials, and illicit drug trafficking, has emerged as a major threat to
international stability.
 These groups aim to not only create instability in states like J&K; they also have a larger aim
of destabilising the country. This is done through sporadic terrorist strikes, which spreads
terror and panic. This could also adversely affect the ability of the Indian state to pursue
economic modernisation.
 Naxalism
 Left wing extremism affects states like Chhattisgarh, Jharkhand and West Bengal.
 Drug Trafficking
 Inter and Intra state trafficking takes place, through golden crescent and golden triangle
routes.
 Drugs from Golden Crescent (Pakistan, Afghanistan and Iran) have affected Punjab and
Golden Triangle (Laos, Myanmar and Thailand) has affected North Eastern states.
 Human Trafficking
 Children and women trafficking takes place via Bangladesh and Nepal.
 Communalism
 Propagandas are run and funded by enemy country and other non-state actors (NGOs and
CSOs) to destabilize India by damaging the socio-religious fabric and ensure riots.
  Counterfeit Currency
 It corrodes economy from inside, by facilitating black money and money laundering activities
as well as funding terrorism, which itself creates a demand for fake currency, thereby creating
a positive feedback loop. This is the issue arising especially from Pakistan.
 Cyber Security
 Recent cyber-attacks by Legion, ATM skimming are examples. Pakistani hackers often hack
government websites.
 They can also incite people for regionalism thus demanding their separate state which further
increases secessionist tendency.

 Key Challenges Faced by India

 Intelligence and coordination
 India has the following weaknesses when it comes to intelligence:
 Limited to no intelligence
 The available intelligence is general, vague or not actionable.
 Lack of effective communication between intelligence agencies and law enforcement
agencies.
 These weaknesses are not only seen in India but also in other nations like the USA. The
Indian government has made a huge improvement in the state's intelligence gathering
mechanism and has enhanced coordination among the different security agencies. Thus, it has
resulted in the reduction of terror attacks.
 India's security mechanism has been reinforced with the establishment of Multi-
Agency Coordination Centres (MACCs) and Subsidiary Multi-Agency Coordination
Centres (SMACCs).
 Yet, India currently suffers from insufficient inter-agency coordination, which in turn, leads
to a lack of effective intelligence monitoring and security response.
 Social Media
 Currently, those involved in terrorist activities are making use of social media platforms to
recruit and spread ideology among a wider audience.
 They are even giving manuals on how to make explosives to the public.
 Communication has also become easier for these individuals.
 The radicalisation of youth in India's vulnerable areas has also become easier
due to social media.
 Indian government must counter this through effective counter-narratives and build an
environment that ensures inclusive growth of the marginalised.
 Maritime And Coastal Security In India
 Maritime security is of economic significance to India.
 India's ports handle 70% of external trades in terms of values, making it vulnerable to
terrorism.
 26/11 and 1993 serial bomb blasts in Mumbai exposed the vulnerability of India's maritime
security.
 Currently, the Indian Navy is in charge of ensuring the security of the areas beyond 12
nautical miles, while the Coast Guards is responsible for the security of areas between 5 and
12 nautical miles and the maritime police are in charge of the security between the baseline
and five nautical miles.Sea is porous, thus is highly difficult to monitor constantly.
 Cyber-Security
 There is an increase in cashless transactions within India in recent times.
 Due to the improvement in IT, most of the infrastructural and industrial capacities have
become technology-driven.
  Most of the citizens' personal information is digitized, leading to higher dependence on
technology.
 This makes India highly vulnerable to cyber terrorism.
 Currently, India does not have sufficient manpower, expertise, and technologies to deal with
this emerging threat.
 The current threats in this context include interference in the election, propaganda, fake news,
digital disruption of energy assets and transportation systems.
 This is an enormous challenge that requires structural and organisational reform with a large
financial investment.

 Measures Taken By The Indian Government To Counter-Terrorism

 India's Counter-Terrorism Laws
 Unlawful Activities (Prevention Amendment Act, 2019: was passed in the parliament this
year and it repeals the UAPA, 1967. The amended Act gives the power to the centre to
declare
individuals/organisations as terrorists if it commits/participates, prepares, promotes, or
involves in terrorism.
 Armed Forces (Special Powers) Act, 1958: allows the use of any kinds of force that is
necessary against a person who is "acting to disrupt the law and order". This is applicable
only if the warning is given by the security personnel.
 The Other Acts: to deal with terrorism includes the:
 Prevention of Corruption Act
 Maharashtra Control of Organised Crimes Act (MCOCA)
 NIA (Amendment) Act, 2019

 India's Counter-Terrorism Agencies

 The counter-terrorism activities are mostly undertaken by the intelligence agencies, military,
paramilitary and police forces.
 Army participates in the counter-terrorism operations only as a last resort.
 Paramilitary forces are given specialised training in counter-terrorism. These forces include BSF,
CRPF, NSG, etc.
 India's intelligence agencies monitor the terrorist activities and give a warning about the
imminent attacks to prevent it from taking place. These agencies include Intelligence Bureau
(IB), Research and Analysis Wing (RAW), etc.

 International Collaborations
 India has been vociferous against terrorism, especially state-sponsored terrorism.
 India has signed various deals and agreements with several like-minded countries for sharing
intelligence, preventing organised crimes, removing support to the terrorist organisations and
isolating those countries that are sponsoring terrorism.
 However, despite these proactive endeavours, India is not able to materialise these collaborations
and cooperation and has to deal with terrorism on its own most of the time.

 Way Forward
 Collaboration between the government, media and the public is a need of the hour. This will
ensure quick and efficient sharing of information about suspicious activities to the law
enforcement agencies while also ensuring inclusive growth among the people. Media and
government can also ensure the de-radicalization of the youth in vulnerable
areas.
  Local police forces must be well trained and well equipped with necessary gears so that they can
respond to the terrorist attacks until the Special Forces reach the site.
 Enabling timely transportation of the security forces during the terror attacks to ensure an
effective and quick response. This is of significant challenge to India due to the heavy congestion
and haphazard layouts of the infrastructures. Improved urban planning, coordination, and
connectivity are vital to address this issue.
 Institutionalising swift decision-making is necessary to address security issues. Efficient
counterterrorism strategies must be formulated in an integrated and multidimensional manner for
these decisions to be successful. These decisions must be quick and proactive with no delays.
 While over 50% of the known terror attacks between 1972 and 2017 was committed by Left-
Wing terrorist groups, in terms of casualties, Islamic terror equally deadly.
 Three key vulnerable areas in India are:
 Jammu and Kashmir
 The Eastern "Red Corridor"
 North East India
 These areas are dominated by the Islamist, Left-Wing, and Tribal/separatist groups.
 As long as Pakistan continues to sponsor terrorism in Kashmir and nearby areas and refuse to
cede its claim to the territory, it is unlikely that the crisis will calm in the near future. India has
little choice but to maintain some façade of control and security.
 The types of violence found in the North East are common among the underdeveloped areas
undergoing modernisation. The continued investment in infrastructure and social development in
the region should be adequate to quell such incidents in the long-term. Harsh police crackdown
may only increase the tribal mistrust of the authorities, making developmental activities far more
difficult. The area, which has the most terror incidents and has a high potential for short-term
improvement, is the Red Corridor.
 The Naxalites and other Maoist groups can be controlled if efforts are made in
reconciliation and negotiation. This process may be painful, involving ceding some reasonable
political representation to the aggressors, but the end of violence and regained access to vital
mineral resources would make well worth the government's while.
 There are also some benefits to waiting. Increased funding for the economic development of the
isolated rural areas that support the Naxalites can ensure popular support for the government
instead of the separatist groups.

 Conclusion
 Both state and non-state factors from outside have created problems in our internal security
framework. Hence while it is imperative to guard our borders and strengthen our diplomacy, on
the other hand, we need to check the various non state actors who come in hidden forms. There is
a need for a national internal security doctrine to deal with various challenges.
 Since the 26/11 Mumbai terror attacks, there has been a considerable improvement in India's
counterterrorism endeavours. The complex challenges pertaining to terrorism continue to threaten
India and its limitations in addressing it are making the situation bleaker.
 The manifestation of terrorism continues to change rapidly and is increasingly becoming
technology-centric. Therefore, the government must take the necessary steps to adapt to the
change and address the growing challenges while countering terrorism.

Overall, while the Indian government has taken several measures to address the issue of
funding and support for state, non-state actors and terrorist organizations, it remains a
challenging and an ongoing problem. It requires the continued cooperation of
international partners, as well as sustained efforts by the Indian government and civil
society, to counter the threat posed by these groups.
 Tourism Sector In India
 Introduction
 Tourism is a major engine of economic growth in most parts of the world. Several countries have
transformed their economies using the tourism potential the fullest.
 Tourism has great capacity to create large scale employment of diverse kind - from the most
specialised to the unskilled and all of us know that generation of massive productive employment
opportunities is what India needs the most.
 Over the decades, tourism has experienced continued growth and deepening diversification to
become one of the fastest growing economic sectors in the world. Modern tourism is closely
linked to development and encompasses a growing number of new destinations. These dynamics
have turned tourism into a key driver for socio-economic progress.
 Today, the business volume of tourism equals or even surpasses that of oil exports, food products
or automobiles. Tourism has become one of the major players in international commerce, and
represents at the same time one of the main income sources for many developing countries. This
growth goes hand in hand with an increasing diversification and competition among destinations.
 The growing influence of the tourism sector as an economic powerhouse and its potential as a
tool for development are irrefutable. Not only does the tourism sector spearhead growth, it also
improves the quality of people’s lives with its capacity to create large scale employment of
diverse kind. It supports environmental protection, champions diverse cultural heritage and
strengthens peace in the world.
 India as a nation offers diversity within its unity, not only in terms of its tribes, cultures, faiths,
and ways of life but also in terms of its tourism potential.
 India has a lot to offer in terms of historical monuments, geographical diversity, climate
variances, and the wonders of nature.
 The tourism sector contributes around 9% of the country’s GDP. It has its share in employment,
revenue, and forex reserves.
 India’s third-largest source of foreign exchange is the tourism and hotel industry.
 India’s tourism industry is a significant economic multiplier and is getting more crucial as the
nation aims for rapid economic growth and the creation of employment opportunities.

 Types of Tourism in India

 Leisure Tourism
 Leisure time can be defined as “free time”, not doing any work. It is that time to do things
that you normally have no time for in your daily life.
 Leisure tourism includes a holiday with the following:
 Relaxation: Sleep, relax, reading, walk on the beach, taking a scenic drive
 Sport activities: hiking, swimming, surfing, running.
 Visit places of interest and local attractions.
 Visiting friends and relatives.
 Shopping for goods that will be used by the tourist.
 Business Tourism
 Business tourism can be defined as “travel for the purpose of business”.
 Business Tourism can be divided into three sections:-
 Trading for goods to be resold on a wholesale basis.
 Conduct business transactions eg. visiting a client, contract negotiations.
 Attending a conference, exhibition or event associated with their business.
  Ecological Tourism
 The rich diversity in the flora and fauna with a blessing of the beautiful natural attractions has
encouraged Ecological Tourism in India.
 The forests cover on the Andaman and Nicobar islands, Orissa, Meghalaya and the Malabar
Coast;the Kaziranga and Jim Corbette wildlife sanctuaries;the mountain ranges in North India
and the hill stations, Kashmir, the beautiful beaches at Goa and the backwaters of Kerala and
much more is nothing but a feast for all nature lovers.
 Pilgrimage Tourism
 India being the most culturally developed country and the birthplace of many saints, poets
and philosophers has marked growth in Pilgrimage Tourism since ancient times itself.
 Kedarnath, Badrinath, Amarnath, the Golden Temple at Amritsar, Dwarka, Dargahs and
Masjids at Delhi and Ajmer, churches and temples at Goa are some of the common tourists’
attractions pertaining to Pilgrimage tourism
 Historical Tourism
 India is a land which gave birth to many legendary rulers and warriors creating a glorious
historical background. Every city or place in India has a story to tell about its history.
 The common tourists’ attractions for the same include the Taj Mahal at Agra, the beautifully
carved Ajanta Ellora and Khajuraho caves, the forts at Delhi, Rajasthan and Maharashtra.
 Medical Tourism
 Medical Tourism is an upcoming kind of tourism in India.
 Due to low cost and efficient medication facilities more number of people all over the world
considers India to be a better option for medication purpose.
 Ayurveda and Yoga Tourism
 Ayurveda may be regarded as the “Science of Life” which was developed long ago in 600
BC. The state of Kerala in South India is the popular destination of Ayurveda Tourism.
 The main focus of Indian Yoga is nothing but simple ‘yogasanas’ and meditation which
rejuvenates one’s mind, body and soul. There are many Ashrams in India
encouraging Yoga Tourism.
 Adventure Tourism
 Due to its geographical diversity India is one of the finest places for Adventure Tourism.
 Mountaineering, skiing, trekking in the ranges of Himalayas, Camel safaris in Rajasthan,
River rafting in the Ganges near Rishikesh, Rock climbing, Wind rafting and much more of
an adventure for every adventure lover is bestowed by India upon its Tourists.
 Sports Tourism
 Sports tourism refers to international travel either for viewing or participating in a sporting
event. Examples include international sporting events such as the Olympics, world cup
(soccer, rugby, and cricket), tennis, golf and Formula 1 Grand Prix.
 Wildlife Tourism
 Wildlife tourism is the observation of wild (non-domestic) animals in their natural
environment or in captivity.
 It includes activities such as photography, viewing and feeding of animals. This form
of tourism offer tourists customized tour packages and safaris and is closely associated with
eco-tourism and sustainable-tourism.

 Importance of the Tourism Sector

 It recognizes India’s historical and cultural sites, enabling greater protection and preservation.
 Tourism has the potential to be a vehicle for regional development due to the significant amount of
money that traveling tourists bring in.
 It brings social equality as it moves areas with an absence of growth-promoting industries toward
more inclusive, equitable growth.
  It raises awareness of the region on a global scale and draws attention to its underlying socio-
economic issues.
 It pushes the service industry. With the expansion of the tourism industry, there are an increasing
number of companies that will be benefitted from the service sector.
 A growing tourism industry is a driving force behind development, necessitating adequate
infrastructure. Example: The mobile tourism caravans in Uttarakhand.
 The railroad, aviation, and real estate sectors are also supported.
 Tourism also provides an opportunity for foreign hotel and tourism groups to establish themselves
in India. The influx of tourists benefits small companies in tourist areas.
 It creates jobs for tour operators and the hospitality industry.
 It develops a connection with other nations regarding India’s attraction and contributes to India’s
soft power.
 It aids in the search for funds on a global scale for the protection and repair of the monuments and
the area.
 It enables India to promote its biodiversity and important animals, such as tigers, red pandas, and
wild asses.
 It can also aid in drawing attention to Indian wildlife issues on a worldwide scale and aid in the
effort to raise money.
 It helps in bringing India on global map of tourism, earning appreciation, recognition and initiates
cultural exchange.
 Tourism as a form of soft power, helps in promoting cultural diplomacy, people to people connect
and thereby promotes friendship and cooperation between India and other countries.

 Impact of Tourism on the Economy

 Tourism can bring many economic and social benefits, particularly in rural areas and developing
countries, but mass tourism is also associated with negative effects.
 Tourism can only be sustainable if it is carefully managed so that potential negative effects on the
host community and the environment are not permitted to outweigh the financial benefits.
 Tourism industry in India has several positive and negative impacts on the economy and society.
These impacts are highlighted below.
 Positive Impacts of Tourism
 Generating Income and Employment: Tourism in India has emerged as an instrument of
income and employment generation, poverty alleviation and sustainable human development.
It contributes 6.23% to the national GDP and 9.3% of the total employment in India. More
than 20 million people are now working in the India’s tourism industry.
 Source of Foreign Exchange Earnings: Tourism is an important source of foreign exchange
earnings in India. This has favorable impact on the balance of payment of the country.
 Preservation of National Heritage and Environment: Tourism helps preserve several
places which are of historical importance by declaring them as heritage sites. For instance,
the Taj Mahal, the Qutab Minar, Ajanta and Ellora temples, etc. would have been decayed
and destroyed, if the efforts had not been taken by Tourism Department to preserve them.
Likewise, tourism also helps in conserving the natural habitats of many endangered species.
 Developing Infrastructure: Tourism tends to encourage the development of multiple-use
infrastructure that benefits the host community, including various means of transports, health
care facilities and sports centers, in addition to the hotels and high-end restaurants that cater
to foreign visitors. The development of infrastructure has in turn induced the development of
other directly productive activities.
 Promoting Peace and Stability: The tourism industry can also help promote peace and
stability in developing country like India by providing jobs, generating income, diversifying
the economy, protecting the environment and promoting cross-cultural awareness. However,
 key challenges like adoption of regulatory frameworks, mechanisms to reduce crime and
corruption, etc, must be addressed if peace-enhancing benefits from this industry are to be
realized.
 Negative Impacts of Tourism
 Undesirable Social and Cultural Change: Tourism sometimes led to the destruction of the
social fabric of a community. The more tourists coming into a place, the more the perceived
risk of that place losing its identity. A good example is Goa. From the late 60’s to the early
80’s when the Hippy culture was at its height, Goa was a haven for such hippies. Here they
came in thousands and changed the whole culture of the state leading to a rise in the use of
drugs, prostitution and human trafficking. This had a ripple effect on the country.
 Increase Tension and Hostility: Tourism can increase tension, hostility, and suspicion
between the tourists and the local communities when there is no respect and understanding
for each other’s culture and way of life. This may further lead to violence and other crimes
committed against the tourists. The recent crime committed against Russian tourist in Goa is
a case in point.
 Creating a Sense of Antipathy: Tourism brought little benefit to the local community. In
most all-inclusive package tours more than 80% of travelers’ fees go to the airlines, hotels
and other international companies, not to local businessmen and workers. Moreover, large
hotel chain restaurants often import food to satisfy foreign visitors and rarely employ local
staff for senior management positions, preventing local farmers and workers from reaping the
benefit of their presence. This has often created a sense of antipathy towards the tourists and
the government.
 Adverse Effects on Environment and Ecology: One of the most important adverse effects
of tourism on the environment is increased pressure on the carrying capacity of the ecosystem
in each tourist locality. Increased transport and construction activities led to large scale
deforestation and destabilization of natural landforms, while increased tourist flow led to
increase in solid waste dumping as well as depletion of water and fuel resources. Flow of
tourists to ecologically sensitive areas resulted in destruction of rare and endangered species
due to trampling, killing, disturbance of breeding habitats. Noise pollution from vehicles and
public address systems, water pollution, vehicular emissions, untreated sewage, etc. also have
direct effects on biodiversity, ambient environment and general profile of tourist spots.

 Challenges
 Entry/exit: Despite the introduction of an e-visa facility, visitors find the process of applying for
a visa still cumbersome. Further, awareness about the e-visa facility remains low. In addition,
medical e-visa holders face difficulties because of the limited number of repeat visits allowed
under the visa, the number of accompanying persons permitted and cumbersome registration
processes.
 Infrastructure and Connectivity: Deficiencies in infrastructure and inadequate connectivity
hamper tourist visits to some heritage sites
 Safety and Security Of Tourists: Especially of the foreign tourists, is a major hurdle to the
tourism development. Attacks on foreign nationals raise questions about India’s ability to
welcome tourists from far away countries.
 Communication: Many tourists face communication problem while in India. This makes them
dependent on tourist guides or travel operators to curate their travel in India.
 Lack of Skilled Manpower: is another challenge to Tourism Industry in India.
 Absence of Basic Amenities: Like drinking water, well maintained toilets, first aid, cafeteria
etc. at tourist places.
 Seasonality in Tourism: With the busy season being limited to six months from October to
March and heavy rush in November and December.
  Tourism Segments or Circuits: India has various tourist destinations but few circuits or
segments such as the Golden Triangle (Delhi-Agra- Jaipur), are well connected.
 Promotion and Marketing: Although it has been increasing, online marketing/branding remains
limited and campaigns are not coordinated. Tourist information centres are poorly managed,
making it difficult for domestic and foreign tourists to access information with ease.
 Skills: The number of adequately trained individuals for the tourism and hospitality sector is a
key challenge to giving visitors a worldclass experience. A limited number of multi-lingual
trained guides and the limited local awareness and understanding of the benefits and
responsibilities associated with tourist growth act as constraints on the sector’s growth.

 Government Initiatives
 The Incredible India Tourist Facilitator Certification (IITFC) Porta: It is an online
programme where one can learn about tourism at their own time, space, path and pace. The
successful completion of this programme would enable the learner to become a Certified Tourist
Facilitator of Ministry of Tourism, government of India.
 Facilitative Visa Regime: is a prerequisite for increasing inbound tourism.
 Incredible India 2.0 Campaign: of the Ministry marks a shift from the generic promotions being
undertaken across the world to market specific promotional plans and content creation.
 Incredible India Website: to promote to and engage with travelers.
 National Mission on Pilgrimage Rejuvenation and Spiritual, Heritage Augmentation Drive
(PRASHAD) Scheme: Integrated development of identified pilgrimage destinations (includes
employment generation) has been undertaken under this scheme.
 Swadesh Darshan Scheme: The Ministry of Tourism assists State Governments in developing
the infrastructure for 13 theme-based circuits that have been designated. The Swadesh
Darshan and PRASHAD schemes are designed to promote expansion in specialized tourism
markets such as wildlife, adventure, wellness, and religious travel.
 The Swachh Bharat Movement: has started a significant cleaning campaign to safeguard and
maintain the sacredness of national historic monuments.
 All India Permit Rules 2021: Under the All India Permit Rules 2021, a tourist vehicle operator
may apply online for an All India Tourist Authorization/Permit.
 Dekho Apna Desh: On November 28, 2020, a webinar series entitled “12 Months of Adventure
Travel” is projected to market India as an adventure tourism destination.
 Adopt a Heritage Project: plans to entrust heritage sites/monuments and other tourist sites to
private sector companies, public sector companies and individuals for the development of
various tourist amenities.
 Online Learning Management System: for creating skilled manpower to work as tourist
facilitators.

 Sustainable Tourism
 A rapid and massive movement of tourists within a shorter span of tourist season puts a heavy
pressure on tourist resources. The usage of tourist attractions is likely to be damaged beyond
repair and their life span may even get shortened. Their popularity suffers a loss, the number of
tourist arrivals gradually falls and generation of job comes to a halt.
 There is the degeneration of tourist spots because of the overuse or misuse of their resources. The
growth of tourist culture demands to practice tourism on sustainable basis.
 A sustainable tourism allows exploiting tourist resources for a long time and never brings a full
stop to the creation of job opportunities. Sight seers in summer tourist resorts keep people
engaged in tourist occupations. In high altitude areas of the Himalaya, the induction of winter
tourism and keeping people occupied in replenishing the stock of the cottage industry products
 for sale in the next peak season have offered them sustenance all the year round. To keep alive
the tourist friendly activities in all tourist areas is the life and blood of sustainable tourism.
Prolonging the conservation of environmental attraction by avoiding anything which is fatal to it
encourages people to derive their living continuously from tourist occupations.
 Eco-tourism or environment friendly tourist activity forms a core segment of sustainable tourism.
It requires preserving the ecology and local cultures of an area. A good quality of air and water,
well maintained biodiversity and organised human efforts are the major components of eco-
tourism.

 Way Forward
 Faster development of all sort of infrastructure (physical, social and digital) is a need of hour.
 Safety of tourists is a priority. An official guide system can be launched for tourists.
 Encourage private sector involvement in the construction of tourist amenities in interior and less
traveled locations.
 Indian Residents should be motivated to treat tourists well, so that tourists don’t face any type of
fraud.
 It is important to strike a balance between promoting tourism and preserving the natural, social,
and cultural environments in the destinations. To address concerns with the water crisis,
pollution, waste management, and other related challenges, the government should also promote
eco-friendly and sustainable tourism.
 Promotion of other forms of Tourism like Medical Tourism, Adventure Tourism, Organic
Toursim etc. to solve the problem of seasonality. Off-season concession is another solution.
 India’s size and massive natural, geographic, cultural and artistic diversity offers enormous
opportunities. Indian Tourism industry should play on that.
 Making use of social media to promote Indian tourist destinations online to both domestic and
international visitors.
 Rationalizing inner line permits and extending visas on arrival and visa regulations to other
countries to provide access for foreigners from other nations.
 Emphasize underserved areas to tap the vast potential of the region. For example, North Eastern
region.
 Greater coordination at the state and local levels will help India’s rural tourism industry grow and
generate more revenue for the area.
 To genuinely guarantee a seamless tourist transportation experience, all interstate road taxes must
be standardized.

 Conclusion
 As a travel destination, few other nations can offer the diversity of products and experiences
found in India. The travel and tourism industry offers significant opportunity for fulfillment of
key national growth imperatives including employment generation across all regions of the
country, and growth in the sector can contribute to overall economic development in the country.
 However, tourism in India, though growing consistently, is yet to realize its full potential due to
several challenges that plagued the sector. Alleviation of these challenges will be essential for the
industry to realize its full potential.

The Tourism Sector has huge untapped potential in India. The multiplier
effect associated with the tourism sector can help raise the income levels
and ensure inclusive growth. A burgeoning tourism industry can prove to
be vital in ensuring India’s transition to a high income economy.
 Trial by Media
 About
 Media is recognized as the fourth pillar of Democracy after Legislature, Executive and Judiciary.
Therefore, to ensure democracy, there is a need for free and independent media. However, these
days the role of media is often criticized, especially in reporting criminal matters. The media
sometimes go beyond its domain and starts interfering with the functions of the court.
 Often the media have gone a step further and published information based on mere assumptions
and suspicion about the line of investigation by the official agencies to vigorously report on the
issue on a day to day basis and comment on the evidence without ascertaining the factual matrix.
 Such reporting has brought an undue pressure in the course of fair investigation and trial. The
media in this manner is conducting a parallel investigation and trial; and has already foretold its
decision, thereby, creating a pressure on the investigation agencies.
 Media has always been examined as the watchdog of society. It is essential to have free and fair
media in every form of government. In a vast and diverse democracy like India, it is of utmost
importance that the media functions without bias and prejudice as the media also takes the role of
opposition. Media is almost like the foundation of Indian democracy.
 The roots of the media can be traced back to the times of the Nationalist Movement in India. Ever
since those times, Media has played a crucial role in guaranteeing citizens’ rights and Liberties.
Besides playing these essential roles, media has evolved as a much-needed change agent in
society.

 Media: Meaning and Importance

 Trial by media is a phrase popular in the late 20th century and early 21st century to describe the
impact of television and newspaper coverage on a person's reputation by creating a
widespread perception of guilt or innocence before, or after, a verdict in a court of law.
 In recent times there have been numerous instances in which the media has conducted the trial
of an accused and has passed the verdict even before the court passes its judgment.
 Media is the communication outlets or the tools used to store and deliver information or data.
 Media can be seen as a communication mechanism, in the middle, that conveys aspects of the
world and society to the receiver/audience.
 Media plays an important role in society and is known as "watchdog" it occupies an important
role in shaping the mood of the public.
 The media provides a full proof picture into the working of the government, thus making an
indelible impression on the citizens.
 It provides the information, adopts its own point of view, and thus works as a giving force to
public debate.
 It stands as a permanent means of communication and control between
the people and their elected representatives in parliament and government.
 In recent years, with the growth of cable television, local radio, newspapers and all forms of
social media, the range and reach of media have increased exponentially thereby continuously
expanding readership and viewership.
 This has given our media providers an unprecedented role in shaping popular opinion and
references.
  Constitutionality
 Though the word media trial is not directly defined anywhere. But indirectly, this power is
being given to the media under Article 19 of the Constitution of India.
 Article 19 of the Constitution of India provides freedom of speech to each and every
person.

 Media Ethics
 Every Media is obliged to follow some moral principles and standards that relate to the
content, conduct, and role of these media. But nowadays, with the increasing demand for TRP
ratings, most media firms obliterate their code of conduct and perform unethical journalistic
practices. One of the journalistic practices that are now common among the Indian Media is
media trials.
 The basic purpose of journalism is to serve the people with news, views, comments and
information on matters of public interest in a fair, accurate and unbiased manner.
 For achieving this objective, the media is expected to conduct itself in keeping with certain
universally recognized norms of conduct that have evolved or maybe evolved by different
societies suited to their requirements such as:
 Honesty and fairness in reporting facts.
 The duty to seek the views of the subject of any critical reportage in advance of
publication.
 The duty to correct factual errors.
 The duty not to falsify pictures or to use them misleadingly.
 The duty to respect privacy.
 The duty to distinguish between facts and opinions.
 The duty not to discriminate or to inflame hatred on grounds of race, nationality, religion,
or gender.
 The duty not to use dishonest means to obtain information, unless it is in the public
interest.
 The duty not to endanger people.
 The duty to maintain general standards of decency and taste.
 The duty not to divulge confidential sources.
 Limitations on Freedom of Media
 The media is under the duty to ensure that any information disseminated to the public is accurate.
 Implicitly, limits are also levied according to Article 19 (2) of India's Constitution the form of:
 Right to integrity.
 Right to privacy.
 Limitations imposed by way of contempt of court.

 The Intricacies of Media Trials

 Media trials operate within a complex framework of ethics, justice, and public interest. Here are
some unique insights into the issue:
 Impartiality and Balance: As purveyors of information, media houses must ensure that their
reporting is balanced and impartial, especially in legal matters. Sensationalism, bias, or
misrepresentation can impact public opinion and jeopardize an individual's right to a fair trial.
  Media Literacy: As consumers of media, it's crucial for the public to approach news with a
discerning eye. Media literacy plays a significant role in mitigating the adverse effects of
media trials.
 Regulation and Self-Regulation: Regulatory bodies and journalistic ethics codes play a
crucial role in curbing the excesses of media trials. However, self-regulation within media
organizations is equally vital to ensure fair and responsible reporting.

 Implications of Trial by Media

 Affects Judicial Functioning
 Concerted campaigns against judges, particularly on social media, and media trials affect judicial
functioning.
 Ill-informed, biased and agenda-driven debates in the media on issues pending in courts are
affecting justice delivery.
 Unable to Distinguish Fake and Real
 New media tools have enormous amplifying ability but appear to be incapable of distinguishing
between the right and the wrong, the good and the bad and the real and the fake.
 Media trials cannot be a guiding factor in deciding cases.
 Wrongful Portrayal
 Media has been successful in portraying events that have to be kept a secret.
 Media trials have caused wrongful portrayal of alleged accused and have acted as a helping hand
in destroying their careers merely by the fact that they were accused, even though they have not
yet been portrayed guilty by the court of law.
 Not Good for Democracy
 Media has breached its responsibility, taking democracy two steps backwards, affecting people
and harming the system.
 Print media still has a certain degree of accountability whereas electronic media has zero
accountability as to what it shows vanishes in thin air.
 Instigate Hatred and Violence
 Paid news and fake news can manipulate public perception and can instigate hatred, violence, and
disharmony among the various communities within society.
 The absence of objective journalism leads to the false presentation of truth in a society which
affects the perception and opinions of people.
 Right to Privacy
 They invade their privacy which causes a breach of the Right to Privacy guaranteed under Article
21.

 Influence of Media on Accused

 If the naming of witnesses is published, there is a risk of the life of the witnesses coming under
force from both the accused or his associates and the police.
 The witnesses want to retract and get out of the chaos in the early stage.
 Witness protection is then a severe casualty. This leads to the interrogation about the
admissibility of hostile witness evidence and whether the law should be amended to prevent
witnesses from changing their statements.
 If the media projects an accused or a suspect as if he has already been convicted guilty well
before the Trial in court, there can be severe prejudice to the accused. Even if, eventually, the
person is acquitted after the court’s due action, such an acquittal may not help the accused rebuild
his past image in society.
 Excessive publicity in the media characterizing him as a person who had indeed committed the
crime amounts to undue intervention with the “administration of justice”, calling for proceedings
for contempt of court against the media.
 Influence of Media on Judges and Court
 Judges are not safe from criticism regarding their judicial conduct or their conduct in a purely
private capacity. But it is of concern when their complaints are ill-informed or entirely without
foundation and may undermine public confidence in judicial institutions.
 A judge is to regard himself against such pressure. A media publication can “unconsciously”
influence judges or juries and whether judges, as human beings, are not susceptible to such
indirect influences, at least subconsciously or unconsciously.

 Effects of Trial by Media on Society

 Social change is the transformation of culture and social organization/structure over time.
 As we are aware, the society has been never static in the modern world and the social, political,
economic and cultural changes occur constantly.
 It happens everywhere, but the rate of change varies from place to place.
 Social change is sometimes intentional, but often unplanned.
 The impact of a 'trial by media' on society is multidimensional:
 On one hand, it can lead to a more informed public, raising awareness about important issues,
and highlighting flaws in the justice system.
 On the other hand, it risks creating a society where public sentiment, rather than due process,
determines guilt and innocence. This can contribute to a culture of trial by public opinion,
where media narratives overshadow evidence and legal proceedings.
 The 'mass media' is a vital factor in the speed of social change. It permits rapid diffusion of ideas,
making these manifest in the private and relaxing environs of the home, where audiences are at
their most susceptible.
 Media plays a significant role to influence some sectors of society and impact social activities
like agitation, people participate etc. Thus, it has a significant effect on the social and judicial
administration.
 A good example of social change is the change in outlook towards various social crimes of the
society.

 Trial By Media Cases in India

 India, with its diverse populace and vibrant media, has witnessed several 'media trial cases'. These
instances have stirred debates around journalistic ethics, impartial reporting, and the impact on
the accused's right to a fair trial.
 Jessica Lal Murder Case (1999)
 The media played a pivotal role in reopening this high-profile case when the accused
were acquitted due to lack of evidence. Following public outcry spurred by media
coverage, the case was retried, leading to the conviction of the primary accused.
 Aarushi Talwar Murder Case (2008)
 This case is often cited as an instance where media trials overstepped the line.
Sensational reporting and unfounded speculation negatively impacted the lives of those
involved and raised questions about media ethics.
 Nirbhaya Rape Case (2012)
 Media reporting in this case ignited nationwide protests demanding justice for Nirbhaya
and stricter laws against sexual violence. Here, the media played a key role in
highlighting societal issues and pushing for reform.
 While the above examples demonstrate the powerful role of media in shaping public opinion and
influencing legal proceedings, it is essential to ensure that the pursuit of truth does not come at
the cost of an individual's rights.
 Media Regulation in India
 The body that regulates and governs the media and entertainment sector in India is enshrined in
the Cable Networks Act, 1995 and the Prasar Bharti Act, 1990. These are regulated by the
Ministry of Information and Broadcasting and Prasar Bharti.
 There are four bodies in India for media regulation:
 Press Council of India: Its mandate is to preserve the freedom of the press and to
maintain and improve the standards of newspapers and news agencies in India.
 News Broadcasting Standards Authority: It is an Industry Body created by the News
Broadcasters Association (NBA).
 Broadcasting Content Complaints Council: This is to deal with complaints against
entertainment and general segment television programmes.
 News Broadcasters Federation: It was created by those who left the NBA, called the
News Broadcasters Federation.

 Way Forward
 Media should only engage in acts of journalism and not act as a special agency for the court.
 Though the media acts as a watchdog and brings us a platform where the people can know
about the things happening in a society, it is important to know that this has only led to the
whole of the world being biased against one community or a single person.
 Media should understand that its role is to raise issues which the public is facing. Media can be
a voice for those who can’t speak for themselves. Media should not deliver judgment because in
India we have a judiciary for this purpose.
 Media should maintain its code of laws and ethics, social responsibility and credibility by not
interfering in the matters of court so early. Instead, they should do the research, keep a check on
high profile cases, find the evidence and keep it to them until and unless they find the truth
suppressing.
 Media, the fourth most essential pillar of our democracy, is the heart and soul of our system. It is
the backbone of our society. So, we must correct its limitations as in several cases, media trials
have tainted and scarred many people’s lives and have affected the lives of the innocent.
 The public should also not trust all the media news blindly.
 A person’s right to privacy should not be interfered with due to any media problem.

 Conclusion
 A democratic society’s basic essence lies in free speech prevailing one's ideas, propagating
information and knowledge, debate on the topic, expressing their views.
 Media acts as a watchdog and functions as a forum for taking the voice of the people to the
attention of government and the legislature.
 However, keeping its larger impact on the society and the judiciary, Media should restrain from
forming an opinion by conducting its own parallel investigation and trial.

Media is considered the fourth pillar of democracy. In such a situation, the

media must protect democratic principles. The reach of media is very wide,
in which case the responsibility of media also increases. Controlling the
media is also against democratic principles, so it is necessary that the media
improve itself with help of government and civil society and strengthen its
position as a pillar of democracy.
 Unemployment In India
 Unemployment
 Unemployment is a situation when a person actively searches for a job and is unable to find work.
 The unemployment rate is the most frequent measure of unemployment.
 The unemployment rate is the number of people unemployed divided by the working population
or people working under labour force.
 Unemployment is often used as a measure of the health of the economy.
 NSO defines employment and unemployment on the following activity statuses of an
individual:
 Working (engaged in an economic activity) i.e., 'Employed'.
 Seeking or available for work i.e., 'Unemployed'.
 Neither seeking nor available for work.
 The first two constitute the labour force and unemployment rate is the percent of the labour
force that is without work.
 Unemployment rate = (Unemployed Workers / Total labour force) × 100.

 Different Types of Unemployment

 Disguised Unemployment
 It is a phenomenon wherein more people are employed than actually needed.
 It is primarily traced in the agricultural and the unorganised sectors of India.
 Seasonal Unemployment
 It is an unemployment that occurs during certain seasons of the year.
 Agricultural labourers in India rarely have work throughout the year.
 Structural Unemployment
 It is a category of unemployment arising from the mismatch between the jobs available in the
market and the skills of the available workers in the market.
 Many people in India do not get jobs due to lack of requisite skills and due to poor education
level, it becomes difficult to train them.
 Cyclical Unemployment
 It is a result of the business cycle, where unemployment rises during recessions and declines
with economic growth.
 Cyclical unemployment figures in India are negligible. It is a phenomenon that is mostly
found in capitalist economies.
 Technological Unemployment
 It is the loss of jobs due to changes in technology.
 Frictional Unemployment
 The Frictional Unemployment also called as Search Unemployment, refers to the time lag
between the jobs when an individual is searching for a new job or is switching between the
jobs.
 In other words, an employee requires time for searching a new job or shifting from the
existing to a new job, this inevitable time delay causes frictional unemployment.
 Vulnerable Employment
 This means, people working informally, without proper job contracts and thus sans any legal
protection.
 These persons are deemed ‘unemployed’ since records of their work are never maintained.
 It is one of the main types of unemployment in India.
 Causes of Unemployment
 Large population leads to constant increase in population has been a big problem in India.
 It is one of the main causes of unemployment.
 Lack of vocational skills or low educational levels of the working population.
 Labour-intensive sectors suffering from the slowdown in private investment particularly after
demonetisation
 The low productivity in the agriculture sector plus the lack of alternative opportunities for
agricultural workers that makes transition among the three sectors difficult.
 Legal complexities, inadequate state support, low infrastructural, financial and market linkages to
small businesses making such enterprises unviable with cost and compliance overruns.
 Inadequate growth of infrastructure and low investments in the manufacturing sector, hence
restricting the employment potential of the secondary sector.
 The huge workforce of the country is associated with the informal sector because of a lack of
required education or skills, and this data is not captured in employment statistics.
 The main cause of structural unemployment is the education provided in schools and colleges are
not as per the current requirements of the industries.
 Regressive social norms that deter women from taking/continuing employment.
 In India the caste system is prevalent. The work is prohibited for specific castes in some areas. In
big joint families having big business, many such persons will be available who do not do any
work and depend on the joint income of the family.
 Still in India nearly half of the workforce is dependent on Agriculture. However, Agriculture is
underdeveloped in India. Also, it provides seasonal employment.
 The industrial development had adverse effects on cottage and small industries. The production of
cottage industries began to fall and many artisans became unemployed.
 Mobility of labour in India is low. Due to attachment to the family, people do not go too far off
areas for jobs. Factors like language, religion, and climate are also responsible for low mobility.
 Jobs in the capitalist world have become highly specialised but India’s education system does not
provide the right training and specialisation needed for these jobs. Thus, many people who are
willing to work become unemployed due to lack of skills.

 Impact of Unemployment
 The problem of unemployment gives rise to the problem of poverty.
 The government suffers extra borrowing burden because unemployment causes a decrease in the
production and less consumption of goods and services by the people.
 Unemployed persons can easily be enticed by antisocial elements. This makes them lose faith in
the democratic values of the country.
 People unemployed for a long time may indulge in illegal and wrong activities for earning money
which increases crime in the country.
 Unemployment affects the economy of the country as the workforce that could have been
gainfully employed to generate resources actually gets dependent on the remaining working
population, thus escalating socio-economic costs for the state. For instance, a 1 % increase in
unemployment reduces the GDP by 2 %.
 It is often seen that unemployed people end up getting addicted to drugs and alcohol or attempts
suicide, leading to losses to the human resources of the country.

 Addressing Unemployment
 Addressing unemployment requires a comprehensive approach that includes both short-term and
long-term strategies.
 Short-term strategies could involve providing financial assistance to the unemployed, offering job
training programs, and promoting job sharing.
  On the other hand, long-term strategies might focus on improving the education system to equip
individuals with the skills required for the jobs of the future, promoting entrepreneurship, and
fostering a business-friendly environment to encourage job creation.

 Government Initiatives To Control Unemployment

 Atma Nirbhar Bharat Rojgar Yojana (ABRY)
 It was launched with effect from 1st October, 2020 as part of Atma Nirbhar Bharat package
3.0 to incentivize employers for creation of new employment along with social security
benefits and restoration of loss of employment during Covid-19 pandemic.
 National Career Service (NCS) Project
 Project for transformation of the National Employment Service to provide a variety of career
related services like job matching, career counselling, vocational guidance, information on
skill development courses, apprenticeship, internships etc
 Pradhan Mantri MUDRA Yojana (PMMY)
 It is a scheme launched in 2015 for providing loans up to 10 lakhs to the non-corporate, non-
farm small/micro enterprises.
 These loans are classified as MUDRA loans under PMMY. These loans are given by
Commercial Banks, RRBs, Small Finance Banks, MFIs and NBFCs.
 Support for Marginalized Individuals for Livelihood and Enterprise (SMILE)
 It is a new Scheme after the merger of existing Schemes for Beggars and Transgenders.
 Scheme provides for the use of the existing shelter homes available with the State/UT
Governments and Urban local bodies for rehabilitation of the persons engaged in the act of
Begging.
 In case of non-availability of existing shelter homes, new dedicated shelter homes are to be
set up by the implementing agencies.
 The focus of the scheme is extensively on rehabilitation, provision of medical facilities,
counselling, basic documentation, education, skill development, economic linkages and so
on.
 It is estimated that an approximate 60,000 poorest persons would be benefited under this
scheme for leading a life of dignity.
 PM-DAKSH (Pradhan Mantri Dakshta Aur Kushalta Sampann Hitgrahi)
 PM-DAKSH Yojana is being implemented from the year 2020-21.
 Under this, eligible target groups are provided with the skill development training
programmes on Short Term Training Program; Up-Skilling/Reskilling; Entrepreneurship
Development Programme, and Long Term Training Programme.
 These training programmes are being implemented through the government training
institutes, sector skill councils that have been constituted by the Ministry of Skill
Development and Entrepreneurship, and other credible institutions.
 Mahatma Gandhi National Rural Employment Guarantee Act (MGNREGA)
 MGNREGA is one of the largest work guarantee programmes in the world.
 The primary objective of the scheme is to guarantee 100 days of employment in every
financial year to adult members of any rural household willing to do public work-related
unskilled manual work.
 Pradhan Mantri Kaushal Vikas Yojana (PMKVY)
 It aims to train over 40 crore people in India in different skills and aims at vocational
training and certification of Indian youth for a better livelihood and respect in the society.
 It aims to encourage and promote skill development in the country by providing free short
duration skill training and incentivizing this by providing monetary rewards to youth for
skill certification.
  Start Up India Scheme
 It was launched in April 2016 to promote entrepreneurship at the grass-root level focusing on
economic empowerment and job creation.
 And to leverage the institutional credit structure to reach out to the underserved sector of
people such as SCs, STs and Women Entrepreneurs.
 Rozgar Mela
 It is an initiative of the central government to provide employment opportunities to the
youth of the country.
 Under this scheme, 10 lakh jobs will be available for candidates to apply in Group A and B
Gazetted Posts, Group B Non-Gazetted and Group C Non-Gazetted posts.
 The Union Ministry of Home Affairs (MHA) would also fill a significant number of posts
in various Central Armed Police Forces.
 These recruitments are being done in mission mode by ministries and departments either by
themselves or through recruiting agencies such as UPSC, SSC and Railway Recruitment
Board.

 Measures to Reduce Unemployment Rate in India

 Use of Labour-intensive Technology
 Both the organised and un-organised sectors must adopt labour-intensive technology if
sufficient employment opportunities are to be generated in both the rural and urban sectors of
the economy.
 Increasing mechanization of agriculture in various states has lowered the employment
elasticity of growth of agricultural output.
 Of course, the use of labour-intensive techniques with lower productivity of workers in the
industry and agriculture may lower the growth of output.
 Thus, there might be same trade-off between employment and growth of output.
 Accelerating Investment in Agriculture
 An important reason for slow growth of employment in agriculture and rural sector has also
been a shortfall in investment or capital formation in agriculture
 Investment not only generates employment directly but also has a multiplier effect which
operates through backward and forward linkages
 Diversification of Agriculture
 There is an urgent need for a relative shift from growing of crops to horticulture, vegetable
production, floriculture, animal husbandry, fisheries etc. which are more labour absorbing
and higher income-yielding.
 In addition to this, promotion of agro-processing industries for export purposes has a large
employment potential
 Education, Health and Employment Generation
 The expansion of education and health care not only promotes accumulation of human
capital and thereby contributes to growth of output, it will also generate a good deal of
employment opportunities
 Development of the Rural Areas
 This will help mitigate the migration of the rural people to the urban areas thus decreasing the
pressure on the urban area jobs
 Overhaul of Education system
 Government needs to keep a strict watch on the education system and should try to
implement new ways to generate skilled labour force.
 Industry collaboration, Vocational training, Upgrading the standards of Education could be
the way forward in this perspective
  Need for National Employment Policy (NEP)
 This would encompass a set of multidimensional interventions covering a whole range of
social and economic issues affecting many policy spheres and not just the areas of labour and
employment.
 Decentralised Development
 It has been observed that unemployment is especially concentrated in certain regions.
 In order to overcome this geographical disparity, the government could incentivize firms to
set up operations in these areas by giving tax breaks.
 Generating Employment in Manufacturing and Services
 There is also an urgent need to generate much more employment in the manufacturing and
services sector compared to the number of jobs they have offered in the recent past. This
should include:
 Changes in labour laws which discourage industry to adopt labour-intensive production
 Employment-linked production incentives
 Special assistance for labour-intensive economic activities
 Decentralisation of Industries
 Decentralisation of Industrial activities is necessary so that people of every region get
employment.
 Development of the rural areas will help mitigate the migration of the rural people to the
urban areas thus decreasing the pressure on the urban area jobs.
 More Investments
 The private sector investment rate in India is declining — almost in a linear manner — since
2011. The employment scene will improve only if private investment picks up.
 The government should also align technical and vocational education and make enduring and
long-term investments in human capital through good-quality education, skills, and on-the-
job training, as well as in basic social protection.

 Conclusion
 Unemployment is the phenomenon when individuals despite a willingness to work are not able to
find work and employment.
 This can be attributed to a host of other reasons such as poor education and training, Labour
demand-supply mismatch, etc.
 It can turn the demographic dividend of a nation into a demographic burden
 Unemployment is a complex issue with far-reaching implications.
 Its resolution requires a multifaceted approach that addresses both the root causes and the effects.
Governments, businesses, and individuals must work together to create robust economies that
offer opportunities for all.
 The future of work is changing rapidly, and adapting to these changes is crucial to ensure that
unemployment rates do not escalate.
 As such, continuous learning and skills development will be paramount in maintaining
employability in the face of evolving job markets.

Unemployment is not just an economic issue, but a social issue that affects
individuals and societies at large. It leads to a waste of human resources, increased
poverty, and social instability. Unemployed individuals often face financial
hardships, leading to lower living standards and increased rates of mental health
issues. On a broader scale, high unemployment rates can lead to decreased economic
growth and increased government expenditure on welfare benefits.